Canon MP280 series On-screen Manual

Canon MP280 series On-screen Manual
‫صفحه ‪ 1‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪Canon MP280 series On-screen Manual‬‬
‫نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫چاپ اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫‪MC-4724-V1.00‬‬
‫راھنمای اوليه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫خالصه ای از اين محصول را توضيح‬
‫می دھد‪.‬‬
‫عملکرد دقيق اين محصول را توضيح می‬
‫دھد‪.‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫صفحه ‪ 2‬از ‪704‬‬
‫راھنمای اوليه ‪MP280 series‬‬
‫نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫چاپ اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب‬
‫نمای کلی دستگاه‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫نمايشگر ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند‬
‫کپی کردن عکس ھا‬
‫تعويض کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫ضميمه‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در رايانه‬
‫محدوديت ھای قانونی در مورد استفاده از محصول و تصاوير‬
‫نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫چاپ از رايانه شما‬
‫چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫چاپ صفحات وب )‪(Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫صفحه ‪ 3‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نمای کلی دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < نمای کلی دستگاه‬
‫نمای کلی دستگاه‬
‫اين بخش نام قطعات دستگاه را نشان می دھد و عملکردھای اصلی دستگاه را که بايد قبل از استفاده از آن اطالع داشته باشيد‪ ،‬توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫نمای جلو‬
‫نمای پشت‬
‫نمای داخلی‬
‫صفحه عمليات‬
‫نمايشگر ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 4‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < نمای کلی دستگاه < قطعات اصلی‬
‫‪C001‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫نمای جلو‬
‫نمای پشت‬
‫نمای داخلی‬
‫صفحه عمليات‬
‫نمای جلو‬
‫)‪ (1‬درپوش سند‬
‫برای قرار دادن سند اصلی روی صفحه شيشه ای‪ ،‬آن را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬نگھدارنده کاغذ‬
‫برای قرار دادن کاغذ در سينی عقب‪ ،‬آن را باال بياوريد و برگردانيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬سينی عقب )‪(Rear Tray‬‬
‫انواع کاغذ با اندازه ھای مختلف و مجاز جھت استفاده را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪ .‬دو يا چند برگ مثل ھم با اندازه ھای يکسان را می توان ھمزمان‬
‫در دستگاه قرار داد‪ ،‬و بطور خودکار ھر بار يکی از آنھا مورد استفاده قرار می گيرد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Loading Paper‬قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬راھنماھای کاغذ‬
‫آن را بلغزانيد تا دو طرف دسته کاغذ ھم تراز شوند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬سينی خروجی کاغذ‬
‫با شروع شدن عمل چاپ يا کپی‪ ،‬اين سينی باز می شود و کاغذ چاپ شده خارج می شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬قسمت الحاقی سينی خروجی‬
‫برای نگھداشتن کارھای چاپ اين قسمت را باز کنيد‪ .‬ھنگام چاپ يا کپی آن را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 5‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫)‪ (7‬صفحه شيشه ای‬
‫برای کپی يا اسکن‪ ،‬سند اصلی را قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (8‬صفحه عمليات‬
‫جھت تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه يا راه اندازی آن مورد استفاده قرار می گيرد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Operation Panel‬صفحه عمليات( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورتيکه دستگاه حدوداً ‪ 5‬دقيقه کار نکند‪ LED ،‬و المپ ھای روی صفحه عمليات به جز المپ برق )‪(POWER‬‬
‫خاموش می شوند‪ .‬برای بازنشانی آنھا‪ ،‬ھر دکمه ای به جز دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬را فشار دھيد يا عمليات چاپ را انجام‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نمای پشت‬
‫)‪ (9‬درگاه ‪USB‬‬
‫کابل ‪ USB‬را برای اتصال دستگاه به رايانه وصل کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫به محفظه فلزی دست نزنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که دستگاه اسناد اصلی را از رايانه چاپ يا در رايانه اسکن می کند‪ ،‬کابل ‪ USB‬را وصل نکنيد يا اگر وصل است‬
‫آن را از دستگاه جدا نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (10‬رابط سيم برق‬
‫سيم برق ارائه شده را به برق بزنيد‪.‬‬
‫نمای داخلی‬
‫صفحه ‪ 6‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫)‪ (11‬درپوش ھای قفل کننده کارتريج جوھر‬
‫کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬را در جای خود قفل می کنند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (12‬نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫نصب کارتريج ھای ‪.FINE‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬رنگی را بايد در شيار سمت چپ )‬
‫( و کارتريج ‪ FINE‬سياه را بايد در شيار سمت راست )‬
‫( نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (13‬کارتريج ھای ‪) FINE‬کارتريج ھای جوھر(‬
‫کارتريج قابل تعويض که با ھد چاپ و مخزن جوھر يکپارچه است‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر پيرامون نصب کارتريج ھای ‪ ،FINE‬به دفترچه راھنمای چاپ شده مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (14‬واحد اسکن )درپوش(‬
‫اسناد اصلی را اسکن می کند‪ .‬جھت تعويض کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬يا بيرون آوردن کاغذ گير کرده در دستگاه‪ ،‬آن را باز کنيد‪ .‬ھنگام باز کردن‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش(‪ ،‬با درپوش سند بسته آن را باال بياوريد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (15‬نگھدارنده واحد اسکن‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را ھنگامی که باز است نگه می دارد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قسمت )‪ (A‬نشان داده شده در شکل زير ممکن است توسط جوھر ترشح شده پوشيده شود‪ .‬اين مسئله بر عملکرد دستگاه تأثير‬
‫نمی گذارد‪.‬‬
‫به قسمت )‪ (A‬دست نزنيد‪ .‬در صورت دست زدن به آن‪ ،‬چاپگر ممکن است بدرستی کار نکند‪.‬‬
‫صفحه عمليات‬
‫صفحه ‪ 7‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه روشن )‪ / (ON‬چراغ برق )‪(POWER‬‬
‫دستگاه را روشن يا خاموش کنيد‪ .‬قبل از روشن نمودن دستگاه‪ ،‬دقت کنيد که درپوش سند بسته باشد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قطع اتصال دوشاخه برق‬
‫بعد از خاموش کردن دستگاه‪ ،‬ھنگامی که دوشاخه برق را جدا می کنيد‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬روشن‬
‫نباشد‪ .‬در صورتيکه دوشاخه برق از پريز ديوار جدا شده است ولی چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬روشن است يا چشمک می‬
‫زند‪ ،‬ممکن است دستگاه نتواند بدرستی چاپ کند‪ ،‬زيرا از ھد چاپ محافظت نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬و ھشدار‬
‫با استفاده از چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬و ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬می توانيد وضعيت دستگاه را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬خاموش است‪ :‬برق دستگاه قطع است‪.‬‬‫ چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬به رنگ سبز روشن است‪ :‬دستگاه آماده چاپ است‪.‬‬‫ چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند‪ :‬دستگاه در حال راه اندازی يا خاموش شدن است‪.‬‬‫ المپ ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬به رنگ نارنجی روشن يا چشمک می زند‪ :‬خطايی رخ داده است و دستگاه آماده چاپ نيست‪.‬‬‫برای اطالع از جزئيات‪ ،‬به عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند و چراغ ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬متناوبا ً به رنگ نارنجی چشمک می‬‫زند‪ :‬خطايی رخ داده است که الزم است با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪ .‬برای اطالع از جزئيات‪ ،‬به عيب يابی در ‪-on‬‬
‫‪ screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) LED (2‬ديود نوری( )‪((Light Emitting Diode) LED‬‬
‫تعداد کپی ھا‪ ،‬کد نگھداری‪ ،‬يا وضعيت کارکرد از قبيل کد خطا را نمايش می دھد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬دکمه ]‪[+‬‬
‫تعداد کپی ھا را تعيين می کند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬چراغ ھای جوھر )‪(Ink lamps‬‬
‫وقتی جوھر تمام می شود يا موارد ديگر‪ ،‬به رنگ نارنجی روشن يا چشمک می زند‪ .‬المپ سمت چپ نشان دھنده وضعيت کارتريج ‪ FINE‬رنگی‬
‫است و المپ سمت راست نشان دھنده وضعيت کارتريج ‪ FINE‬سياه است‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬دکمه کاغذ )‪(Paper‬‬
‫اندازه کاغذ و نوع رسانه را انتخاب می کند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬دکمه اسکن )‪(SCAN‬‬
‫اقدام به اسکن سند اصلی جھت ذخيره آن روی رايانه می نمايد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪(Stop/Reset‬‬
‫عملکردھا را لغو می نمايد‪ .‬ھمچنين می توانيد اين دکمه را جھت لغو چاپ‪ ،‬کپی‪ ،‬يا اسکن در حال انجام فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (8‬دکمه رنگ )‪* (Color‬‬
‫دستگاه کپی رنگی را شروع می کند‪ .‬شما نيز می توانيد اين دکمه را فشار دھيد تا انتخاب موارد تنظيمات پايان يابد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (9‬دکمه سياه )‪* (Black‬‬
‫کپی را به صورت سياه و سفيد انجام می دھد‪ .‬شما نيز می توانيد اين دکمه را فشار دھيد تا انتخاب موارد تنظيمات پايان يابد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 8‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قطعات اصلی‬
‫)‪ (10‬دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ / (Fit to Page‬المپ تنظيم برای صفحه )‪(Fit to Page‬‬
‫دستگاه‪ ،‬عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه را فعال می کند‪ .‬وقتی عملکرد کپی ‪) Fit to Page‬متناسب با صفحه( روشن می شود‪ ،‬چراغ متناسب با‬
‫صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬روشن می شود و می توانيد اسناد را که به طور خودکار متناسب با اندازه کاغذ انتخابی بزرگ يا کوچک می شوند کپی‬
‫کنيد‪ .‬وقتی عملکرد تنظيم برای صفحه غير فعال می شود‪ ،‬می توانيد اسناد را به اندازه سند اصلی کپی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪(11‬‬
‫دکمه )نگھداری( )‪(Maintenance‬‬
‫کد نگھداری را تعيين می کند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (12‬المپ کاغذ )‪(Paper‬‬
‫جھت نشان دادن اندازه صفحه و نوع رسانه انتخاب شده توسط دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬روشن می شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (13‬المپ ھشدار )‪(Alarm lamp‬‬
‫ھنگام بروز خطاھايی از قبيل تمام شدن کاغذ يا جوھر ‪ ،‬روشن می شود يا چشمک می زند‪.‬‬
‫* در برنامه ھای کاربردی نرم افزار يا دفترچه ھای راھنما‪ ،‬دکمه ھای سياه )‪ (Black‬و رنگ )‪ (Color‬را مجموعا ً دکمه "شروع" )"‪ ("Start‬يا‬
‫"تأييد" )‪ (OK‬می نامند‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 9‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نماﯾشگر ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < نمای کلی دستگاه < نمايشگر ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی‬
‫‪C002‬‬
‫نمايشگر ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی‬
‫می توانيد از اين دستگاه برای کپی گرفتن‪ ،‬انجام عملکردھای مراقبت و نگھداری بدون نياز به رايانه استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اين بخش صفحه نمايش ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی پانل کنترل را توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه دستگاه روشن می شود‪ ،‬شماره ‪ 1‬بصورت عادی روی ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫صفحه نمايش ‪ LED‬وضعيت دستگاه را مطابق زير نشان می دھد‪.‬‬
‫وضعيت دستگاه‬
‫ھنگام کپی کردن‬
‫نمايشگر ‪LED‬‬
‫تعداد کپی ھا )چشمک زن(‬
‫ھنگام چاپ‪ ،‬اسکن‪ ،‬يا انجام عملکردھای‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫)به ترتيب چشمک می زند(‬
‫درصورت بروز خطا‬
‫‪ E‬و شماره متناوبا ً ظاھر می شوند‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر درباره کدھای خطا‪ ،‬به " عيب يابی " در ‪on-screen manual‬‬
‫مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬و شماره متناوبا ً ظاھر می شوند‪.‬‬
‫ممکن است خطايی رخ داده باشد که نياز به تماس با مرکز خدمات داشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫برای اطالع از جزئيات‪ ،‬به عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪:‬‬
‫راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه واحد اسکن )درپوش( باز است‬
‫)چشمک می زند(‬
‫تعداد کپی ھا‬
‫با شروع شدن کپی‪ ،‬تعداد مورد نظر برای کپی روی ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شود‪ .‬در حين کپی‪ ،‬شماره روی ‪ LED‬چشمک می زند و يکی يکی کم می شود‬
‫که نشان دھنده تعداد نسخه کپی باقيمانده است‪.‬‬
‫با ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه ] ‪ [+‬تعداد نمايش داده شده روی ‪ LED‬يکی بيشتر می شود‪ .‬وقتی ‪ F‬ظاھر می شود‪ ،‬تعداد کپی ھا روی "‪ "20‬تنظيم خواھد‬
‫شد‪ .‬برای بازگشت به "‪ ،"1‬دکمه ] ‪ [+‬را مجدداً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کد مراقبت نگھداری‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا کد مورد نظر شما روی ‪ LED‬ظاھر‬
‫برای انجام مراقبت و نگھداری از دستگاه‪ ،‬دکمه‬
‫شود‪ ،‬و سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کد مراقبت و‬
‫صفحه ‪ 10‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نماﯾشگر ‪ LED‬و عملکردھای اصلی‬
‫مراجعه کنيد به‬
‫عملکرد‬
‫نگھداری‬
‫الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ می کند‪.‬‬
‫چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫ھد چاپ را تميز می کند‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫ھد چاپ را به طور کامل تميز می کند‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل‬
‫صفحه ترازبندی ھد چاپ را چاپ می کند‪.‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫برای ترازبندی خودکار ھد چاپ‪ ،‬صفحه‬
‫ترازبندی ھد چاپ را اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫مقادير تنظيم موقعيت فعلی ھد را چاپ می کند‪.‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫غلطک تغذيه کننده کاغذ را تميز می کند‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‬
‫داخل دستگاه را تميز می کند‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زيرين(‬
‫انداز کاغذ قرار داده شده در سينی عقب را بين‬
‫‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تغيير می دھد‪.‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪(Letter‬‬
‫)اين تنظيم برای گرفتن کپی استفاده می شود‪(.‬‬
‫برای جلوگيری از سايش کاغذ دستگاه را تنظيم‬
‫می کند‪.‬‬
‫به "کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود" در‬
‫""عيب ‪.‬‬
‫يابی " ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی‬
‫ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫کدھای خطا‬
‫ھنگام بروز خطا‪ E ،‬و شماره متناوبا ً روی ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شوند تا کد خطا را نشان دھد‪.‬‬
‫برای مثال "‪"E, 1, 6‬‬
‫)به ترتيب چشمک می زند(‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر درباره کدھای خطا‪ ،‬به " عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی‬
‫اگر کد خطايی با ‪ P‬ظاھر شود ممکن است خطايی رخ داده باشد که نياز به تماس با مرکز خدمات داشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫برای اطالع از جزئيات‪ ،‬به عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 11‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < کپی کردن‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫برای تنظيم با اندازه صفحه می توانيد کپی را به صورت کوچک يا بزرگ انجام دھيد و عالوه بر کپی ھای استاندارد می توانيد کپی ھای بدون حاشيه‬
‫عکس ھای چاپ شده را نيز در اختيار داشته باشيد‪.‬‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪(Letter‬‬
‫کپی کردن عکس ھا‬
‫کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 12‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب < ‪) Copying‬کپی کردن( < کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫‪C021‬‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫اين بخش مراحل کپی سند اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ Letter‬روی کاغذ ساده را توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫برای انجام چاپ‪ ،‬به نکات و مراحل کار توضيح داده شده در صفحه مرجع مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫موارد زير را بايد آماده کنيد‪:‬‬
‫اسناد اصلی که بايد کپی شوند‪ .‬به اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کاغذ برای چاپ‪ .‬به انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫آماده شدن برای کپی‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دستگاه را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Operation Panel‬صفحه عمليات( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به قرار دادن کاغذ ساده ‪ /‬کاغذ عکس مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا کاغذ ساده به اندازه ‪ ،A4‬يا اندازه )‪ (Letter‬را در سينی عقب قرار می دھيم‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫صفحه ‪ 13‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫)‪ (4‬سند اصلی را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به قرار دادن اسناد اصلی مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫سند اصلی را در حالتی که طرف مورد نظر برای کپی به سمت پايين قرار دارد روی شيشه قرار دھيد و ھمانگونه که در شکل زير نشان داده شده‬
‫است‪ ،‬با عالمت تراز‬
‫آن را تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫سپس درپوش سند را آرام ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای اطالع از جزئيات بيشتر در مورد انواع و وضعيت اسناد قابل کپی و طرز قرار دادن اسناد‪ ،‬به قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نويسه ھا و خطوط نوشته شده با خودکار کمرنگ يا ماژيک فسفری ممکن است درست کپی نشود‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫کپی را شروع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دكمه ]‪ [+‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا تعداد کپی ھا )حداکثر ‪ 20‬کپی( مشخص شود‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 1‬تا ‪ 9‬يا ‪ 20‬کپی‬
‫تعداد مورد نظر برای کپی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫با ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه ] ‪ [+‬تعداد نمايش داده شده روی ‪ LED‬يکی بيشتر می شود‪ .‬وقتی ‪ F‬ظاھر می شود‪ ،‬تعداد کپی ھا روی "‪ "20‬تنظيم‬
‫خواھد شد‪ .‬برای بازگشت به "‪ ،"1‬دکمه ] ‪ [+‬را مجدداً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 10‬تا ‪ 19‬کپی‬
‫)‪ F (1‬را روی ‪ LED‬نمايش دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬فقط تعداد مورد نظر برگه ھا برای کپی را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬جھت انتخاب اندازه صفحه و نوع رسانه‪ ،‬دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫المپ کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬اندازه صفحه انتخاب شده و نوع رسانه را نشان می دھد‪.‬‬
‫ما کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ را در کاست قرار می دھيم‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد از اندازه ھای صفحه و انواع رسانه زير استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ‬‫ کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ‬‫ کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ 15 × 10‬سانتی متر يا ‪ 6 × 4‬اينچ‬‫می توانيد اندازه کاغذ وارد شده در سينی عقب را بدون در نظر گرفتن اندازه نشان داده شده روی صفحه عمليات بين اندازه‬
‫ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه فعال می شود‪ ،‬می توانيد سند اصلی را بطور خودکار کوچک يا بزرگ نماييد تا‬
‫متناسب با اندازه صفحه انتخابی کپی شود‪ .‬در اين صورت‪ ،‬اسناد اصلی روی کاغذ ساده حاشيه دار و روی کاغذ عکس‬
‫بدون حاشيه کپی می شوند‪.‬‬
‫برای کپی يک سند اصلی در اندازه مشابه‪ ،‬عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه را لغو کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Fit-to-Page Copying‬کپی تنظيم برای صفحه( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬را برای کپی رنگی يا دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬را برای کپی سياه و سفيد فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه کپی را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫در حين کپی‪ ،‬شماره روی ‪ LED‬چشمک می زند و يکی يکی کم می شود که نشان دھنده تعداد نسخه کپی باقيمانده است‪.‬‬
‫بعد از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬اسناد اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای برداريد‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 10‬تا ‪ 19‬کپی‬
‫ھنگامی که ھمه کاغذھای وارد شده جھت چاپ مصرف شود‪ ،‬خطای تمام شدن کاغذ نمايش داده می شود )"‪ "E, 0, 2‬روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می‬
‫شود(‪ .‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را برای رفع خطا فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫فقط در صورت انتخاب کاغذ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬در اندازه کاغذ و نوع رسانه انتخاب شده‪ ،‬می توانيد کيفيت‬
‫چاپ را روی "سريع" تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای تنظيم کيفيت چاپ روی "سريع" )سرعت در اولويت(‬
‫‪ .1‬در قسمت )‪ (3‬مرحله ‪ ،2‬دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬يا سياه )‪ (Black‬را به مدت ‪ 2‬ثانيه يا بيشتر فشار داده و نگه داريد‪.‬‬
‫‪ LED‬يکبار چشمک می زند‪.‬‬
‫* وقتی دكمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬يا سياه )‪ (Black‬را كمتر از ‪ 2‬ثانيه فشار دھيد‪ ،‬دستگاه اقدام به كپی با كيفيتی "استاندارد"‬
‫می نمايد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬دکمه را رھا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه کپی را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫وقتی کيفيت چاپ روی "سريع" تنظيم شده باشد‪ ،‬سرعت چاپ بر کيفيت چاپ اولويت دارد‪ .‬برای اولويت دادن به کيفيت‬
‫چاپ‪ ،‬دكمهرنگ )‪ (Color‬يا سياه )‪ (Black‬را كمتر از ‪ 2‬ثانيه فشار دھيد‪ ،‬تا دستگاه اقدام به كپی با كيفيتی "استاندارد"‬
‫نمايد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا سند اصلی موجود در دستگاه را حرکت ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای لغو کپی‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪(Letter‬‬
‫اندازه صفحه وارد شده در سينی عقب را می توانيد بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اين تنظيم در صورتی مفيد است که ھميشه کاغذ اندازه ‪ Letter‬را بدون توجه به اندازه کاغذ نشان داده شده روی صفحه عملکرد "‪ "A4‬در سينی عقب‬
‫قرار دھيد و يا برعکس‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 14‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 15‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن اسناد‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ d‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫دکمه‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫برای انتخاب ‪ ،A4‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬را فشار دھيد يا برای انتخاب ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ ،(Letter‬دکمه رنگ )‬
‫‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگامی که اندازه صفحه را به ‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تغيير می دھيد‪ ،‬کاغذ مورد نظر را با اندازه انتخاب شده بدون‬
‫توجه به اندازه نشان داده شده روی صفحه عمليات در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ ھنگامی که اندازه صفحه روی ‪ A4‬تنظيم شده است؛ کاغذ ساده ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ عکس را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬‫ ھنگامی که اندازه صفحه روی ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تنظيم شده است؛ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬يا کاغذ عکس را در‬‫دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 16‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن عکس ھا‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب < کپی کردن < کپی کردن عکس ھا‬
‫‪C023‬‬
‫کپی کردن عکس ھا‬
‫اين بخش مراحل کپی عکسھای چاپ شده روی کاغذ عکس ‪ 10 × 15‬سانتی متر ‪ 4 × 6 /‬اينچ توضيح داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫موارد زير را بايد آماده کنيد‪:‬‬
‫عکس ھای چاپ شده‪.‬‬
‫کاغذ عکس برای چاپ‪ .‬به انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫برای کپی کردن يک عکس آماده شويد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دستگاه را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Operation Panel‬صفحه عمليات( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper‬قرار دادن کاغذ ساده ‪ /‬کاغذ عکس( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا کاغذ عکس ‪ 10 × 15‬سانتی متر ‪ 4 × 6 /‬اينچ را در سينی پشت قرار می دھيم‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬کاغذی را روی صفحه شيشه ايبگذاريد‪.‬‬
‫به قرار دادن اسناد اصلی مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫کپی را شروع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬جھت تعيين تعداد کپی‪ ،‬دکمه ] ‪ [+‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به مرحله ‪ 2‬درکپی کردن اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬جھت انتخاب اندازه صفحه و نوع رسانه‪ ،‬دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫المپ کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬اندازه صفحه انتخاب شده و نوع رسانه را نشان می دھد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ 15 × 10‬سانتی متر يا ‪ 6 × 4‬اينچ انتخاب می کنيم‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد از اندازه ھای صفحه و انواع رسانه زير استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ‬‫ کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ‬‫ کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ 15 × 10‬سانتی متر يا ‪ 6 × 4‬اينچ‬‫می توانيد اندازه کاغذ وارد شده در سينی عقب را بدون در نظر گرفتن اندازه نشان داده شده روی صفحه عمليات بين اندازه‬
‫ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ 11 × 8.5‬اينچ )‪ (Letter‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫صفحه ‪ 17‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن عکس ھا‬
‫وقتی عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه فعال می شود‪ ،‬می توانيد سند اصلی را بطور خودکار کوچک يا بزرگ نماييد تا‬
‫متناسب با اندازه صفحه انتخابی کپی شود‪ .‬در اين صورت‪ ،‬اسناد اصلی روی کاغذ ساده حاشيه دار و روی کاغذ عکس‬
‫بدون حاشيه کپی می شوند‪.‬‬
‫برای کپی يک سند اصلی در اندازه مشابه‪ ،‬عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه را لغو کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Fit-to-Page Copying‬کپی تنظيم برای صفحه( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬را برای کپی رنگی يا دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬را برای کپی سياه و سفيد فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه کپی را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫بعد از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬عکس را از روی صفحه شيشه ای برداريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا عکس موجود در دستگاه را حرکت ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای لغو کپی‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 18‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < کپی کردن < کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‬
‫‪C024‬‬
‫کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‬
‫عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه به شما امکان می دھد سند را به صورت خودکار و متناسب با اندازه صفحه انتخابی کپی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫آماده شدن برای کپی‪.‬‬
‫به مرحله ‪ 1‬درکپی کردن اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫جھت تعيين تعداد کپی‪ ،‬دکمه ] ‪ [+‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به مرحله ‪ 2‬درکپی کردن اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫جھت انتخاب اندازه صفحه و نوع رسانه‪ ،‬دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورت انتخاب کاغذ ساده برای نوع رسانه‪ ،‬اسناد با حاشيه چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫در صورت انتخاب کاغذ عکس برای نوع رسانه‪ ،‬اسناد بدون حاشيه و تمام صفحه چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫در کپی بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬ممکن است قسمتی از لبه ھا حذف شوند تا اندازه تصوير کپی شده برای قرار گرفتن در تمام صفحه بزرگ‬
‫شوند‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫المپ تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit-to-Page‬روشن می شود و عملکرد کپی فعال می شود‪ .‬اسناد اصلی در اندازه ای که بطور خودکار بزرگ يا کوچک‬
‫می شود تا متناسب با اندازه صفحه انتخابی شود‪ ،‬کپی می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫جھت لغو عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬و کپی اسناد به يک اندازه‪ ،‬دکمه تنظيم برای‬
‫صفحه را دوباره فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬را برای کپی رنگی يا دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬را برای کپی سياه و سفيد فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه‪ ،‬کپی تنظيم برای صفحه را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫بعد از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬اسناد اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای برداريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا سند اصلی موجود در دستگاه را حرکت ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫فقط در صورت انتخاب کاغذ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬در اندازه کاغذ و نوع رسانه انتخاب شده‪ ،‬می توانيد کيفيت چاپ‬
‫را روی "سريع" تنظيم کنيد‪ .‬برای تنظيم کيفيت چاپ روی "سريع" در مرحله ‪ ،5‬دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬يا سياه )‪ (Black‬را به‬
‫مدت ‪ 2‬ثانيه يا بيشتر فشار داده و نگه داريد‪.‬‬
‫به برای تنظيم کيفيت چاپ روی "سريع" )سرعت در اولويت( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای لغو کپی‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 19‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 20‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < اسکن کردن‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫می توانيد داده ھای اسکن شده را در رايانه ذخيره کنيد و آنھا را با برنامه کاربردی عرضه شده ويرايش يا پردازش کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در رايانه‬
‫آماده سازی برای اسکن کردن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در رايانه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 21‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در راﯾانه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < اسکن کردن تصاوير < ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در رايانه‬
‫‪C041‬‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در رايانه‬
‫اين بخش مراحل اسکن کردن اسناد اصلی را با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه و ذخيره آنھا روی رايانه مطابق با تنظيمات تعيين شده ‪MP‬‬
‫‪ Navigator EX‬توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫برای عمليات ھای اسکن اسناد‪ ،‬به ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھنمای پيشرفته‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫لطفا ً توجه داشته باشيد اگر به ھر دليلی داده ھا آسيب ببينند يا از دست بروند‪ Canon ،‬ھيچ مسئوليتی حتی در طول مدت ضمانت‪ ،‬بر‬
‫عھده نمی گيرد‪.‬‬
‫آماده سازی برای اسکن کردن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات‬
‫قبل از اسکن کردن اسناد اصلی‪ ،‬موارد زير را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا نرم افزارھای برنامه ھای کاربردی الزم )‪ MP Drivers‬و ‪ (MP Navigator EX‬نصب شده اند؟‬
‫در صورتی که ‪ MP Drivers and M‬و ‪ avigator EX‬نصب نشده اند يا نصب آنھا لغو شده است‪ ،‬آنھا را از ﻧﺻب ‪Setup) CD-ROM‬‬
‫‪ (CD-ROM‬نصب کنيد‪ .‬برای نصب ‪ MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX، MP Drivers‬و ‪ MP Navigator EX‬را در‬
‫‪ Custom Install‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا تنظيمات برای ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده با ‪ MP Navigator EX‬تعيين شده است؟‬
‫ھنگامی که داده ھای اسکن شده را با استفاده از صفحه عمليات در رايانه ذخيره می کنيد‪ ،‬می توانيد تنظيمات الزم جھت ذخيره داده ھای اسکن‬
‫شده را در موارد برگزيده )‪ (Preferences‬مربوط به ‪ MP Navigator EX‬تعيين کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد تنظيمات‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا سند اصلی که بايد اسکن شود شرايط الزم يک سند را برای قرار گرفتن بر روی صفحه شيشه ای دارد؟‬
‫برای اطالع از جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا دستگاه به درستی به رايانه وصل شده است؟‬
‫مطمئن شويد که اتصال بين دستگاه و رايانه ايمن و بدون خطر است‪.‬‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در رايانه‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫برای اسکن کردن آماده شويد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دستگاه را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به صفحه عمليات مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬سند اصلی را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به قرار دادن اسناد اصلی مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫نويسه ھا و خطوط نوشته شده با خودکار کمرنگ يا ماژيک فسفری ممکن است درست اسکن نشود‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫دکمه اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬را برای شروع اسکن فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ MP Navigator EX‬راه اندازی می شود‪ ،‬و داده ھای اسکن شده طبق تنظيمات تعيين شده با ‪ MP Navigator EX‬در رايانه ذخيره می شود‪.‬‬
‫بعد از اتمام اسکن‪ ،‬اسناد اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای برداريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫ھنگامی که دستگاه در حال کار کردن است‪ ،‬آن را خاموش نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که دستگاه اسناد اصلی را اسکن می کند‪ ،‬کابل ‪ USB‬را وصل نکنيد يا اگر وصل است آن را از دستگاه جدا نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫قبل از اتمام اسکن‪ ،‬درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا سند اصلی موجود در دستگاه را حرکت ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫بسته به نوع سند اصلی ممکن است موقعيت يا اندازه سند به طور صحيح اسکن نشود‪.‬‬
‫در اين وضعيت‪ ،‬به ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھنمای پيشرفته تا تنظيمات ‪ MP Navigator EX‬در ‪Document‬‬
‫‪ Type‬و ‪ Document Size‬برای مطابقت با سند اصلی و اسکن آن تغيير يابد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که صفحه انتخاب برنامه ظاھر می شود‪:‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 22‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ذخيره داده ھای اسکن شده در راﯾانه‬
‫صفحه انتخاب برنامه ممکن است بعد از اجرای مرحله ‪ 2‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫درصورتی که صفحه انتخاب برنامه ظاھر شود‪ MP Navigator EX Ver4.0 ،‬را انتخاب کرده و روی تأييد )‪ (OK‬کليک‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای راه اندازی ‪ MP Navigator EX‬به صورت خودکار و بدون نمايش صفحه انتخاب برنامه‪ ،‬مراحل زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ برای کاربران ‪ Windows 7‬يا ‪ ،Windows Vista‬به "برای کاربران ‪ "Windows‬در " عيب يابی " از ‪on-screen‬‬‫‪:manual‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ برای کاربران ‪ Windows XP، MP Navigator EX Ver4.0‬را به عنوان برنامه نرم افزاری مورد استفاده در صفحه‬‫انتخاب برنامه انتخاب کنيد‪ Always use this program for this action ،‬را انتخاب کرده و سپس روی تأييد )‪(OK‬‬
‫کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 23‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ از راﯾانه شما‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < چاپ از رايانه شما‬
‫چاپ از رايانه شما‬
‫در اين بخش مراحل چاپ اسناد يا عکس ھا از رايانه توضيح داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫به راحتی می توانيد عکسھايی که با دوربين ديجيتال خود با استفاده از ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬ارائه شده به ھمراه دستگاه گرفته ايد را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مختلف ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫چاپ صفحات وب )‪(Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫‪) Solution Menu EX‬منوی راه حل(‬
‫‪) Easy-WebPrint EX‬چاپ صفحات وب(‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 24‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب < چاپ از رايانه شما < چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫‪C051‬‬
‫چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫داده ھای تصويری ذخيره شده روی رايانه را با استفاده از ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬ارائه شده به ھمراه دستگاه چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اين بخش مراحل چاپ عکس ھای بدون حاشيه روی کاغذ عکس ‪ 10x15‬سانتی متر ‪ 4x6 /‬اينچ توضيح داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد ‪ ،Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورتی که ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬نصب نشده يا نصب آن لغو شده است‪ ،‬آن را از ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻧﺻب ‪CD-ROM) (Setup‬‬
‫نصب کنيد‪ .‬جھت نصب ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX، Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬در ‪ Custom Install‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫برای چاپ آماده شويد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫به ‪) Operation Panel‬صفحه عمليات( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به قرار دادن کاغذ ساده ‪ /‬کاغذ عکس مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا کاغذ عکس ‪ 10x15‬سانتی متر ‪ 4x6 /‬اينچ را در سينی پشت قرار می دھيم‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬را از ‪ Solution Menu EX‬شروع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ Solution Menu EX (1‬را راه اندازی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪ Solution Menu EX‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اينجا را کليک کنيد‪Solution Menu EX :‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬روی‬
‫)‪ (Photo Print‬در منوی ‪ Photo Print‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬راه اندازی می شود‪ ،‬و صفحه عمليات ‪ Photo Print‬ظاھر خواھد شد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫عالوه بر چاپ عکس‪ ،‬عملکرد ايجاد آلبوم‪ ،‬تقويم‪ ،‬و ساير موارد عکس موجود است‪.‬‬
‫به استفاده از عملکردھای مختلف ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 25‬از ‪704‬‬
‫عکسی را برای چاپ انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬پوشه ای که تصاوير در آن ذخيره شده اند را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬بر روی تصوير مورد نظر برای چاپ کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تعداد کپی ھا به صورت "‪ "1‬نشان داده می شود و تصوير انتخابی شما در قسمت نمايش تصوير انتخابی )‪ (A‬ظاھر می شود‪ .‬می توانيد به طور‬
‫ھمزمان دو يا چند تصوير انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫)پيکان باال( جھت تغيير تعداد کپی ھا کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ دو يا چند کپی‪ ،‬بر روی‬
‫برای لغو انتخاب‪ ،‬در قسمت نمايش تصاوير انتخابی‪ ،‬بر روی تصوير مورد نظر جھت لغو )‪ (A‬و‬
‫‪ (B) (Imported Image‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬برای تغيير دادن تعداد کپی به صفر‪ ،‬ھمچنين می توانيد از‬
‫استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين می توانيد تصوير انتخابی را اصالح کرده يا بھبود ببخشيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد از يک فيلم عکس بگيريد و ذخيره کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به استفاده از عملکردھای مختلف ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪Delete‬‬
‫)پيکان پايين(‬
‫)‪ (3‬روی ‪ Select Paper‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫کاغذ قرار داده شده در دستگاه را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬بررسی کنيد که نام دستگاه شما حتما ً در قسمت چاپگر )‪(Printer‬انتخاب شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬اندازه و نوع کاغذ قرار داده شده در دستگاه را در ‪ Paper Size‬و ‪ Media Type‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا ‪ 4x6‬اينچ ‪10x15‬سانتی متر )‪ (4"x6" 10x15cm‬را در اندازه کاغذ )‪ (Paper Size‬و نوع کاغذ عکس قرار داده شده را در نوع‬
‫رسانه )‪ (Media Type‬انتخاب می کنيم‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر نوع رسانه را اشتباه انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬کيفيت چاپ خوب نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬روی ‪ Layout/Print‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ عکس ھا )‪(Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 26‬از ‪704‬‬
‫يک چيدمان انتخاب کرده و چاپ را شروع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬چيدمان عکس را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا ‪ (full) Borderless‬را انتخاب می کنيم‪.‬‬
‫پيش نمايش جھت تأييد نتيجه چاپ مورد نياز در چيدمان انتخابی ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد جھت عکس را تغيير دھيد يا عکس ھا را برای چاپ ببريد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد نحوه کار‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬روی ‪ Print‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای لغو چاپی که در حال انجام است‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬روی دستگاه را فشار دھيد يا روی ‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪ Printing‬در صفحه نمايش وضعيت چاپگر کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای نمايش نمايشگر وضعيت چاپ‪ ،‬روی نماد چاپگر در نوار وظيفه کليک کنيد‪ .‬در‪ Windows Vista‬يا ‪،Windows XP‬‬
‫روی ‪) Canon XXX Printer‬که " ‪ "XXX‬نام دستگاه شما است( در نوار وظيفه کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 27‬از ‪704‬‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مختلف ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < چاپ از رايانه شما < چاپ عکس ھا )‪ < (Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬استفاده از عملکردھای مختلف ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫‪C052‬‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مختلف ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫در اين بخش چند عملکرد مفيد ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬توضيح داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ايجاد موارد چاپ شخصی‬
‫با استفاده از عکس ھای خود می توانيد آلبوم يا تقويم درست کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Album‬‬
‫‪Calendar‬‬
‫‪Stickers‬‬
‫‪Layout Print‬‬
‫ايجاد تصاوير ثابت از فيلم ھا‬
‫می توانيد تصاوير ويدئويی را ضبط کنيد و تصاوير ثابت ايجاد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 28‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب < چاپ از رايانه شما < چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫‪C053‬‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫اين بخش مراحل چاپ سند به اندازه ‪ A4‬روی کاغذ ساده را توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ممکن است عمليات بسته به برنامه نرم افزاری شما متفاوت باشد‪ .‬برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد عمليات‪ ،‬به دفترچه دستورالعمل برنامه‬
‫کاربردی خود مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ھای مورد استفاده در اين بخش برای چاپ در ‪ Windows 7 Home Premium‬است )که از اين به بعد " ‪"Windows 7‬‬
‫گفته می شود(‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫اطمينان حاصل کنيد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫به صفحه عمليات مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به قرار دادن کاغذ ساده ‪ /‬کاغذ عکس مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا کاغذ ساده ‪ A4‬را در سينی عقب قرار می دھيم‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫با استفاده از يک برنامه نرم افزاری مناسب‪ ،‬سندی را جھت چاپ‪ ،‬ايجاد )يا باز( کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬چاپ )‪ (Print‬در منوی پرونده )‪ (File‬يا در نوار فرمان در برنامه نرم افزاری خود را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی چاپ )‪ (Print‬ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دقت کنيد که نام دستگاه شما حتما ً انتخاب شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر نام چاپگر ديگری انتخاب شده است‪ ،‬بر روی نام دستگاه خود کليک کرده و آن را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬روی موارد برگزيده )‪) (Preferences‬يا ويژگی ھا )‪ ((Properties‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫تنظيمات الزم چاپ را تعيين کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ Business Document (1‬در ‪ Commonly Used Settings‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر شیء مورد نظر برای چاپ نظير ‪ Business Document‬يا ‪ Photo Printing‬در ‪Commonly Used‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫‪ Settings‬انتخاب شود‪ Additional Features ،‬بطور خودکار انتخاب می شود‪ .‬تنظيمات مناسب برای شیء چاپ‬
‫نظير نوع رسانه يا کيفيت چاپ نيز ظاھر می شوند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬از تنظيمات نمايش داده شده مطمئن شويد‪.‬‬
‫در اينجا مطمئن می شويم که ‪ Plain Paper‬در ‪ Media Type، Standard‬در ‪Print Quality‬و ‪ A4‬در ‪ Printer Paper Size‬انتخاب شده‬
‫اند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫وقتی دو يا چند کپی را در کپی )‪ (Copies‬تعيين می کنيد‪ ،‬صفحات چاپ شده تلفيق می شوند‪.‬‬
‫تنظيمات را می توان تغيير داد‪.‬‬
‫اما پس از تغيير ‪ ،Printer Paper Size‬تأييد کنيد که تنظيمات ‪ Page Size‬در صفحه ‪ Page Setup‬با تنظيمات‬
‫انجام شده در برنامه نرم افزاری مطابقت می کند‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر نوع رسانه را اشتباه انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬کيفيت چاپ خوب نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬روی تأييد )‪ (OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد عملکردھای درايور چاپگر‪ ،‬جھت مشاھده راھنمای آنالين يا ‪ ،on-screen manual‬بر روی‬
‫‪ Help‬يا ‪ Instructions‬کليک کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪ .‬در صورتيکه ‪ on-screen manual‬در رايانه شما نصب شده‬
‫باشد‪ ،‬دکمه ‪ Instructions‬در صفحات ‪ Quick Setup، Main‬و ‪ Maintenance‬ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد تنظيمات تغيير يافته را نامگذاری کنيد و به ‪ Commonly Used Settings‬اضافه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر کادر بررسی ‪ Always Print with Current Settings‬انتخاب شود‪ ،‬تنظيمات فعلی از کار چاپ بعدی اجرا می شوند‪.‬‬
‫برخی از برنامه ھای نرم افزاری ممکن است دارای اين عملکرد نباشند‪.‬‬
‫برای مشاھده پيش نمايش جھت تأييد نتيجه چاپ‪ ،‬کادر انتخاب ‪ Preview before printing‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬ممکن است‬
‫برخی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری عملکرد پيش نمايش را نداشته باشند‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد تنظيمات دقيق چاپ را در صفحه ‪ Main‬يا صفحه ‪ Page Setup‬تعيين کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫چاپ را شروع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای شروع چاپ روی چاپ )‪) (Print‬يا تأييد )‪ ((OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 29‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 30‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام چاپ کاغذ پاکت نامه‪ ،‬پيام مربوط به نحوه قرار دادن آن ظاھر خواھد شد‪ .‬اگر کادر انتخاب ‪Do not show this‬‬
‫‪ .message again‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬بار ديگر اين پيام ديگر ظاھر نخواھد شد‪.‬‬
‫برای کسب جزئيات تنظيمات جھت چاپ پاکت ھا‪ ،‬به قرار دادن پاکت نامه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای لغو چاپی که در حال انجام است‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬روی دستگاه را فشار دھيد يا روی ‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪ Printing‬در صفحه نمايش وضعيت چاپگر کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای نمايش نمايشگر وضعيت چاپ‪ ،‬روی نماد چاپگر در نوار وظيفه کليک کنيد‪ .‬در سيستم عامل‪) Windows Vista‬که از‬
‫اين به بعد "‪ "Windows Vista‬ناميده می شود( يا ‪ Windows XP‬روی ‪) Canon XXX Printer‬که " ‪ "XXX‬نام دستگاه‬
‫شما است( در نوار وظيفه کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر خطوط به طور نامنظم چاپ شده يا نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‪ ،‬موقعيت ھد چاپ را تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به تراز کردن ھد چاپ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 31‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ صفحات وب )‪(Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < چاپ از رايانه شما < چاپ صفحات وب )‪(Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫‪C054‬‬
‫چاپ صفحات وب )‪(Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬چاپ سريع و آسان صفحات وب برای ‪ Internet Explorer‬را فراھم می کند‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد صفحات وب را به طور خودکار برای متناسب شدن با پھنای صفحه بدون بريدن کناره ھای صفحه چاپ کنيد‪ ،‬يا صفحات وب مورد نظر را‬
‫پيش مشاھده کرده و آنھا را برای چاپ انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬به ‪ Internet Explorer 7‬يا جديدتر نياز دارد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫تکثير يا ويرايش کارھای دارای حق چاپ اشخاص ديگر بدون کسب اجازه از آنھا‪ ،‬به غير از استفاده شخصی‪ ،‬استفاده در خانه يا ساير‬
‫استفاده ھای محدود شده توسط حق چاپ‪ ،‬غير قانونی است‪ .‬عالوه بر اين‪ ،‬تکثير يا ويرايش عکس ھای افراد ممکن است تجاوز به‬
‫حقوق تصوير آنھا تلقی شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای کسب اطالعات درباره نصب يا راه اندازی ‪ ،Easy-WebPrint EX‬به‬
‫‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عملکرد برش‪ ،‬برای مثال‪ ،‬اين امکان را برای شما فراھم می کند که قسمت ھای مورد نظر صفحات وب را برش داده و برای چاپ آنھا را ويرايش‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد کار با ‪ ،Easy-WebPrint EX‬به راھنمای آنالين مراجعه کنيد‪ .‬روی ‪ (A) Easy-WebPrint EX‬روی نوار‬
‫ابزار کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس از منوی گشودنی برای مشاھده راھنمای آنالين ‪) Help‬راھنما( را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 32‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ صفحات وب )‪(Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 33‬از ‪704‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < چاپ از رايانه شما < راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫‪C055‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫اين فصل در مورد ‪ Solution Menu EX‬توضيح می دھد‪ ،‬که برای راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری ارائه شده بھمراه دستگاه به کار می رود‪.‬‬
‫اطالعاتی در مورد ‪ ،Easy-WebPrint EX‬يک برنامه نرم افزاری برای چاپ صفحات وب‪ ،‬نيز ارائه شده است‪.‬‬
‫‪Solution Menu EX‬‬
‫‪ Solution Menu EX‬برنامه کاربردی است که امکان دسترسی فوری به برنامه ھای نرم افزاری ديگر ارائه شده به ھمراه دستگاه‪ ،‬دفترچه ھای‬
‫راھنما‪ ،‬و اطالعات آنالين محصول را فراھم می کند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫‪ ،Solution Menu EX، on-screen manual‬يا ساير برنامه ھای کاربردی که می خواھيد استفاده کنيد را از ‪-Setup CD‬‬
‫‪ROM‬ﻧﺻب ‪ CD-ROM‬نصب کنيد وقتی اين برنامه ھا نصب نشده اند يا حذف شده اند‪ .‬برای نصب‪ ،‬آنھا را از ‪Custom Install‬‬
‫انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫منوھا در قسمت منوی دسته بندی )‪ (Category Menu‬صفحه اصلی‪ Solution Menu EX‬نمايش داده می شوند‪ .‬روی يک منو در قسمت‬
‫‪ Category Menu‬کليک کنيد تا نمادھای عملکردھای موجود در آن منو‪ ،‬در قسمت نماد عملکرد صفحه اصلی نشان داده شوند‪.‬‬
‫تعداد و نوع نمادھا يا منوھای نشان داده شده در صفحه اصلی ممکن است بسته به دستگاه و منطقه شما متفاوت باشد‪.‬‬
‫* صفحه زير مربوط به ‪ Windows 7‬است‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬صفحه اصلی‬
‫)‪ (B‬منطقه نماد عملکرد )‪(Function Icon‬‬
‫)‪ (C‬قسمت منوی دسته بندی )‪(Category Menu‬‬
‫)‪ (D‬لوازم دسکتاپ )‪(Desktop Accessory‬‬
‫)‪ (E‬منوی ميانبر که می توانيد نمادھای عملکردھای متداول را به آن اضافه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (F‬نماد لوازم که با آن می توانيد صفحه اصلی را نشان دھيد‪ ،‬منوی ميانبرھا را ظاھر يا پنھان کنيد‪ ،‬و غيره‪.‬‬
‫‪Photo Print‬‬
‫عکسھايی که با يک دوربين ديجيتال گرفته شده را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Use Scanner‬‬
‫عکسھا يا اسناد را اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon Web Service‬‬
‫مطالب يا محتويات را از سايت برای چاپ دانلود کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Help & Settings‬‬
‫راھنمای آنالين ‪ Solution Menu EX‬يا ‪ on-screen manual‬دستگاه را مشاھده کنيد‪ Solution Menu EX .‬يا دستگاه را نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Sent to Application‬‬
‫برنامه ھای نرم افزاری ارائه شده مانند ‪ My Printer‬و ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬را راه اندازی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫با چاپگر)‪ (My Printer‬می توانيد پنجره تنظيم درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪ ،‬و اطالعاتی در مورد اقداماتی دست بياوريد که ھنگام بروز مشکل در‬
‫عمليات بايد انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Online Shopping‬‬
‫مواد مصرفی مانند جوھر را از سايت خريداری کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Information‬‬
‫اطالعات مفيدی درباره دستگاه به دست بياوريد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای دسترسی به سايت جھت کسب اطالعات مفيد و غيره‪ ،‬بايد رايانه به اينترنت وصل باشد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد نحوه کار ‪ ،Solution Menu EX‬به راھنمای آنالين مراجعه کنيد‪ .‬منوی ‪ Help & Settings‬را انتخاب‬
‫کنيد‪ ،‬سپس روی‬
‫)‪ (Solution Menu EX's Help‬برای مشاھده راھنمای آنالين کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری از ‪Solution Menu EX‬‬
‫از ‪ ،Solution Menu EX‬می توانيد يک برنامه نرم افزاری را راه اندازی کنيد‪ ،‬و نيز مستقيما ً به يک عملکرد برنامه نرم افزاری دسترسی‬
‫پيدا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مرحله زير برای راه اندازی ‪ Solution Menu EX‬است و‪ ،‬به عنوان مثال‪ ،‬انتخاب يکی از عملکردھای ‪ ،Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬چاپ‬
‫عکس )‪.(Photo Print‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪ Solution Menu EX‬را راه اندازی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (Solution Menu EX‬را از روی دسک تاپ دوبار کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اينجا را کليک کنيد‪Solution Menu EX :‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫وقتی رايانه را راه اندازی می کنيد ‪ Solution Menu EX‬به طور خودکار شروع می شود‪ ،‬مگر آنکه تنظيمات پيش فرض تغيير‬
‫کرده باشد‪.‬‬
‫برای اجرای ‪ Solution Menu EX‬از منوی شروع )‪ ،(Start‬تمام برنامه ھا )‪،Canon Utilities ، (All Programs‬‬
‫‪ Solution Menu EX‬و سپس ‪ Solution Menu‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر صفحه اصلی ‪ Solution Menu EX‬پس از راه اندازی ‪ Solution Menu EX‬ظاھر نشد‪ ،‬روی‬
‫)‪Accessory‬‬
‫‪) (Icon‬نماد لوازم( راست کليک کنيد و صفحه اصلی را نشان بده )‪ (Show Main Screen‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫عملکرد برنامه نرم افزاری که می خواھيد شروع کنيد را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬روی منوی چاپ عکس )‪ (Photo Print‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬روی‬
‫)چاپ عکس )‪ ((Photo Print‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬راه اندازی می شود‪ ،‬و صفحه عمليات ‪ Photo Print‬ظاھر خواھد شد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫عالوه بر چاپ عکس‪ ،‬عملکرد ايجاد آلبوم‪ ،‬تقويم‪ ،‬و ساير موارد عکس موجود است‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات در مورد عمليات و عملکردھای ‪ ،Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬به ‪. (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Printing Photos‬‬
‫مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 34‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 35‬از ‪704‬‬
‫راه اندازی برنامه ھای نرم افزاری مختلف‬
‫ھنگامی که ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬نصب شود‪ ،‬يک نوار ابزار به صفحه ‪ Internet Explorer‬اضافه می شود‪ .‬ھنگامی که ‪Internet‬‬
‫‪ Explorer‬در حال اجرا باشد‪ ،‬اين نوار ابزار موجود است‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫نصب ‪Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫اگر ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬نصب نشده است‪ ،‬راھنمای نصب ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬ممکن است درقسمت اطالع رسانی نوار وظيفه‬
‫ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫برای نصب ‪ ،Easy-WebPrint EX‬روی راھنمای نمايش داده شده کليک کرده و دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين می توانيد از ﻧﺻب ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX ، (Setup CD-RO) CD-ROM‬را نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت نصب ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX، Easy-WebPrint EX‬در ‪ Custom Install‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای نصب ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬در کامپيوتر‪ Internet Explorer 7 ،‬يا نسخه جديد تر آن مورد نياز است و کامپيوتر بايد به‬
‫اينترنت متصل باشد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 36‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫اين بخش به توضيح نوع کاغذ يا اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد و ھمچنين نحوه قرار دادن کاغذ چاپ در سينی عقب و نحوه قرار دادن اسناد‬
‫اصلی برای کپی يا اسکن می پردازد‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ساده‪/‬کاغذ عکس‬
‫قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫انواع رسانه ھايی که نمی توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 37‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی < قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫‪C073‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ساده‪/‬کاغذ عکس‬
‫قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫انواع رسانه ھايی که نمی توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ساده‪/‬کاغذ عکس‬
‫مھم‬
‫اگر به منظور چاپ آزمايشی‪ ،‬کاغذ ساده را به قطعات کوچک از قبيل ‪ 15 × 10‬سانتيمتر ‪ 6 × 4 /‬اينچ ‪ 203.2 × 101.6،‬ميليمتر ‪/‬‬
‫‪ 8 × 4‬اينچ ‪ 18 × 13 ،‬سانتيمتر ‪ 7× 5 /‬اينچ يا ‪ 91.0 × 55.0‬ميليمتر ‪ 3.58 × 2.16 /‬اينچ )اندازه کارت( برش دھيد‪ ،‬ممکن است‬
‫باعث گير کردن کاغذ در دستگاه شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫توصيه می کنيم برای چاپ عکس‪ ،‬از کاغذ عکس اصلی ‪ Canon‬استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت کسب اطالعات بيشتردرباره کاغذ اصلی ‪ ،Canon‬به انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد از کاغذ کپی معمولی استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت اطالع از اندازه کاغذ و وزن کاغذ قابل استفاده برای اين دستگاه به انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫کاغذ را آماده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫لبه ھای کاغذ را تراز کنيد‪ .‬اگر کاغذ تا خورده است آن را صاف کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫قبل از قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‪ ،‬لبه ھای آن را به طور دقيق تراز کنيد‪ .‬قرار دادن کاغذ بدون تراز لبه ھا باعث گير کردن آن‬
‫می شود‪.‬‬
‫در صورت پيچيدن کاغذ‪ ،‬قسمت پيچ خورده را گرفته و در جھت مخالف خم کنيد تا کاغذ کامالً صاف شود‪.‬‬
‫جھت کسب اطالعات بيشتر درباره صاف کردن کاغذ تاب برداشته‪ ،‬به "عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬ر‬
‫اھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬نگھدارنده کاغذ را باز کنيد‪ ،‬آن را بلند کرده و به سمت عقب برگردانيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫)‪ (3‬راھنماھای کاغذ را بلغزانيد )‪ (A‬تا باز شوند و کاغذ را در وسط سينی پشت به صورتی قرار دھيد که طرف‬
‫چاپ به سمت شما باشد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬راھنماھای کاغذ را بلغزانيد )‪ (A‬و آنھا را با دو طرف دسته کاغذ تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫راھنماھای کاغذ را خيلی محکم نلغزانيد‪ .‬کاغذ ممکن است به درستی وارد دستگاه نشود‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫ھميشه کاغذ را در جھت عمودی در دستگاه قرار دھيد )‪ .(B‬قرار دادن کاغذ در جھت افقی )‪ (C‬باعث گير کردن کاغذ می‬
‫شود‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 38‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 39‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‬
‫نکته‬
‫بيش از عالمت حد مجاز کاغذ )‪ ،(D‬صفحه کاغذ در دستگاه قرار ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام تغذيه کاغذ‪ ،‬ممکن است دستگاه صدا ايجاد کند‪.‬‬
‫بعد از قرار دادن کاغذ‬
‫ھنگام کپی‪ ،‬اندازه و نوع کاغذی را که در دستگاه قرار داده ايد را با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه انتخاب نماييد‪.‬‬
‫به کپی کردن مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام چاپ با رايانه‪ ،‬اندازه و نوع کاغذ قرار داده شده در دستگاه را در اندازه کاغذ چاپگر )‪ (Printer Paper Size‬و نوع‬
‫رسانه )‪ (Media Type‬در درايور چاپگر انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به چاپ اسنادمراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 40‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی < قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه < قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫‪C074‬‬
‫قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫می توانيد روی پاکت نامه ھای اندازه ‪ European DL‬و‪ US #10‬چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آدرس به صورت خودکار می چرخد و مطابق با جھت پاکت نامه که توسط درايور چاپگر به درستی تعيين می شود‪ ،‬چاپ می گردد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫فقط از طريق رايانه می توانيد روی پاکت نامه چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫از پاکت ھای نامه زير استفاده نکنيد‪ .‬ممکن است در دستگاه گير کنند يا باعث نقص عملکرد دستگاه شوند‪.‬‬
‫ پاکت ھای نامه دارای سطح برجسته يا روسازی شده‬‫ پاکت ھای نامه دارای درب دوبل )يا درب ھای برچسبی(‬‫‪ -‬پاکت ھای نامه ای که درب چسبنده آنھا از قبل مرطوب و چسبناک شده است‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام چاپ کاغذ پاکت نامه‪ ،‬پيام مربوط به نحوه قرار دادن آن ظاھر خواھد شد‪ .‬اگر کادر انتخاب ديگر اين پيام را نشان نده‪Do) .‬‬
‫‪ (.not show this message again‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬بار ديگر اين پيام ديگر ظاھر نخواھد شد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫پاکت ھای نامه را آماده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چھار گوشه پاکت نامه را به طرف پايين فشار دھيد تا کامالً صاف شود‪.‬‬
‫اگر پاکت ھا خميده شده اند‪ ،‬گوشه ھای روبرو را گرفته و به آرامی در جھت مخالف خم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر گوشه درب پاکت تا شده است‪ ،‬آنرا صاف کنيد‪.‬‬
‫با استفاده از يک خودکار‪ ،‬لبه راھنمای پاکتی که می خواھيد وارد دستگاه کنيد را صاف کرده و چين آن را از‬
‫بين ببريد‪.‬‬
‫شکل ھای باال يک نمای جانبی از لبه راھنمای پاکت را نشان می دھد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫اگر لبه ھا را صاف و يا تراز نکنيد‪ ،‬ممکن است پاکت ھا در دستگاه گير کنند‪ .‬مطمئن شويد اندازه قسمت ھای پيچ خورده يا‬
‫برآمده بيش از ‪ 3‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.1 /‬اينچ نباشد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫پاکت ھای نامه را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬نگھدارنده کاغذ را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نگھدارنده کاغذ را بلند نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫)‪ (2‬به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬راھنماھای کاغذ را بلغزانيد )‪ (A‬تا باز شوند و پاکت ھای نامه را در وسط سينی پشت به صورتی قرار دھيد‬
‫که طرف آدرس به سمت شما باشد‪.‬‬
‫درب تا شده پاکت نامه بايد رو به طرف پايين و چپ باشد‪.‬‬
‫ھر بار حداکثر تا ‪ 10‬پاکت نامه را می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬راھنماھای کاغذ را بلغزانيد )‪ (A‬تا آنھا را با دو طرف پاکت ھای نامه تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫راھنماھای کاغذ را خيلی محکم نلغزانيد‪ .‬پاکت ھای نامه ممکن است به درستی وارد دستگاه نشود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (B‬طرف پشت‬
‫)‪ (C‬طرف آدرس‬
‫نکته‬
‫پاکت نامه ھايی سنگين تر از عالمت حد مجاز کاغذ )‪ (D‬قرار ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫تنظيمات را با درايور چاپگر تعيين کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ Envelope (1‬را در ‪ Commonly Used Settings‬در برگه ‪ Quick Setup‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 41‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 42‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن پاکت نامه‬
‫)‪ .DL Env (2‬يا ‪ Comm. Env. #10‬در پنجره ‪ Envelope Size Setting‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ Landscape (3‬را در ‪ Orientation‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫اگر اندازه پاکت يا جھت آن را به طور صحيح تعيين نکنيد‪ ،‬آدرس به صورت وارونه چاپ می شود يا ‪ 90‬درجه می چرخد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام تغذيه پاکت ھا‪ ،‬ممکن است دستگاه صدا ايجاد کند‪.‬‬
‫اگر نتيجه چاپ وارونه است‪ ،‬پنجره تنظيم درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪ Envelope ،‬را در ‪Commonly Used Settings‬‬
‫انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬سپس کادر بررسی ‪ Rotate 180 degrees‬را در ‪ Additional Features‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات در مورد تنظيمات درايور چاپگر‪ ،‬به چاپ اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 43‬از ‪704‬‬
‫انواع رسانه ھاﯾی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی < قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه < انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫‪C075‬‬
‫انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫برای کسب نتيجه بھتر‪ ،‬کاغذ مناسب برای چاپ را انتخاب کنيد‪ Canon .‬برای جذابيت بيشتر چاپ‪ ،‬انواع مختلف کاغذ از جمله برچسب و کاغذھای‬
‫مناسب برای عکس و سند را در اختيار شما قرار داده است‪ .‬ما توصيه می کنيم برای چاپ عکسھای مھم خود‪ ،‬از کاغذ اصلی ‪ Canon‬استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫انواع رسانه‬
‫کاغذھای موجود در بازار‬
‫کاغذ ساده )از جمله کاغذ بازيافتی(‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪ :‬کاغذ ساده )‪(Plain Paper‬‬
‫‪ -‬حد مجاز قرار دادن کاغذ ‪-‬‬
‫سينی عقب‪ :‬تقريبا ً ‪ 100‬صفحه‬
‫ حد مجاز کاغذ سينی خروجی ‪-‬‬‫تقريبا ً ‪ 50‬صفحه‬
‫نکته‬
‫بسته به شرايط محيط )دما يا رطوبت باال يا پايين(‪ ،‬ممکن است نتوان از حداکثر ظرفيت تغذيه کاغذ استفاده کرد‪ .‬در چنين‬
‫شرايطی تعداد کاغذی را که با ھم در دستگاه قرار می دھيد تقريبا ً به کمتر از نصف کاھش دھيد )کاغذ ‪ %100‬بازيافتی‬
‫قابل استفاده است(‪.‬‬
‫ھنگاميکه نوع رسانه را از دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬صفحه عمليات انتخاب می کنيد می توانيد اين کاغذ را برای کپی به کار‬
‫ببريد‪ .‬تنھا می توانيد کاغذ ساده در اندازه ھای ‪ ،A4‬يا ‪ Letter‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫پاکت نامه‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Envelope :‬‬
‫ حد مجاز قرار دادن کاغذ ‪-‬‬‫سينی عقب‪ 10 :‬پاکت نامه‬
‫ حد مجاز کاغذ سينی خروجی ‪-‬‬‫توصيه می کنيم به منظور جلوگيری از تارشدن يا از بين رفتن رنگ چاپ‪ ،‬قبل از ادامه چاپ‪ ،‬پاکت نامه چاپ شده قبلی را از سينی‬
‫خروجی کاغذ خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کاغذھای اصلی ‪Canon‬‬
‫برای کسب اطالعات بيشتر در مورد طرف قابل چاپ و نکات مربوط به نحوه استفاده از کاغذ‪ ،‬به دفترچه دستورالعمل ارائه شده به ھمراه دستگاه‬
‫مراجعه کنيد‪ .‬جھت کسب اطالعات بيشتر درباره اندازه ھای صفحه موجود برای کاغذ اصلی ‪ ،Canon‬از وب سايت ما ديدن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫شماره مدل کاغذ اصلی ‪ Canon‬در پرانتز نشان داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫بسته به کشور يا منطقه خريد دستگاه‪ ،‬ممکن است برخی از کاغذھای اصلی ‪ Canon‬را نتوانيد خريداری کنيد‪ .‬در اياالت متحده کاغذ‬
‫با شماره مدل فروخته نمی شود‪ .‬کاغذ را با نام آن خريداری کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ عکس‪:‬‬
‫>‪Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Photo Paper Pro Platinum :‬‬
‫‪ " Glossy Photo Paper‬استفاده روزانه " ‪<*1 <GP-501‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Glossy Photo Paper :‬‬
‫انواع رسانه ھاﯾی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫‪Paper Glossy <GP-502‬‬
‫‪*1 <Photo‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Glossy Photo Paper :‬‬
‫‪Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201‬‬
‫‪*1<Photo‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Photo Paper Plus Glossy II :‬‬
‫‪Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201‬‬
‫‪*1 <Photo‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss :‬‬
‫>‪Matte Photo Paper <MP-101‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Matte Photo Paper :‬‬
‫ حد مجاز قرار دادن کاغذ ‪-‬‬‫سينی عقب‪:‬‬
‫‪ 10‬صفحه برای ‪ 8.5 / Letter ،A4‬اينچ × ‪11‬اينچ‪ 18 × 13 ،‬سانتی متر ‪ 5 /‬اينچ × ‪ 7‬اينچ‪ ،‬و ‪ 25 × 20‬سانتی متر ‪8 /‬اينچ × ‪10‬‬
‫اينچ‬
‫‪20‬صفحه برای ‪ 6 × 4‬اينچ ‪ / 15 × 10‬سانتی متر‬
‫ حد مجاز کاغذ سينی خروجی ‪-‬‬‫توصيه می کنيم به منظور جلوگيری از تارشدن يا از بين رفتن رنگ چاپ‪ ،‬قبل از ادامه چاپ‪ ،‬صفحه چاپ شده قبلی را از سينی خروجی‬
‫کاغذ خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ *1‬ھنگاميکه نوع رسانه را از دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬صفحه عمليات انتخاب می کنيد می توانيد اين کاغذ را برای کپی به کار ببريد‪ .‬تنھا می‬
‫توانيد کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ A4‬يا ‪ ،Letter‬و کاغذ عکس اندازه ‪ 15 × 10‬سانتی متر ‪ 6 × 4 /‬اينچ را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورت قرار دادن دسته ھای کاغذ در دستگاه‪ ،‬ممکن است طرف چاپ ھنگام وارد شدن در دستگاه عالمتگذاری شود‪،‬‬
‫يا کاغذ درست وارد دستگاه نشود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪ ،‬ھر بار يک صفحه را قرار دھيد )به جز برای ‪Matte Photo Paper‬‬
‫>‪(<MP-101‬‬
‫برای چاپ اسناد تجاری‪:‬‬
‫>‪High Resolution Paper <HR-101N‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪High Resolution Paper :‬‬
‫ حد مجاز قرار دادن کاغذ ‪-‬‬‫سينی عقب‪ 80 :‬صفحه‬
‫ حد مجاز کاغذ سينی خروجی ‪-‬‬‫‪ 50‬صفحه‬
‫برای ايجاد کارھای چاپی خود‪:‬‬
‫برچسب ھای روی پيراھن >‪<TR-301‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪) T-Shirt Transfers :‬برچسب ھای روی(‬
‫>‪Photo Stickers <PS-101‬‬
‫ تنظيمات نوع رسانه ‪-‬‬‫درايور چاپگر‪Glossy Photo Paper :‬‬
‫ حد مجاز قرار دادن کاغذ ‪-‬‬‫سينی عقب‪ 1 :‬صفحه‬
‫ حد مجاز کاغذ سينی خروجی ‪-‬‬‫توصيه می کنيم به منظور جلوگيری از تارشدن يا از بين رفتن رنگ چاپ‪ ،‬قبل از ادامه چاپ‪ ،‬صفحه چاپ شده قبلی را از سينی خروجی‬
‫صفحه ‪ 44‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 45‬از ‪704‬‬
‫انواع رسانه ھاﯾی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫کاغذ خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد تنظيمات چاپ را به آسانی با استفاده از ‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬عرضه شده به ھمراه‬
‫‪ ، (Setup CD-ROM‬تعيين کنيد‪ .‬آن را در رايانه خود نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺻب ‪) CD-ROM‬‬
‫اندازه ھای صفحه‬
‫می توانيد از اندازه ھای صفحه زير استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اندازه ھای استاندارد‪:‬‬
‫‪ 279.4 × 215.9) Letter‬ميلی متر ‪ 11.00 × 8.50 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 355.6 × 215.9) Legal‬ميلی متر ‪ 14.00 × 8.50 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 210.0 × 148.0) A5‬ميلی متر ‪ 8.27 × 5.83 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 297.0 × 210.0) A4‬ميلی متر ‪ 11.69 × 18.27 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 257.0 × 182.0) B5‬ميلی متر ‪ 10.12 × 7.17 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 15 × 10) "6 × "4‬سانتی متر ‪ 6.00 × 4.00 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 203.2 × 101.6) "8 × "4‬ميلی متر ‪ 8.00 × 4.00 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 18 × 13) "7 × "5‬سانتی متر ‪ 7.00 × 5.00 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 20 × 25) "10 × "8‬سانتی متر ‪ 10.00 × 8.00 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 127.0 × 89.0) L‬ميلی متر ‪ 5.00 × 3.50 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 178.0 × 127.0) 2L‬ميلی متر ‪ 7.01 × 5.00 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 148.0 × 100.0) Hagaki‬ميلی متر ‪ 5.83 × 3.94 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 148.0 × 200.0) Hagaki 2‬ميلی متر ‪ 5.83 × 7.87 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 241.3 × 104.6 ) Comm. Env. #10‬ميلی متر ‪ 9.50 × 4.12 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 220.0 × 110.0) .DL Env‬ميلی متر ‪ 8.66 × 4.33 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 235.0 × 120.0) Choukei 3‬ميلی متر ‪ 9.25 × 4.72 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 205.0 × 90.0) Choukei 4‬ميلی متر ‪ 8.07 × 3.54 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 235.0 × 105.0) Youkei 4‬ميلی متر ‪ 9.25 × 4.13 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 190.0 × 98.0) Youkei 6‬ميلی متر ‪ 7.48 × 3.86 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 91.0 × 55.0) Card‬ميلی متر ‪ 3.58 × 2.16 /‬اينچ(‬
‫‪ 180.6 × 101.6) Wide‬ميلی متر ‪ 7.10 × 4.00 /‬اينچ(‬
‫اندازه ھای غير استاندارد‪:‬‬
‫ھمچنين می توانيد يک اندازه سفارشی در محدوده مشخص شده زير تعيين کنيد‪.‬‬
‫حداقل اندازه‪ 91.0 × 55.0 :‬ميلی متر ‪ 3.58 × 2.17 /‬اينچ‬
‫حداکثر اندازه‪ 676.0 × 215.9 :‬ميلی متر ‪ 26.61 × 8.50 /‬اينچ‬
‫وزن کاغذ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 17‬تا ‪ 28‬پوند ‪ 64 /‬تا ‪) g/m 105‬به غير از کاغذ اصلی ‪(Canon‬‬
‫از کاغذ سبکتر و يا سنگين تر از اين حد استفاده نکنيد )به غير از کاغذ اصلی ‪ ،(Canon‬زيرا ممکن است در دستگاه گير کند‪.‬‬
‫نکاتی درباره نگھداری کاغذ‬
‫فقط قبل از چاپ و به اندازه نياز خود کاغذ را از بسته کاغذ خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت جلوگيری از تاب برداشتن کاغذ‪ ،‬در مواقعی که چاپ نمی کنيد‪ ،‬کاغذ مصرف نشده را به داخل بسته برگردانده و آنرا در مکانی مسطح‬
‫نگھداری کنيد‪ .‬ھمچنين کاغذھا را در معرض گرما‪ ،‬رطوبت و تابش مستقيم آفتاب قرار ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکاتی در مورد کاغذ برای چاپ بدون حاشيه در تمام صفحه‬
‫چاپ دوطرفه برای چاپ بدون حاشيه در تمام صفحه موجود نيست‪.‬‬
‫نمی توانيد از کاغذ ‪ A5، B5‬و اندازه ‪ Legal‬و پاکت ھايی برای چاپ بدون حاشيه تمام صفحه استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تنھا زمانيکه از رايانه چاپ می کنيد می توانيد از کاغذ ساده برای چاپ بدون حاشيه تمام صفحه استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگرچه‪ ،‬ممکن است کيفيت چاپ پايين باشد‪ .‬توصيه می کنيم برای چاپ آزمايشی از کاغذ ساده استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 46‬از ‪704‬‬
‫انواع رسانه ھاﯾی که نمی توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی < قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه < انواع رسانه ھايی که نمی توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫‪C076‬‬
‫انواع رسانه ھايی که نمی توانيد استفاده کنيد‬
‫از کاغذھای زير استفاده نکنيد‪ .‬استفاده از اين نوع کاغذھا‪ ،‬نه تنھا باعث ايجاد نتيجه نامطلوب می شود بلکه باعث گير کردن کاغذ يا عملکرد نادرست‬
‫دستگاه نيز می شود‪.‬‬
‫کاغذ تا شده‪ ،‬تاب برداشته يا چين و چروک دار‬
‫کاغذ مرطوب‬
‫کاغذی که خيلی نازک باشد )دارای وزن کمتر از ‪ 17‬پوند ‪(2 g/m 64 /‬‬
‫کاغذی که خيلی ضخيم باشد )دارای وزن بيش از ‪ 28‬پوند ‪ ،2 g/m 105 /‬به غير از کاغذ اصلی ‪(Canon‬‬
‫کاغذھای نازک تر از کارت پستال‪ ،‬از جمله کاغذ ساده يا کاغذ يادداشتی که در اندازه کوچک برش داده شده است )ھنگام چاپ روی کاغذی‬
‫کوچکتر از کاغذ ‪(A5‬‬
‫کارت پستال عکس‬
‫کارت پستال ھای دارای عکس يا برچسب‬
‫پاکت ھای نامه دارای درب دوبل )يا درب ھای برچسبی(‬
‫پاکت ھای نامه دارای سطح برجسته يا روسازی شده‬
‫پاکت ھای نامه ای که درب چسبنده آنھا از قبل مرطوب و چسبناک شده است‬
‫ھر گونه کاغذ دارای سوراخ‬
‫کاغذھايی که شکل مستطيلی ندارند‬
‫کاغذھای صحافی شده با منگنه يا چسب‬
‫کاغذ دارای مواد چسبنده‬
‫کاغذ تزئينی براق و غيره‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 47‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی < قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫‪C077‬‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫اسناد مورد نظر جھت کپی يا اسکن را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫بعد از قرار دادن سند اصلی‪ ،‬قبل از شروع کپی‪ ،‬فکس يا اسکن‪ ،‬حتما ً درپوش سند را ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام اسکن از رايانه با استفاده از يک برنامه کاربردی نرم افزار‪ ،‬بايد سند را به گونه ای ديگر در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫سند اصلی را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬درپوش سند را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫اشياء را روی درپوش سند قرار ندھيد‪ .‬در ھنگام باز بودن درپوش سند‪ ،‬روی سينی پشت می افتند و موجب اختالل عمل‬
‫دستگاه می شوند‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬اسناد را طوری قرار دھيد که طرف مورد نظر جھت اسکن رو به پايين و روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار داشته‬
‫باشد‪.‬‬
‫گوشه سند را با عالمت ترازبندی‬
‫تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫دقت کنيد ھنگام قرار داده سند روی صفحه شيشه ای موارد زير را رعايت کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ اشياء دارای وزن ‪ 4.4‬پوند ‪ 2.0 /‬کيلوگرم يا بيشتر را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار ندھيد‪.‬‬‫ ھيچ گونه فشاری به اندازه ‪ 4.4‬پوند ‪ 0.2 /‬کيلوگرم يا بيشتر روی صفحه شيشه ای وارد نکنيد‪ ،‬مانند فشار دادن سند به پايين‪.‬‬‫رعايت نکردن موارد باال ممکن است باعث عملکرد نادرست اسکنر يا شکستن صفحه شيشه ای شود‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه قادر به اسکن قسمتھای سايه دار نيست )‪ 1) (A‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.04 /‬اينچ از لبه ھای صفحه شيشه ای(‬
‫صفحه ‪ 48‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد اصلی‬
‫برای اطمينان از بھترين کيفيت چاپ‪ ،‬دستگاه امکان حاشيه گذاری در امتداد ھر لبه رسانه را فراھم می کند‪ .‬ناحيه واقعی قابل‬
‫چاپ ناحيه درون اين حاشيه ھاست‪.‬‬
‫)‪ 3.0 (B‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.12 /‬اينچ‬
‫)‪ 5.0 (C‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.20 /‬اينچ‬
‫)‪ 3.4 (D‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.13 /‬اينچ )‪ 6.4‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.25 /‬اينچ برای کاغذ اندازه ‪ Letter‬و ‪(Legal‬‬
‫)‪ 3.4 (E‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.13 /‬اينچ )‪ 6.3‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.25 /‬اينچ برای کاغذ اندازه ‪ Letter‬و ‪(Legal‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫درپوش سند را به آرامی ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 49‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی < قرار دادن اسناد اصلی < اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد‬
‫‪C079‬‬
‫اسنادی که می توانيد در دستگاه قرار دھيد‬
‫اسناد زير را می توانيد کپی يا اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫انواع سند‪:‬‬
‫متن سند‪ ،‬مجله يا روزنامه‬
‫عکس چاپ شده‪ ،‬کارت عکس‪ ،‬کارت ويزيت‪ ،‬يا ديسک )‪ ،BD/DVD/CD‬و غيره(‬
‫اندازه )طول × عرض(‪:‬‬
‫حداکثر ‪ 216 × 297‬ميلی متر ‪ 11.7 × 8.5 /‬اينچ‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام قرار دادن اسناد ضخيم مانند کتاب روی صفحه شيشه ای‪ ،‬می توانيد با برداشتن درپوش سند دستگاه‪ ،‬کتاب را روی صفحه قرار‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای کسب اطالعات بيشتر درباره نحوه برداشتن يا قرار دادن درپوش سند‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 50‬از ‪704‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫در اين بخش نحوه تميز کردن دستگاه در صورت کم رنگ شدن صفحات چاپ شده‪ ،‬نحوه تعويض کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬در ھنگام تمام شدن جوھر آنھا‪،‬‬
‫يا اقدامات الزم در صورت تغذيه نشدن درست کاغذ در دستگاه‪ ،‬توضيح داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند‬
‫چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫آزمايش الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫تعويض کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫روش تعويض‬
‫بررسی وضعيت جوھر‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زيرين(‬
‫تميز کردن برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 51‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود ﯾا رنگ ھا درست نيستند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند‬
‫‪C093‬‬
‫ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند‬
‫اگر صفحات چاپ شده مبھم ھستند يا رنگ ھا درست چاپ نشده اند‪ ،‬احتماالً افشانک ھای ھد چاپ )کارتريج ھای ‪ (FINE‬جمع شده اند‪ .‬برای چاپ‬
‫الگوی بررسی افشانک‪ ،‬مراحل زير را انجام دھيد‪ ،‬وضعيت افشانک ھد چاپ را بررسی کرده‪ ،‬سپس ھد چاپ را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر خطوط اصلی سند به طور نامنظم چاپ شده يا نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‪ ،‬ممکن است با تراز کردن ھد چاپ اشکال برطرف شود‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬را نشوييد يا خشک نکنيد‪ .‬اين کار ممکن است به کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬آسيب برساند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫قبل از اقدام به مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫باقی ماندن جوھر در کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به بررسی وضعيت جوھر مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی کنيد که کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬به درستی نصب شده اند يا خير‪.‬‬
‫به روش تعويض مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی کنيد آيا نوار محافظ نارنجی انتھای کارتريج ‪ FINE‬برداشته شده است‪.‬‬
‫به روش تعويض مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر المپ ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬روشن است يا با نور نارنجی چشمک می زند‪ ،‬به " عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه‬
‫نماييد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫افزايش کيفيت چاپ در تنظيمات درايور چاپگر ممکن است چاپ را بھبود بخشد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر صفحات چاپ شده مبھم ھستند يا رنگ آنھا يکدست نيست‪:‬‬
‫مرحله ‪1‬‬
‫به چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به آزمايش الگوی بررسی افشانک مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر خطوط جا افتاده است يا نوارھای سفيد افقی در الگو ديده می شود‪:‬‬
‫مرحله ‪2‬‬
‫به تميز کردن ھد چاپ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر پس از دوبار تميز کردن ھد چاپ مشکل برطرف نشد‪:‬‬
‫مرحله ‪3‬‬
‫به تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر مشکل ھنوز برطرف نشده است‪ ،‬دستگاه را خاموش کنيد و ھد چاپ را بعد‬
‫از ‪ 24‬ساعت دوباره کامالً تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر مشکل ھنوز برطرف نشده است‪:‬‬
‫مرحله ‪4‬‬
‫به تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورتی که پس از تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫پس از تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی‬
‫افشانک را چاپ و بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 52‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود ﯾا رنگ ھا درست نيستند‬
‫وقتی صفحات چاپ شده يکدست نيستند‪ ،‬مثالً خطوط نامنظم ھستند‪:‬‬
‫به تراز کردن ھد چاپ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫عمليات مراقبت و نگھداری را از رايانه خود نيز می توانيد انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 53‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند < چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫‪C094‬‬
‫چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫برای تعيين اينکه آيا جوھر از افشانک ھای ھد چاپ درست بيرون می آيد‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر سطح جوھر باقيمانده کم است‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک به درستی چاپ نمی کند‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬که سطح جوھر آن کم است‪ ،‬را‬
‫عوض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بايد موارد زير را آماده کنيد‪ :‬يک برگ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه نامه )‪(Letter‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫يک برگ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ A4‬يا اندازه ‪ Letter‬را در سينی عقب قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه‬
‫)‪) (Maintenance‬نگھداری( را برای نمايش ‪ A‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫الگوی بررسی افشانک چاپ می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫الگوی بررسی افشانک را چک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به آزمايش الگوی بررسی افشانک مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 54‬از ‪704‬‬
‫آزماﯾش الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند < آزمايش الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫‪C095‬‬
‫آزمايش الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫الگوی بررسی افشانک را چک کنيد‪ ،‬و در صورت لزوم ھد چاپ را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫خطوط جا افتاده در الگوی )‪ (1‬يا نوار سفيد افقی در الگوی )‪ (2‬را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬بررسی کنيد که آيا خطی جا افتاده است يا خير‪.‬‬
‫اگر چنين بود‪ ،‬ھد بايد تميز شود‪.‬‬
‫به تميز کردن ھد چاپ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬خوب‬
‫)‪ (B‬بد )خطوط جا افتاده است(‬
‫)‪ (2‬بررسی کنيد که آيا نوارھای افقی سفيدی در اين الگو وجود دارد يا خير‪.‬‬
‫اگر چنين بود‪ ،‬ھد بايد تميز شود‪.‬‬
‫به تميز کردن ھد چاپ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬خوب‬
‫)‪ (B‬بد )نوارھای سفيد افقی ديده می شود(‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 55‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند < تميز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫‪C096‬‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫اگر خطوط جا افتاده است يا نوارھای سفيد افقی در الگوی چاپ شده بررسی افشانک وجود دارد‪ ،‬ھد چاپ را تميز کنيد‪ .‬تميز کردن افشانک ھای مسدود‬
‫را باز می کند و ھد چاپ را به حالت اوليه برمی گرداند‪ .‬تميزکردن ھد چاپ به جوھر نياز دارد‪ ،‬بنابراين فقط ھنگام ضرورت ھد چاپ را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ھد چاپ را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ H‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه شروع به تميز کردن ھد چاپ می کند‪.‬‬
‫وقتی دستگاه در حال تميز کردن ھد چاپ است‪ ،‬ھيچ کار ديگری با آن انجام ندھيد‪ .‬اين کار حدود ‪ 1‬تا ‪ 2‬دقيقه طول می کشد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫وضعيت ھد چاپ را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی تميز کردن تمام شد‪ ،‬صفحه ‪ LED‬به وضعيت آماده بکار کپی برمی گردد‪.‬‬
‫برای بررسی وضعيت ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر مشکل پس از دوبار تميز کردن ھد چاپ برطرف نشد‪ ،‬ھد چاپ را کامل تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 56‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند < تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل‬
‫‪C097‬‬
‫تميز کردن ھد چاپ به طور کامل‬
‫اگر کيفيت با تميز کردن استاندارد ھد چاپ بھتر نشد‪ ،‬ھد چاپ را کامل تميز کنيد‪ .‬تميز کردن کامل ھد چاپ نسبت به نوع استاندارد به جوھر بيشتری‬
‫نياز دارد‪ ،‬بنابراين فقط ھنگام ضرورت ھد چاپ را کامالً تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ھد چاپ را کامالً تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ y‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه شروع به تميز کردن کامل ھد چاپ می کند‪.‬‬
‫وقتی دستگاه در حال تميز کردن کامل ھد چاپ است‪ ،‬ھيچ کار ديگری با آن انجام ندھيد‪ .‬اين کار تقريبا ً ‪ 2‬دقيقه طول می کشد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫وضعيت ھد چاپ را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی تميز کردن کامل تمام شد‪ ،‬صفحه ‪ LED‬به وضعيت آماده بکار کپی برمی گردد‪.‬‬
‫برای بررسی وضعيت ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر مشکل ھنوز برطرف نشده است‪ ،‬دستگاه را خاموش کنيد و ھد چاپ را بعد از ‪ 24‬ساعت دوباره کامالً تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر باز ھم مشکل برطرف نشد‪ ،‬ممکن است جوھرکارتريج ‪ FINE‬تمام شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫به تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که پس از تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 57‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند < تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫‪C098‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫اگر چاپ خطھای کشيده شده تراز نيست يا نتيجه چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‪ ،‬موقعيت ھد چاپ را تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر سطح جوھر باقيمانده کم است‪ ،‬صفحه ترازبندی ھد چاپ به درستی چاپ نمی شود‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬که سطح جوھر آن کم است‪ ،‬را‬
‫عوض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بايد موارد زير را آماده کنيد‪ :‬يک برگ کاغذ ساده ‪ A4‬يا اندازه ‪) Letter‬شامل کاغذ بازيافتی(*‬
‫* دقت کنيد از کاغذی که دو طرف آن سفيد وتميز است استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫يک برگ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ A4‬يا اندازه ‪ Letter‬را در سينی عقب قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪) u‬حالت حروف کوچک "‪ ("u‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ‪ ،‬چاپ می شود‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 58‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫مھم‬
‫ھيچ يک از قسمت ھای چاپ شده در صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را لمس نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫دقت کنيد که صفحه تراز ھد چاپ کثيف نشود‪ .‬در صورت لکه شدن يا چروکيده شدن اين صفحه‪ ،‬ممکن است صفحه‬
‫بدرستی اسکن نشود‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫برای تنظيم موقعيت ھد چاپ‪ ،‬صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را طوری قرار دھيد که طرف چاپ شده به سمت پايين باشد‪ ،‬و عالمت‬
‫‪ ،‬تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تراز‬
‫در گوشه بااليی سمت چپ صفحه را با عالمت‬
‫)‪ (2‬درپوش سند را به آرامی ببنديد‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که ‪) U‬حالت حروف بزرگ "‪ ("U‬روی صفحه ‪ LED‬ظاھر‬
‫شود‪ ،‬و سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 59‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫دستگاه شروع به اسکن کردن صفحه تراز ھد چاپ می کند و موقعيت ھد چاپ بطور خودکار تراز می شود‪.‬‬
‫وقتی تنظيمات موقعيت ھد چاپ تمام شد‪ LED ،‬به حالت آماده بکار کپی بازمی گردد‪ .‬صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را از روی صفحه شيشه ای برداريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا صفحه تراز ھد چاپ قرارداده شده را تکان ندھيد تا تنظيم موقعيت ھد چاپ تمام شود‪.‬‬
‫اگر تنظيم خودکار موقعيت ھد چاپ انجام نشد‪ ،‬کد خطا روی صفحه ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫دکمه )‪ (Stop/Reset‬توقف‪/‬بازنشانی را برای رد کردن خطا فشار دھيد‪ ،‬سپس به " عيب يابی " در ‪:on-screen manual‬‬
‫راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر پس از تنظيم موقعيت ھد چاپ ھمانگونه که در قسمت باال توضيح داده شد‪ ،‬نتيجه چاپ ھنوز رضايت بخش نيست موقعيت‬
‫ھد چاپ را به صورت دستی از رايانه تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر‪ ،‬به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ و بررسی مقادير تنظيم موقعيت ھد چاپ‪ L ،‬روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‪ ،‬سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‬
‫‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 60‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تعوﯾض کارترﯾج ‪FINE‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < تعويض کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫‪C091‬‬
‫تعويض کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫وقتی اخطار يا خطای جوھر باقيمانده اتفاق می افتد‪ ،‬کد خطا روی ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شود تا خطا را به اطالع شما برساند‪.‬‬
‫به " کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود " در " عيب يابی " قسمت ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ مراجعه کنيد و اقدام مناسب را‬
‫انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای کسب اطالعات در خصوص کارتريج ‪ FINE‬سازگار‪ ،‬به دفترچه راھنمای چاپ شده مراجعه کنيد‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫روش تعويض‬
‫ھنگامی که الزم است جوھر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را تعويض کنيد‪ ،‬از روش زير استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫کار کردن با کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫به اتصاالت الکتريکی )‪ (A‬يا افشانک ھای ھد چاپ )‪ (B‬روی کارتريج ‪ FINE‬دست نزنيد‪ .‬در صورت دست زدن به آن‪ ،‬چاپگر ممکن‬
‫است بدرستی کار نکند‪.‬‬
‫اگر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را خارج کرديد‪ ،‬فوراً آن را با کارتريج ديگر تعويض کنيد‪ .‬دستگاه نبايد بدون کارتريج ‪ FINE‬باقی بماند‪.‬‬
‫برای تعويض از کارتريج ‪ FINE‬جديد استفاده کنيد‪ .‬ممکن است نصب کارتريج ھای استفاده شده ‪ FINE‬موجب مسدود شدن افشانک ھا‬
‫شود‪.‬‬
‫عالوه براين‪ ،‬در مورد بعضی از کارتريج ھا‪ ،‬دستگاه نمی تواند زمان صحيح تعويض کارتريج ھا را به شما اطالع دھد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی کارتريج ‪ FINE‬نصب شد‪ ،‬آن را از دستگاه جدا نکنيد و در فضای آزاد قرار دھيد‪ .‬اين امر موجب خشک شدن کارتريج ‪ FINE‬می‬
‫شود و ممکن است دستگاه در ھنگام نصب مجدد آن به درستی کار نکند‪ .‬برای حفظ حداکثر کيفيت چاپ‪ ،‬از کارتريج ‪ FINE‬در مدت‬
‫شش ماه پس از اولين مصرف‪ ،‬استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر جوھر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬تمام شد‪ ،‬می توانيد برای مدت کوتاھی با کارتريج ‪ FINE‬سياه يا رنگی‪ ،‬بسته به جوھری که باقی مانده است‪،‬‬
‫کار چاپ را انجام دھيد‪ .‬به ھر حال در مقايسه با زمانی که چاپ را با ھر دو کارتريج انجام می دھيد ممکن است کيفيت چاپ کاھش‬
‫يابد‪ .‬توصيه می شود از کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬جديد استفاده کنيد تا کيفيت مناسب چاپ حفظ شود‪.‬‬
‫حتی زمانی که فقط با يک جوھر چاپ می کنيد باز ھم بايد کارتريج ‪ FINE‬خالی روی دستگاه نصب باشد و در اين حالت چاپ را انجام‬
‫دھيد‪ .‬اگر ھر يک از کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬رنگی يا ‪ FINE‬سياه نصب نشده باشند‪ ،‬خطايی رخ می دھد و دستگاه چاپ نمی کند‪.‬‬
‫برای اطالع از نحوه پيکربندی اين تنظيمات به ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھنمای پيشرفته مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ممکن است حتی زمانی که سند سياه و سفيدی را چاپ می کنيد يا زمانی که چاپ سياه و سفيد مشخص شده است‪ ،‬جوھر رنگی مصرف‬
‫شود‪.‬‬
‫در تميز کردن استاندارد و تميز کردن کامل ھد چاپ نيز ھر دو جوھر رنگی و سياه مصرف می شوند که ممکن است برای حفظ کارکرد‬
‫دستگاه الزم باشد‪ .‬ھنگام تمام شدن جوھر‪ ،‬فوراً کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را با کارتريج جديد ديگری تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات‪ ،‬به نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است و سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را باال آورده سپس با پشتيبان واحد اسکن )‪ (C‬آن را باز نگه داريد‪.‬‬
‫نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به طرف موقعيت تعويض حرکت می کند‪.‬‬
‫تعوﯾض کارترﯾج ‪FINE‬‬
‫احتياط‬
‫نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را با فشار متوقف نکنيد يا حرکت ندھيد‪ .‬به نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬تا توقف کامل آن دست نزنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫ممکن است داخل دستگاه جوھری شود‪ .‬مواظب باشيد ھنگام تعويض کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬دستھا يا لباس خود را با جوھر کثيف‬
‫نکنيد‪ .‬به راحتی می توانيد جوھر داخل دستگاه را با يک دستمال کاغذی يا چيزی شبيه به آن تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جزئيات بيشتر در مورد تميز کردن‪ ،‬به دفترچه راھنمای چاپ شده مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر ‪.‬‬
‫اشياء را روی درپوش سند قرار ندھيد‪ .‬در ھنگام باز بودن درپوش سند‪ ،‬روی سينی پشت می افتند و موجب اختالل عمل دستگاه‬
‫می شوند‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام باز کردن واحد اسکن )درپوش(‪ ،‬با درپوش سند بسته آن را باال بياوريد‪.‬‬
‫به قسمت ھای فلزی يا ساير قسمت ھای داخل دستگاه دست نزنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر واحد اسکن )درپوش( بيش از ‪ 10‬دقيقه باز بماند‪ ،‬نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به سمت راست حرکت می کند‪ .‬در اين صورت‪،‬‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را بسته و مجدداً باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬خالی را خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬به زبانه ھا فشار آورده و درپوش قفل کارتريج جوھر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫با دقت با کارتريج ‪ FINE‬کار کنيد تا از لکه شدن روکش يا ناحيه اطراف آن جلوگيری شود‪.‬‬
‫طبق قوانين محلی و مقررات مربوط به دور انداختن مواد مصرفی‪ ،‬کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬خالی را دور بريزيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬جديد را آماده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬جديد را از بسته آن بيرون آورده و نوار محافظ نارنجی آن )‪ (D‬را به آرامی خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 61‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تعوﯾض کارترﯾج ‪FINE‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫اگر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را تکان دھيد‪ ،‬ممکن است جوھر آن بيرون بريزد و دستان شما و ناحيه اطراف را کثيف کند‪ .‬کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫را با دقت نگه داريد‪.‬‬
‫مواظب باشيد ھنگام خارج کردن نوار محافظ نارنجی دستان و ناحيه اطراف را با جوھر کثيف نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از خارج کردن نوار محافظ نارنجی سعی نکنيد دوباره آن را به محل قبلی خود بچسبانيد‪ .‬طبق قوانين محلی و مقررات مربوط‬
‫به دور انداختن مواد مصرفی آن را دور بريزيد‪.‬‬
‫به اتصاالت الکتريکی يا افشانک ھای ھد چاپ روی کارتريج ‪ FINE‬دست نزنيد‪ .‬در صورت دست زدن به آن‪ ،‬چاپگر ممکن‬
‫است بدرستی کار نکند‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬جديد را در نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬رنگی را بايد در شيار سمت چپ و کارتريج ‪ FINE‬سياه را در شيار سمت راست نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬درپوش قفل کارتريج جوھر را جھت قفل شدن کارتريج ‪ FINE‬در محل خود ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫درپوش قفل کارتريج جوھر را به پايين فشار دھيد تا در جای خود قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬مطمئن شويد که درپوش قفل کارتريج جوھر به درستی بسته شده است‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر درپوش قفل کارتريج جوھر به درستی بسته نشده است‪ ،‬درپوش قفل کارتريج جوھر را به طرف پايين فشار دھيد تا در‬
‫جای خود قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 62‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 63‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تعوﯾض کارترﯾج ‪FINE‬‬
‫)‪ (E‬به درستی بسته شده است‬
‫)‪ (F‬به درستی بسته نشده است )درپوش کج شده است(‬
‫مھم‬
‫دستگاه تا زمانی که کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬سياه و رنگی نصب نشده باشند نمی تواند کار چاپ را انجام دھد‪ .‬مطمئن شويد ھر دو‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬نصب شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را کمی باال بياوريد تا بتوانيد پشتيبان واحد اسکن را در محل اصلی خود قرار دھيد و واحد‬
‫اسکن )درپوش( را به آرامی ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫احتياط‬
‫ھنگام قرار دادن پشتيبان واحد اسکن در محل اصلی خود‪ ،‬حتما ً واحد اسکن )درپوش( را محکم نگه داريد و مواظب انگشتانتان‬
‫باشيد که گير نکنند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر بعد از بستن )درپوش( واحد اسکن‪ ،‬المپ ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬به رنگ نارنجی روشن شده يا چشمک بزند‪ ،‬به قسمت عيب‬
‫يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫اگر بعد از تعويض کارتريج ‪ FINE‬شروع به چاپ کنيد‪ ،‬دستگاه بطور خودکار شروع به تميز کردن ھد چاپ می کند‪ .‬وقتی‬
‫دستگاه در حال تميز کردن ھد چاپ است‪ ،‬ھيچ کار ديگری با آن انجام ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر خطوط اصلی به طور نامنظم چاپ شده يا موقعيت ھد چاپ تراز نيست‪ ،‬موقعيت ھد چاپ را تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به تراز کردن ھد چاپ مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 64‬از ‪704‬‬
‫بررسی وضعيت جوھر‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < تعويض کارتريج ‪ < FINE‬بررسی وضعيت جوھر‬
‫‪C092‬‬
‫بررسی وضعيت جوھر‬
‫می توانيد از روی صفحه عمليات صفحه رايانه از طريق المپ ھای جوھر )‪ ،(Ink‬وضعيت جوھر را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ردياب سطح جوھر روی دستگاه نصب شده است تا سطح جوھر باقيمانده را تشخيص دھد‪ .‬وقتی کارتريج جديد ‪ FINE‬نصب می شود‪،‬‬
‫دستگاه سطح جوھر را پر در نظر می گيرد‪ ،‬و سپس شروع به تشخيص سطح جوھر باقيمانده می کند‪ .‬اگر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مصرف شده‬
‫نصب شود‪ ،‬سطح جوھر نشان داده شده ممکن است اشتباه باشد‪ .‬در اين صورت‪ ،‬فقط به عنوان راھنما به اطالعات سطح جوھر مراجعه‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی اخطار يا خطای جوھر باقيمانده اتفاق می افتد‪ ،‬کد خطا روی ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شود تا خطا را به اطالع شما برساند‪.‬‬
‫به " کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود " در " عيب يابی " قسمت ‪ :on-screen manual‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ مراجعه کنيد‬
‫و اقدام مناسب را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫از طريق المپ ھای جوھر روی صفحه عمليات‬
‫مطمئن شويد که ‪ LED‬در حالت آماده بکار کپی است‪ .‬وضعيت جوھر را از طريق المپ ھای جوھر )‪ (Ink‬می توان تأييد نمود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬المپ ھشدار )‪(Alarm‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬المپ جوھر رنگی )‪(Color Ink‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬المپ جوھر سياه )‪(Black Ink‬‬
‫المپ جوھر رنگی يا المپ جوھر سياه روشن می شود‬
‫ميزان جوھر کم است‪ .‬کارتريج جوھر جديدی را آماده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫المپ جوھر رنگی يا المپ جوھر سياه چشمک می زند‪ ،‬درحاليکه المپ ھشدار روشن است‬
‫يک خطا اتفاق افتاده است‪.‬‬
‫برای اطالع از جزئيات‪ ،‬به عيب يابی " در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫* برای برخی انواع خطاھا‪ ،‬ممکن است چراغ )‪(Alarm‬ھشدار روشن نشود‪.‬‬
‫از طريق صفحه رايانه‬
‫می توانيد با نمايشگر وضعيت چاپگر از وضعيت جوھر مطمئن شويد‪.‬‬
‫اگر اطالعاتی در مورد حجم جوھر باقيمانده وجود داشته باشد عالمتی در اين ناحيه ظاھر می شود )‪.(A‬‬
‫مثال‪:‬‬
‫ميزان جوھر کم است‪ .‬کارتريج جوھر جديدی را آماده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام چاپ ممکن است پيام خطايی ظاھر شود‪ .‬پيام را تأييد کنيد و اقدام الزم را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫صفحه ‪ 65‬از ‪704‬‬
‫بررسی وضعيت جوھر‬
‫برای باز کردن صفحه تأييد‪ ،‬مراحل زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھنمای پيشرفته ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫در صفحه ‪ ،Maintenance‬روی ‪ View Printer Status‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای تأييد اطالعات کارتريج ‪ ،FINE‬روی منوی ‪ Ink Details‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫حين چاپ‪ ،‬می توانيد با کليک روی نماد چاپگر در نوار وظيفه نيز‪ ،‬نمايشگر وضعيت چاپگر را مشاھده کنيد‪ .‬در‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Vista‬يا ‪ ،Windows XP‬روی ‪) Canon XXX Printer‬که " ‪ "XXX‬نام دستگاه شما است( در نوار وظيفه کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 66‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫اين بخش نحوه تميز کردن داخل دستگاه را توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زيرين(‬
‫تميز کردن برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 67‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن غلتک تغذﯾه کننده کاغذ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < تميز کردن دستگاه < تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‬
‫‪C099‬‬
‫تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‬
‫اگر غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ کثيف شود يا پودر کاغذ به آن بچسبد‪ ،‬ممکن است کاغذ به درستی در دستگاه قرار نگيرد‪.‬‬
‫در اين صورت‪ ،‬غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ را تميز کنيد‪ .‬تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ موجب ساييده شدن آن می شود بنابراين فقط زمانی که الزم‬
‫است غلتک را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بايد موارد زير را آماده کنيد‪ :‬سه برگ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه نامه )‪(Letter‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است و تمام کاغذھا را از سينی عقب خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ را بدون کاغذ تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ b‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ ھنگام تميز شدن می چرخد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ را با کاغذ تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬مطمئن شويد غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ ديگر نمی چرخد و سه برگ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬را در‬
‫سينی عقب قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬مطمئن شويد که ‪ b‬روی صفحه ‪ LED‬ظاھر شود‪ ،‬و سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه تميز کردن را شروع می کند‪ .‬پس از خارج کردن کاغذ‪ ،‬تميز کردن کامل می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫وقتی تميز کردن تمام شد‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد تا صفحه ‪ LED‬به وضعيت آماده بکار کپی‬
‫برگردد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که پس از تميز کردن غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 68‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زﯾرﯾن(‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < تميز کردن دستگاه < تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زيرين(‬
‫‪C101‬‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زيرين(‬
‫لکه ھای داخل دستگاه را تميز می کند‪ .‬اگر داخل دستگاه کثيف شود ممکن است کاغذ چاپ شده نيز کثيف شود بنابراين توصيه می شود مرتبا ً دستگاه را‬
‫تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫ھنگام تميز کردن صفحه کف کار ديگری با دستگاه انجام ندھيد‪.‬‬
‫بايد موارد زير را آماده کنيد‪ :‬يک برگ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه نامه )‪*(Letter‬‬
‫* حتما ً از يک قطعه کاغذ جديد استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است و تمام کاغذھا را از سينی عقب خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫يک برگ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬را از وسط در جھت عرض آن تا بزنيد و سپس آن را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ھمين کاغذ را در سينی عقب قرار دھيد طوريکه سمت باز شده آن رو به شما قرار داشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫داخل دستگاه را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬دکمه‬
‫)نگھداری( )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ J‬ظاھر شود‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ھمانطور که کاغذ در دستگاه حرکت می کند داخل دستگاه را نيز تميز می کند‪.‬‬
‫قسمت تا شده کاغذ را مورد بررسی قرار دھيد‪ .‬اگر آغشته به جوھر باشد‪ ،‬مجدداً صفحه کف را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگامی که می خواھيد مجدداً صفحه کف را تميز کنيد‪ ،‬از يک قطعه کاغذ جديد استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر با تميز کردن مجدد صفحه کف ھمچنان مشکل باقی مانده باشد‪ ،‬ممکن است برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه لکه شده باشند‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 69‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه زﯾرﯾن(‬
‫برای تميز کردن آنھا‪ ،‬به تميز کردن برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 70‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه < تميز کردن دستگاه < تميز کردن برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه‬
‫‪C102‬‬
‫تميز کردن برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه‬
‫احتياط‬
‫قبل از تميز کردن دستگاه دقت کنيد که دستگاه خاموش باشد و از پريز کشيده شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه برآمدگی ھای داخل دستگاه لکه شده باشد‪ ،‬با استفاده از اسفنج کتانی يا چيزی شبيه اين جوھر روی برآمدگی ھا را پاک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 71‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ضميمه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < ضميمه‬
‫ضميمه‬
‫محدوديت ھای قانونی در مورد استفاده از محصول و تصاوير‬
‫نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 72‬از ‪704‬‬
‫محدودﯾت ھای قانونی در مورد استفاده از محصول و تصاوﯾر‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < ضميم < محدوديت ھای قانونی در مورد استفاده از محصول و تصاوير‬
‫محدوديت ھای قانونی در مورد استفاده از محصول و تصاوير‬
‫کپی برداری‪ ،‬اسکن‪ ،‬چاپ يا تکثير اسناد زير ممکن است غير قانونی باشد‪.‬‬
‫ليست ارائه شده کامل نيست‪ .‬در صورتی که ترديد داريد‪ ،‬با يکی از نمايندگی ھای قانونی حوزه قضايی خود مشورت کنيد‪.‬‬
‫پول کاغذی‬
‫حواله ھای پول‬
‫گواھی سپرده‬
‫تمبرھای پستی )لغو شده يا لغو نشده(‬
‫آرم ھای شناسايی يا نشان ھای رسمی‬
‫کارت نظام وظيفه يا کاغذھای حواله‬
‫چک ھا يا حواله ھای صادر شده توسط نماينده‬
‫ھای دولتی‬
‫گواھينامه وسايل نقليه موتوری و گواھی ھای‬
‫عنوان‬
‫چک ھای مسافرتی‬
‫بن ھای خريد غذا‬
‫گذرنامه ھا‬
‫اوراق مھاجرت‬
‫تمبرھای سود سھام داخلی )لغو شده يا لغو نشده(‬
‫اوراق بھادار يا ساير گواھی ھای بدھی‬
‫گواھی سھام‬
‫موارد محدود به حق چاپ يا کارھای ھنری بدون اجازه حق‬
‫چاپ از مالک‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 73‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫فھرست مطالب < ضميمه < نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫‪C112‬‬
‫نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫در اين بخش نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه و چاپ با کيفيت عالی شرح داده شده است‪.‬‬
‫جوھر برای موارد مختلفی مصرف می شود‪.‬‬
‫نحوه استفاده جوھر برای موارد ديگر غير از چاپ چگونه است؟‬
‫ممکن است جوھر برای موارد ديگری غير از چاپ استفاده شود‪ .‬جوھر نه تنھا برای چاپ استفاده می شود‪ ،‬بلکه برای تميز کردن ھد چاپ جھت‬
‫نگھداری کيفيت چاپ در حد باال نيز مصرف می شود‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه دارای قابليت تميز کردن خودکار افشانک ھايی است که جوھر از آنھا پاشيده می شود تا از مسدود شدن آنھا جلوگيری شود‪ .‬در مرحله‬
‫تميز کردن‪ ،‬جوھر از افشانک ھا به بيرون پمپ می شود‪ .‬مقدار کمی جوھر برای تميز کردن افشانک استفاده می شود‪.‬‬
‫آيا در چاپ سياه و سفيد‪ ،‬جوھر رنگی نيز استفاده می شود؟‬
‫چاپ سياه و سفيد ممکن است بسته به تنظيمات نوع کاغذ چاپ يا تنظيمات درايور چاپگر‪،‬از جوھری غير از جوھر سياه استفاده نمايد‪ .‬بنابراين‪،‬‬
‫حتی در چاپ سياه و سفيد نيز ممکن است جوھر رنگی به مصرف برسد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ بر روی کاغذ ويژه‪ :‬چگونه می توان چاپ را با کيفيت عالی انجام داد!؟‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬قبل از چاپ‪ ،‬وضعيت دستگاه را بررسی کنيد!‬
‫آيا ھد چاپ سالم است؟‬
‫در صورت مسدود بودن افشانک ھای ھد چاپ‪ ،‬چاپ کم رنگ می شود و کاغذھا ھدر می رود‪ .‬برای بررسی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی‬
‫افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا داخل دستگاه آغشته به جوھر است؟‬
‫پس از چاپ مقادير زياد کاغذ يا چاپ بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬ممکن است قسمتھايی که کاغذ از آن عبور می کند‪ ،‬به جوھر آغشته شود‪ .‬داخل دستگاه‬
‫را با استفاده از روش تميز کردن صفحه زيرين تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به تميز کردن داخل دستگاه )تميز کردن صفحه کف( مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬نحوه قرار دادن صحيح کاغذ در دستگاه را بررسی کنيد!‬
‫آيا کاغذ در جھت صحيح در دستگاه قرار گرفته است؟‬
‫کاغذ را در سينی پشت قرار دھيد در صورتی که سمت قابل چاپ آن به طرف شما باشد‪.‬‬
‫آيا کاغذ پيچ خورده است؟‬
‫کاغذ پيچ خورده موجب می شود کاغذ گير کند‪ .‬کاغذ تاخورده را صاف کنيد‪ ،‬سپس آن را دوباره در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫به "عيب يابی" در ‪ on-screen manual‬مراجعه کنيد‪ :‬راھﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﯾﺷﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬پس از قرار دادن کاغذ در دستگاه‪ ،‬حتما ً تنظيمات کاغذ را مشخص کنيد!‬
‫پس از قرار دادن کاغد در دستگاه‪ ،‬حتما ً کاغذ وارد شده را در ‪ Media Type‬درايور چاپگر يا با استفاده از دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬صفحه‬
‫نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫عمليات انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬در صورتی که نوع کاغذ انتخاب نشود‪ ،‬ممکن است نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نباشد‪.‬‬
‫به کپی کردن ‪ ،‬چاپ از رايانه شما‪ ،‬و انواع رسانه ھايی که می توانيد استفاده کنيد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫انواع مختلف کاغذ‪ :‬کاغذ با پوشش خاص برای چاپ عکسھا با کيفيت عالی و کاغذ مناسب برای اسناد‪ Media Type .‬درايور چاپگر‪ ،‬دارای‬
‫تنظيمات مختلفی برای ھر نوع کاغذ است )از قبيل استفاده از جوھر‪ ،‬خروج جوھر يا فاصله از افشانک ھا( بنابراين می توانيد روی ھر کاغذ با‬
‫کيفيت تصوير عالی‪ ،‬چاپ را انجام دھيد‪ .‬دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬صفحه عمليات‪ ،‬که برای کپی از آن استفاده می شود‪ ،‬نيز دارای تنظيماتی مشابه‬
‫با ‪ Media Type‬درايور چاپگر است‪ .‬شما می توانيد با تنظيمات مختلف ‪ Media Type‬درايور چاپگر يا دکمه کاغذ )‪ (Paper‬صفحه‬
‫عمليات‪ ،‬مناسب با نوع کاغذ قرار داده شده در دستگاه چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای لغو چاپ‪ ،‬از دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬استفاده کنيد!‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬ھرگز دکمه روشن را فشار ندھيد!‬
‫اگر در حين چاپ دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬را فشار دھيد‪ ،‬داده ھای چاپی در حال ارسال از رايانه در دستگاه منتظر می مانند و ممکن است قادر به‬
‫ادامه چاپ نباشيد‪.‬‬
‫دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را برای لغو چاپ فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر در ھنگام چاپ از رايانه با فشار دادن دکمه توقف‪/‬بازنشانی )‪ (Stop/Reset‬موفق به لغو چاپ نشديد‪ ،‬برای حذف‬
‫کارھای چاپی غيرضروری از صفحه نمايش وضعيت چاپگر‪ ،‬پنجره راه اندازی درايور را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا ھنگام نگھداری يا جابجايی دستگاه مراقبت خاصی الزم است؟‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬از دستگاه به طور عمودی يا کج استفاده نکرده يا در اين وضعيت ھا جابجا نکنيد!‬
‫اگر دستگاه به صورت عمودی يا کج استفاده يا جابجا شود ممکن است به دستگاه آسيب وارد شود يا جوھر به بيرون نشت کند‪.‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه به طور عمودی يا کج استفاده يا جابجا نشود‪.‬‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬ھيچ شيئی را روی درپوش سند قرار ندھيد!‬
‫اشياء را روی درپوش سند قرار ندھيد‪ .‬در ھنگام باز بودن درپوش سند‪ ،‬روی سينی پشت می افتند و موجب اختالل عمل دستگاه می شوند‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين‪ ،‬دستگاه را جايی قرار دھيد که اشياء روی آن نيفتند‪.‬‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬محل قرار دادن دستگاه را با دقت انتخاب کنيد!‬
‫دستگاه را با فاصله حداقل ‪ 15‬سانتی متر ‪ 91/5 /‬اينچ از ساير دستگاه ھای برقی ھمچون المپ ھای فلورسانت قرار دھيد‪ .‬در صورتيکه چاپگر‬
‫در نزديکی اين دستگاه ھا قرار داشته باشد‪ ،‬به خاطر وجود پارازيت ھای فلورسانت بدرستی کار نمی کند‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 74‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 75‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نکاتی در مورد نحوه استفاده از دستگاه‬
‫چگونه می توان کيفيت چاپ را در حد عالی حفظ کرد؟‬
‫نکته مھم برای چاپ با کيفيت عالی‪ ،‬جلوگيری از خشک يا مسدود شدن ھد چاپ است‪ .‬برای چاپ با کيفيت عالی‪ ،‬ھميشه مراحل زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای جدا کردن دوشاخه از پريز برق مراحل زير را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬روی دستگاه را فشار دھيد تا دستگاه خاموش شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬مطمئن شويد که چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬روشن نيست‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬دوشاخه را از پريز برق بيرون بياوريد‪.‬‬
‫در صورت فشار دادن دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬برای خاموش کردن دستگاه‪ ،‬دستگاه بطور خودکار محافظی را روی ھد چاپ )افشانک ھا( قرار‬
‫می دھد تا از خشک شدن آنھا جلوگيری شود‪ .‬در صورت جدا کردن سيم برق از پريز قبل از خاموش شدن چراغ برق )‪ ،(POWER‬ھد‬
‫چاپ به طور صحيح پوشانده نمی شود و به خشک شدن يا مسدود شدن آن منجر می شود‪.‬‬
‫برای بيرون آوردن دوشاخه‪ ،‬اين مراحل را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ در فواصل معين!‬
‫درست ھمانطور که اگر از ماژيک به مدت طوالنی استفاده نشود‪ ،‬حتی اگر در ماژيک بسته باشد‪ ،‬نوک آن خشک می شود‪ ،‬در صورتی‬
‫که از دستگاه برای مدت طوالنی استفاده نشود‪ ،‬ھد چاپ نيز ممکن است خشک يا مسدود شود‪.‬‬
‫توصيه می شود حداقل ماھی يکبار از دستگاه استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫بسته به نوع کاغذ‪ ،‬اگر آثاری از خودکار نشانگر يا پن استيک روی کارھای چاپی مشاھده شود ممکن است جوھر آن مبھم و لکه دار‬
‫شود يا اگر آثاری از آب يا عرق روی آنھا مشاھده شود ممکن است جوھر کم رنگ شود يا رنگ پس دھد‪.‬‬
‫رنگ ھا ناھموار و نتايج چاپ مبھم ھستند‪.‬‬
‫نکته!‪ :‬برای بررسی مسدود بودن افشانک ھا‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورت مسدود بودن افشانک ھای ھد چاپ‪ ،‬ممکن است رنگ ھا ناھموار يا نتايج چاپی مبھم باشند‪.‬‬
‫در اين حالت‬
‫چاپ الگوی بررسی افشانک‬
‫برای مشاھده مسدود بودن افشانک ھا‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی چاپ را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫به ھنگامی که چاپ کم رنگ می شود يا رنگ ھا درست نيستند مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 76‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫‪MC-4764-V1.00‬‬
‫راھنمای اوليه‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫چاپ از رايانه‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬چيست؟‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫چاپ کردن عکس‬
‫راه اندازی ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫انتخاب عکس‬
‫چاپ اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫انتخاب کاغذ‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه‬
‫ضميمه‬
‫زمانی که اين ‪ on-screen manual‬در‬
‫محيط زبانی به جز انگليسی نمايش داده می شود‪،‬‬
‫برخی توضيحات به زبان انگليسی نمايش داده می‬
‫شوند‪.‬‬
‫ايجاد يک آلبوم‬
‫راه اندازی ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫انتخاب کاغذ و چيدمان‬
‫انتخاب عکس‬
‫ويرايش‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫چاپ تقويم ھا‬
‫راه اندازی ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫انتخاب کاغذ و چيدمان‬
‫انتخاب عکس‬
‫ويرايش‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫چاپ برچسب ھا‬
‫راه اندازی ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫انتخاب کاغذ و چيدمان‬
‫انتخاب عکس‬
‫ويرايش‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫چيدمان چاپ‬
‫راه اندازی ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫انتخاب کاغذ و چيدمان‬
‫انتخاب عکس‬
‫ويرايش‬
‫چاپ کردن‬
‫تصحيح و ارتقاء کيفيت عکس‬
‫استفاده از عملکرد تصحيح خودکار عکس‬
‫استفاده از عملکرد تصحيح قرمزی چشم‬
‫استفاده از عملکرد روشن تر کردن چھره‬
‫صفحه ‪ 77‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫استفاده از عملکرد واضح تر کردن چھره‬
‫استفاده از عملکرد ديجيتال صاف کننده چھره‬
‫استفاده از عملکرد برطرف کننده لک‬
‫تنظيم کردن تصوير‬
‫پنجره تصحيح‪/‬ارتقاء کيفيت عکس‬
‫‪) Creating Still Images from Videos‬ايجاد تصاوير ثابت از فيلمھا(‬
‫‪) Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window‬ضبط کادر فيلم‬
‫‪/‬پنجره چاپ فيلم(‬
‫‪) Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites‬دريافت‬
‫تصاوير از سايتھای اشتراک عکس(‬
‫‪) Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window‬وارد‬
‫کردن عکسھا از پنجره سايتھای اشتراک عکس(‬
‫پرسش و پاسخ‬
‫چگونه فايل ذخيره شده را می توان انتقال داد )يا کپی کرد(؟‬
‫از کدام طرف تصوير نشان داده شده‪ ،‬چاپ آغاز می شود؟‬
‫چگونه می توان با حاشيه مساوی چاپ کرد؟‬
‫"‪ "C1‬و "‪ "C4‬چيست؟‬
‫تنظيمات چاپ عکس‬
‫چاپ واضح عکس‬
‫کاھش پارازيت عکس‬
‫برش عکس )چاپ کردن عکس(‬
‫چاپ تاريخ روی عکس )چاپ کردن عکس(‬
‫چاپ چند عکس در يک صفحه‬
‫چاپ ايندکس‬
‫چاپ عکس شناسنامه ای )چاپ کردن عکس شناسنامه ای(‬
‫چاپ اطالعات عکس‬
‫ذخيره کردن عکس‬
‫بازکردن فايل ھای ذخيره شده‬
‫تنظيمات ديگر‬
‫تغيير چيدمان‬
‫تغيير زمينه‬
‫افزودن عکس‬
‫تغيير محل عکس‬
‫جايگزين کردن عکس‬
‫تغيير مکان‪ ،‬زاويه و اندازه عکس‬
‫برش دادن عکس‬
‫ايجاد کادر برای عکس‬
‫چاپ تاريخ روی عکس‬
‫پيوست نظر به عکس‬
‫افزودن متن به عکس‬
‫ذخيره کردن‬
‫تنظيم تعطيالت‬
‫تنظيم نمايش تقويم‬
‫بازکردن فايل ھای ذخيره شده‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫روش ھای مختلف چاپ‬
‫چاپ با نصب و راه اندازی آسان‬
‫صفحه ‪ 78‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫تنظيم جھت و اندازه صفحه‬
‫تنظيم تعداد کپی و ترتيب چاپ‬
‫تنظيم حاشيه صحافی‬
‫‪) Execute Borderless Printing‬انجام چاپ بدون حاشيه(‬
‫چاپ متناسب با صفحه‬
‫چاپ با مقياس خاص‬
‫چاپ با چيدمان خاص‬
‫چاپ پوستر‬
‫چاپ جزوه‬
‫چاپ پشت و رو‬
‫چاپ مھر‪/‬زمينه‬
‫‪) Registering a Stamp‬ثبت مھر(‬
‫ثبت داده ھای تصوير برای استفاده به عنوان پس زمينه‬
‫چاپ پاکت نامه‬
‫نمايش نتايج چاپ قبل از چاپ شدن‬
‫تنظيم ابعاد کاغذ )اندازه سفارشی(‬
‫تغيير کيفيت چاپ و تصحيح داده ھای تصوير‬
‫انتخاب ترکيبی از سطح کيفيت چاپ و يک روش سايه سازی‬
‫چاپ سند رنگی به صورت تک رنگ‬
‫تعيين تصحيح رنگ‬
‫چاپ عکس بھينه از داده ھای تصوير‬
‫تنظيم رنگ ھا با درايور چاپگر‬
‫چاپ با نمايه ھای ‪ICC‬‬
‫تنظيم کردن توازن رنگ‬
‫تنظيم روشنايی‬
‫تنظيم تراکم‬
‫تنظيم کنتراست‬
‫شبيه سازی تصوير‬
‫ارائه داده تصوير با يک رنگ‬
‫ارائه دادن تصوير با رنگھای روشن‬
‫صاف کردن خطوط دندانه دار‬
‫تغيير ويژگی ھای رنگ برای بھبود رنگ آميزی‬
‫کاھش پارازيت عکس‬
‫مروری بر درايور چاپگر‬
‫عملکردھای درايور چاپگر‬
‫‪) Canon IJ Printer Driver‬درايور چاپگر ‪(Canon IJ‬‬
‫‪) XPS Printer Driver‬درايور چاپگر ‪(XPS‬‬
‫نحوه باز کردن پنجره تنظيم درايور چاپگر‬
‫زبانه مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫‪) Canon IJ Status Monitor‬نمايشگر وضعيت ‪(Canon IJ‬‬
‫‪) Canon IJ Preview‬پيش نمايش ‪(Canon IJ‬‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫صفحه ‪ 79‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫قبل از اسکن‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد‬
‫اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به رايانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫ضميمه‪ :‬تنظيمات مختلف اسکن‬
‫انتخاب يک پاسخ به فرمان ھای صفحه عمليات با استفاده از ‪MP‬‬
‫‪Navigator EX‬‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫‪) MP Navigator EX‬نرم افزار ارائه شده اسکنر( چيست؟‬
‫اسکن کنيد‬
‫راه اندازی ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫‪) Easy Scanning with Auto Scan‬اسکن آسان با اسکن خودکار(‬
‫اسکن کردن عکس ھا و اسناد‬
‫اسکن کردن چندين سند بصورت ھمزمان‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير بزرگتر از صفحه شيشه ای )‪(Stitch Assist‬‬
‫اسکن آسان تنھا با يک کليک‬
‫عملكردھای مفيد ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫تصحيح‪/‬ارتقاء خودکار کيفيت عکس‬
‫تصحيح‪/‬ارتقاء دستی کيفيت عکس‬
‫تنظيم کردن تصوير‬
‫جستجوی تصاوير‬
‫طبقه بندی تصاوير در گروه ھا‬
‫استفاده از تصاوير در ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫ذخيره کردن‬
‫ذخيره به عنوان فايل ھای ‪PDF‬‬
‫ايجاد‪/‬ويرايش فايل ھای ‪PDF‬‬
‫چاپ کردن اسناد‬
‫چاپ کردن عکس‬
‫ارسال از طريق ايميل‬
‫ويرايش فايل ھا‬
‫تنظيم کلمات عبور برای فايل ھای ‪PDF‬‬
‫باز کردن‪/‬ويرايش فايل ھای ‪ PDF‬محافظت شده توسط کلمه عبور‬
‫صفحه ھای ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫صفحه حالت ھدايت‬
‫زبانه اسکن‪/‬درج اسناد يا تصاوير‬
‫زبانه مشاھده و استفاده از تصاوير رايانه شما‬
‫زبانه اسکن سفارشی تنھا با يک کليک‬
‫‪ (Scan/Import Window) Auto Scan Screen‬صفحه اسکن‬
‫خودکار )پنجره اسکن‪/‬درج(‬
‫‪) (Auto Scan) Scan Settings Dialog Box‬کادر گفتگوی‬
‫تنظيمات اسکن )اسکن خودکار((‬
‫صفحه عکس ھا‪/‬اسناد )صفحه شيشه ای( )پنجره اسکن‪/‬درج(‬
‫کادر گفتگوی تنظيمات اسکن )عکس ھا‪/‬اسناد(‬
‫ذخيره کادر گفتگو‬
‫ذخيره به عنوان کادر گفتگوی فايل ‪PDF‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی تنظيمات ‪PDF‬‬
‫پنجره مشاھده و استفاده‬
‫صفحه ‪ 80‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫پنجره ايجاد‪/‬ويرايش فايل ‪PDF‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی چاپ سند‬
‫کادر گفتگوی چاپ عکس‬
‫ارسال از طريق کادر گفتگوی ايميل‬
‫پنجره تصحيح‪/‬ارتقاء کيفيت عکس‬
‫صفحه حالت تنھا با يک کليک‬
‫کادر گفتگوی اسکن خودکار‬
‫ذخيره کادر گفتگو )صفحه حالت تنھا با يک کليک(‬
‫‪) (One-click Mode Screen) Scan Settings Dialog Box‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی تنظيمات اسکن )صفحه حالت تنھا با يک کليک((‬
‫ذخيره کادر گفتگو‬
‫کادر گفتگوی تنظيمات ‪Exif‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی ‪PDF‬‬
‫ذخيره به عنوان کادر گفتگوی فايل ‪PDF‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی نامه‬
‫کادر گفتگوی ‪OCR‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی سفارشی‬
‫کادر گفتگوی موارد برگزيده‬
‫زبانه کلی‬
‫‪) (Save to PC) Scanner Button Settings Tab‬زبانه تنظيمات‬
‫دکمه اسکنر )ذخيره به رايانه((‬
‫‪) (Scanner Button Settings) Scan Settings Dialog Box‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی تنظيمات اسکن )تنظيمات دکمه اسکنر((‬
‫ضميمه‪ :‬باز کردن فايل ھای غير از تصاوير اسکن شده‬
‫باز کردن تصاوير ذخيره شده روی رايانه‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر( چيست؟‬
‫‪) Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear‬‬
‫‪) (Scanner Driver‬اسکن كردن با تنظيمات پيشرفته با استفاده از‬
‫‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر((‬
‫راه اندازی ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر(‬
‫اسکن در حالت ساده‬
‫اسکن در حالت پيشرفته‬
‫اسکن در حالت اسکن خودکار‬
‫‪Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with‬‬
‫‪) (Scanner Driver) ScanGear‬اسکن کردن چندين سند بصورت‬
‫ھمزمان با استفاده از ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر((‬
‫تصحيح تصاوير و تنظيم رنگ ھا با استفاده از ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر(‬
‫تصحيح تصاوير )ماسک نامشخص‪ ،‬کم کردن گرد و غبار و خراشيدگی ھا‪،‬‬
‫محو سازی و غيره(‬
‫تنظيم رنگ با استفاده از يک الگوی رنگ‬
‫تنظيم اشباع و توازن رنگ‬
‫تنظيم روشنايی و کنتراست‬
‫تنظيم نمودار ستونی‬
‫تنظيم منحنی رنگ مايه‬
‫آستانه تنظيمات‬
‫صفحه ھای ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر(‬
‫زبانه حالت اوليه‬
‫زبانه حالت پيشرفته‬
‫صفحه ‪ 81‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫تنظيمات ورودی‬
‫تنظيمات خروجی‬
‫تنظيمات تصوير‬
‫دکمه ھای تنظيم رنگ‬
‫زبانه حالت اسکن خودکار‬
‫کادر گفتگوی موارد برگزيده‬
‫زبانه اسکنر‬
‫زبانه پيش نمايش‬
‫زبانه اسکن‬
‫زبانه تنظيمات رنگ‬
‫ضميمه‪ :‬اطالعات مفيد برای اسکن کردن‬
‫تنظيم کادرھای برش‬
‫وضوح تصوير‬
‫فرمت ھای فايل‬
‫ھماھنگ سازی رنگ‬
‫ساير روش ھای اسکن‬
‫اسكن با درايور ‪WIA‬‬
‫اسکن کردن با استفاده از پانل کنترل )فقط ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫گرفتن کپی‬
‫کوچکنمايی يا بزرگنمايی کپی‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫کپی کردن بدون حاشيه )کپی بدون حاشيه(‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫درصورت بروز خطا‬
‫دستگاه روشن نمی شود‬
‫کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫چراغ ھشدار به رنگ نارنجی روشن می شود‬
‫چراغ برق به رنگ سبز و چراغ ھشدار به رنگ نارنجی متناوبا ً چشمک می زنند‬
‫‪ LED‬را اصالً نمی توان ديد‬
‫نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫برنامه کاربردی را نمی توان نصب کرد‬
‫‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬شروع نمی شود يا منوی ‪Easy-WebPrint EX‬‬
‫ظاھر نمی شود‬
‫نمی توان به درستی با يک کابل ‪ USB‬به رايانه متصل شد‬
‫سرعت چاپ يا اسکن کم است ‪ /‬اتصال ‪ USB‬پر سرعت کار نمی کند‪/‬پيام "اين‬
‫دستگاه می تواند تندتر کار کند" نمايش داده می شود‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫تا پايان کار نمی توان چاپ نمود‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫صفحه ‪ 82‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫رنگ ھا واضح نيستند‬
‫خطوط تراز نيستند‬
‫کاغذ چاپ شده پيچ می خورد يا لکه می شود‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫پشت کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫خطوط عمودی در کناره ھای نسخه ھای چاپی چاپ می شود‬
‫رنگ ھا ناھموار يا خط خطی است‬
‫چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫کپی‪/‬چاپ قبل از اتمام کار متوقف می شود‬
‫دستگاه حرکت می کند ولی جوھر خارج نمی شود‬
‫سرعت چاپ در حد انتظار نيست‬
‫نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به موقعيت مناسب جھت تعويض منتقل نمی شود‬
‫کاغذ بدرستی تغذيه نمی شود‬
‫کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫کاغذ در شيار خروجی کاغذ يا سينی عقب گير کرده است‬
‫در ساير موارد‬
‫پيام روی صفحه رايانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫‪Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the‬‬
‫‪printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from‬‬
‫‪the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is‬‬
‫‪) Displayed‬شماره خطا‪ B200 :‬خطای چاپگررخ داده است‪ .‬چاپگر را‬
‫خاموش کنيد و سيم برق چاپگر را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪ .‬سپس با مرکز خدمات‬
‫تماس بگيريد‪ .‬نمايش داده می شود(‬
‫شماره خطا‪ ****:‬خطای چاپگر رخ داده است‪ .‬دستگاه را خاموش و سپس روشن‬
‫کنيد‪ .‬اگر مشکل رفع نشد‪ ،‬به دفترچه راھنما مراجعه کنيد‪ .‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫خطای مربوط به جدا شدن سيم برق نشان داده می شود‬
‫خطای نوشتن‪/‬خطای خروجی‪/‬خطای ارتباط‬
‫ساير پيام ھای خطا‬
‫‪The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program‬‬
‫‪) Screen Is Displayed‬صفحه برنامه نظرسنجی گسترده چاپگر جوھرافشان‬
‫‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس نمايش داده می شود(‬
‫برای کاربران ‪Windows‬‬
‫نمايشگر وضعيت چاپگر نمايش داده نمی شود‬
‫‪Launching MP Navigator EX Whenever Pressing the‬‬
‫‪) SCAN Button on the Machine‬با ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه ‪) SCAN‬‬
‫اسکن( روی دستگاه‪ MP Navigator EX ،‬راه اندازی می شود(‬
‫مشکالت اسکن کردن‬
‫اسکنر کار نمی کند‬
‫‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر( شروع به کار نمی کند‬
‫پيام خطا ظاھر می شود و صفحه ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر( نمايش داده نمی‬
‫شود‬
‫کيفيت اسکن )تصوير نمايش داده شده روی مانيتور( ضعيف است‬
‫تصوير اسکن شده توسط ناحيه سفيد رنگ اضافی احاطه شده است‬
‫‪) Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time‬اسکن کردن‬
‫چندين سند بصورت ھمزمان ممکن نيست(‬
‫در حالت اسكن خودكار‪ ،‬اسكن به نحو صحيح انجام نمی شود‬
‫سرعت پايين اسکن‬
‫"‪) There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed‬‬
‫"حافظه کافی نيست‪ ".‬نمايش داده می شود(‬
‫عملکرد رايانه در طول مدت اسکن متوقف می شود‬
‫صفحه ‪ 83‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪ MP280 series‬راھنمای پيشرفته‬
‫اسکنر بعد از ارتقاء ‪ Windows‬کار نمی کند‬
‫مشکالت نرم افزار‬
‫برنامه نرم افزار ايميل که قصد استفاده از آن را داريد در صفحه ظاھر نمی شود تا‬
‫شما آن را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫تصوير اسکن شده بزرگ )کوچک( چاپ می شود‬
‫تصوير اسکن شده روی مانيتور بزرگ )کوچک( می شود‬
‫تصوير اسکن شده باز نمی شود‬
‫مشکالت ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫در اندازه مناسب و صحيح اسکن نمی شود‬
‫ھنگام اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات‪ ،‬موقعيت و اندازه تصوير بطور صحيح‬
‫مشخص نشده است‬
‫سند بدرستی گذاشته می شود‪ ،‬اما تصوير اسکن شده کج است‬
‫سند بدرستی گذاشته می شود‪ ،‬اما جھت در تصوير اسکن شده تغيير می کند‬
‫درصورتيکه نمی توانيد مشکل را حل کنيد‬
‫سؤاالت متداول‬
‫دستورالعمل ھای نحوه استفاده )درايور چاپگر(‬
‫نکات کلی )درايور اسکنر(‬
‫استفاده از ‪Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬‬
‫استفاده از ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 84‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نحوه استفاده از اﯾن دفترچه راھنما‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫راه اندازی پنجره فھرست مطالب‬
‫راه اندازی پنجره توضيحات‬
‫چاپ اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫استفاده از لغات کليدی برای يافتن يک سند‬
‫ثبت اسناد در راھنمای من‬
‫عالمت ھای استفاده شده در اين سند‬
‫عالئم تجاری و مجوزھا‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 85‬از ‪704‬‬
‫راه اندازی پنجره فھرست مطالب‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < راه اندازی پنجره فھرست مطالب‬
‫راه اندازی پنجره فھرست مطالب‬
‫ھنگامی که بر روی عنوان سند نمايش داده شده در پنجره فھرست مطالب در سمت چپ ‪ on-screen manual‬کليک می کنيد‪ ،‬اسناد مربوط به اين‬
‫عنوان در پنجره توضيحات در سمت راست نمايش داده می شوند‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که روی‬
‫در سمت چپ‬
‫کليک می کنيد‪ ،‬عناوين سند يافت شده در ساختارھای پايين تر نمايش داده می شوند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای بستن يا نمايش پنجره فھرست مطالب‪ ،‬روی‬
‫کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 86‬از ‪704‬‬
‫راه اندازی پنجره توضيحات‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < راه اندازی پنجره توضيحات‬
‫راه اندازی پنجره توضيحات‬
‫پنجره توضيحات‬
‫)‪ (1‬برای رفتن به سند مربوطه‪ ،‬روی نويسه ھای سبز رنگ کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬مکان نما به باالی اين سند منتقل می شود‪.‬‬
‫پنجره به کار رفته در توضيح عمليات‬
‫اين ‪ on-screen manual‬با پنجره ای شرح داده می شود که وقتی از سيستم عامل ‪) Windows 7 Home Premium‬در زير‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ناميده می شود( استفاده شود نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 87‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ اﯾن دفترچه راھنما‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < چاپ اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫چاپ اين دفترچه راھنما‬
‫جھت نمايش پنجره چاپ در سمت چپ ‪ ، on-screen manual‬بر روی‬
‫کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای بستن يا نمايش پنجره چاپ‪ ،‬روی‬
‫کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کليک کنيد و سپس روی تنظيم صفحه )‪ (Page Setup‬کليک کنيد‪ ،‬کادر گفتگوی تنظيم صفحه )‪ (Page Setup‬ظاھر می‬
‫وقتی روی‬
‫شود‪ .‬سپس می توانيد کاغذ مورد نظر جھت چاپ را به آسانی تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کليک کنيد و سپس برای نمايش کادر گفتگوی چاپ )‪ (Print‬روی تنظيمات چاپ )‪ (Print Settings‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬وقتی کادر گفتگو‬
‫روی‬
‫نمايش داده شد‪ ،‬چاپگر مورد استفاده برای چاپ را انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬زبانه تنظيم چاپ )‪ (Print Setup‬نيز‪ ،‬انتخاب چاپگر مورد نظر را برای‬
‫شما ممکن می سازد‪.‬‬
‫پس از انتخاب چاپگر مورد استفاده‪ ،‬برای تعيين تنظيمات چاپ روی ويژگی ھا‪ (...Properties) ...‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کليک کنيد و سپس روی تنظيم گزينه ھا )‪ (Option Settings‬کليک کنيد تا کادر گفتگوی تنظيم گزينه ھا )‪(Option Settings‬‬
‫روی‬
‫نمايش داده شود‪ .‬سپس می توانيد عمليات چاپ را راه اندازی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ عنوان سند و شماره صفحه )‪(Print document title and page number‬‬
‫اگر اين کادر انتخاب عالمت زده شود‪ ،‬نام دفترچه راھنما و شماره صفحه در سرصفحه )باالی سند( چاپ می شود‪.‬‬
‫چاپ رنگ پس زمينه و تصاوير )‪(Print background color and screens‬‬
‫اگر اين کادر انتخاب عالمت زده شود‪ ،‬رنگ پس زمينه و تصوير چاپ می شود‪ .‬برخی از تصاوير صرفنظر از اينکه اين کادر انتخاب‬
‫عالمت زده شود يا خير‪ ،‬چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫قبل از چاپ‪ ،‬تعداد صفحات مورد نظر را بررسی کنيد )‪(Check number of pages to be printed before printing‬‬
‫اگر اين کادر انتخاب عالمت زده شود‪ ،‬کادر گفتگوی تأييد تعداد صفحات مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪Print Page Count‬‬
‫‪ (Confirmation‬قبل از شروع چاپ نمايش داده می شود‪ .‬اين کادر گفتگو امکان بررسی تعداد صفحاتی که چاپ می شوند را برای شما‬
‫فراھم می کند‪.‬‬
‫روی زبانه انتخاب سند )‪ (Document Selection‬روش چاپ سند را انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬چھار روش زير برای چاپ در دسترس است‪:‬‬
‫چاپ سند فعلی‬
‫چاپ اسناد انتخابی‬
‫چاپ راھنمای من‬
‫چاپ ھمه اسناد‬
‫چاپ اﯾن دفترچه راھنما‬
‫نکته‬
‫در زبانه تنظيم چاپ )‪ ،(Print Setup‬نوع مورد نظر جھت چاپ را می توانيد انتخاب و سپس به سادگی تنظيمات چاپ را تعيين کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ سند فعلی‬
‫شما می توانيد سند نمايش داده شده فعلی را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬از انتخاب ھدف )‪ ،(Select Target‬سند فعلی )‪ (Current Document‬را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫عنوان سندی که در حال نمايش است‪ ،‬در ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫با انتخاب چاپ اسناد دارای پيوند )‪ ،(Print linked documents‬ھمچنين می توانيد اسنادی را که به سند فعلی پيوند دارند‪ ،‬چاپ‬
‫کنيد‪ .‬اسناد دارای پيوند به ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬اضافه می شوند‪.‬‬
‫جھت نمايش و بررسی اينکه نتيجه چاپ قبل از چاپ واقعی سند چگونه است‪ ،‬روی پيش نمايش چاپ )‪ (Print Preview‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬روی تنظيم چاپ )‪ (Print Setup‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در زبانه تنظيم صفحه )‪ ،(Page Setup‬چاپگر مورد نظر را انتخاب و در صورت نياز تنظيمات ساده چاپ را تعيين می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی شروع چاپ )‪ (Start Printing‬کليک کنيد‬
‫پيام تأييد تعداد صفحات مورد نظر برای چاپ نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬اجرای عمليات چاپ‬
‫تعداد صفحاتی را که بايد چاپ شوند‪ ،‬تأييد کنيد و سپس روی بله )‪ (Yes‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اسنادی که اکنون نمايش داده می شوند‪ ،‬چاپ می گردند‪.‬‬
‫چاپ اسناد انتخابی‬
‫می توانيد اسناد نظر جھت چاپ را انتخاب و چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬از انتخاب ھدف )‪ ،(Select Target‬اسناد انتخابی )‪ (Selected Documents‬را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫عناوين ھمه اسناد در ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬نمايش داده می شوند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫از ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬کادرھای انتخاب عنوان اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ را انتخاب و پر‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام انتخاب کادر انتخاب انتخاب خودکار اسناد در ساختارھای پايين تر‪Automatically select documents in lower) .‬‬
‫‪ ،(hierarchies‬کادر انتخاب ھمه عناوين اسناد يافت شده در ساختارھای پايين تر انتخاب می شود‪.‬‬
‫انتخاب ھمه )‪ (Select All‬را جھت انتخاب کادرھای انتخاب ھمه عناوين سند کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای پاک کردن کادرھای انتخاب ھمه عناوين اسناد روی پاک کردن ھمه )‪ (Clear All‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت نمايش و بررسی اينکه نتيجه چاپ قبل از چاپ واقعی سند چگونه است‪ ،‬روی پيش نمايش چاپ )‪ (Print Preview‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی زبانه تنظيم چاپ )‪ (Print Setup‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در زبانه تنظيم صفحه )‪ ،(Page Setup‬چاپگر مورد نظر را انتخاب و در صورت نياز تنظيمات ساده چاپ را تعيين می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬روی شروع چاپ )‪ (Start Printing‬کليک کنيد‬
‫پيام تأييد تعداد صفحات مورد نظر برای چاپ نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬اجرای عمليات چاپ‬
‫تعداد صفحاتی را که بايد چاپ شوند‪ ،‬تأييد کنيد و سپس روی بله )‪ (Yes‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تمام اسنادی که کادر انتخاب آنھا انتخاب شده است چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 88‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ اﯾن دفترچه راھنما‬
‫چاپ راھنمای من‬
‫شما می توانيد اسناد ثبت شده در راھنمای من را انتخاب و چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای اطالع از جزئيات راھنمای من‪ ،‬به " ثبت اسناد در راھنمای من" مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬از انتخاب ھدف )‪ ،(Select Target‬راھنمای من )‪ (My Manual‬را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫عناوين اسنادی که در راھنمای من ثبت شده اند در ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬نمايش داده می‬
‫شوند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫از ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬کادرھای انتخاب عنوان اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ را انتخاب و پر‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫انتخاب ھمه )‪ (Select All‬را جھت انتخاب کادرھای انتخاب ھمه عناوين سند کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای پاک کردن کادرھای انتخاب ھمه عناوين اسناد روی پاک کردن ھمه )‪ (Clear All‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت نمايش و بررسی اينکه نتيجه چاپ قبل از چاپ واقعی سند چگونه است‪ ،‬روی پيش نمايش چاپ )‪ (Print Preview‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی زبانه تنظيم چاپ )‪ (Print Setup‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در زبانه تنظيم صفحه )‪ ،(Page Setup‬چاپگر مورد نظر را انتخاب و در صورت نياز تنظيمات ساده چاپ را تعيين می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬روی شروع چاپ )‪ (Start Printing‬کليک کنيد‬
‫پيام تأييد تعداد صفحات مورد نظر برای چاپ نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬اجرای عمليات چاپ‬
‫تعداد صفحاتی را که بايد چاپ شوند‪ ،‬تأييد کنيد و سپس روی بله )‪ (Yes‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تمام اسنادی که کادر انتخاب آنھا انتخاب شده است چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫چاپ ھمه اسناد‬
‫شما می توانيد ھمه اسناد ‪ on-screen manual‬را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬از انتخاب ھدف )‪ ،(Select Target‬تمام اسناد )‪ (All Documents‬را انتخاب کنيد‬
‫عناوين ھمه اسناد در ليست اسناد مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Documents to Be Printed‬نمايش داده می شوند‪ ،‬و کادرھای انتخاب بطور‬
‫خودکار انتخاب می شوند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورت پاک کردن کادر انتخاب عنوان سند‪ ،‬سند چاپ نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫انتخاب ھمه )‪ (Select All‬را جھت انتخاب کادرھای انتخاب ھمه عناوين سند کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای پاک کردن کادرھای انتخاب ھمه عناوين اسناد روی پاک کردن ھمه )‪ (Clear All‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت نمايش و بررسی اينکه نتيجه چاپ قبل از چاپ واقعی سند چگونه است‪ ،‬روی پيش نمايش چاپ )‪ (Print Preview‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬روی زبانه تنظيم چاپ )‪ (Print Setup‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در زبانه تنظيم صفحه )‪ ،(Page Setup‬چاپگر مورد نظر را انتخاب و در صورت نياز تنظيمات ساده چاپ را تعيين می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی شروع چاپ )‪ (Start Printing‬کليک کنيد‬
‫پيام تأييد تعداد صفحات مورد نظر برای چاپ نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬اجرای عمليات چاپ‬
‫تعداد صفحاتی را که بايد چاپ شوند‪ ،‬تأييد کنيد و سپس روی بله )‪ (Yes‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھمه اسناد چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫برای چاپ ھمه اسناد‪ ،‬تعداد زيادی کاغذ الزم است‪ .‬قبل از چاپ‪ ،‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که تعداد صفحات مورد نظر جھت چاپ را در‬
‫صفحه ‪ 89‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 90‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ اﯾن دفترچه راھنما‬
‫کادر گفتگوی تأييد تعداد صفحات مورد نظر برای چاپ )‪ (Print Page Count Confirmation‬عالمت زده ايد‪.‬‬
‫کادر گفتگوی پيش نمايش چاپ )‪ (Print Preview‬به شما امکان می دھد که چاپ را با عرض کاغذ تنظيم کنيد يا ميزان بزرگنمايی و‬
‫کوچکنمايی را تعيين نماييد‪ .‬اما اگر داده ھای چاپ به دليل ميزان جديد بزرگنمايی در خارج از کاغذ قرار بگيرد‪ ،‬اين قسمت از سند روی‬
‫کاغذ چاپ نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫استفاده از لغات کليدی برای ﯾافتن ﯾک سند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < استفاده از لغات کليدی برای يافتن يک سند‬
‫استفاده از لغات کليدی برای يافتن يک سند‬
‫شما می توانيد يک لغت کليدی را برای جستجوی سند مقصد وارد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تمام اسناد روی ‪ on-screen manual‬نمايش داده شده کنونی جستجو می شوند‪.‬‬
‫کليک کنيد‬
‫‪ .1‬روی‬
‫پنجره جستجو در سمت چپ ‪ on-screen manual‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای بستن يا نمايش پنجره جستجو‪ ،‬روی‬
‫کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬لغت کليدی را وارد کنيد‬
‫در لغت کليدی )‪ ،(Keyword‬لغت کليدی را برای يافتن موردی که بايد بررسی شود‪ ،‬وارد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتی که بخواھيد چندين لغت کليدی را وارد کنيد‪ ،‬بين لغات از فاصله استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫شما می توانيد حداکثر ‪ 10‬لغت کليدی يا حداکثر ‪ 255‬نويسه وارد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫حروف کوچک و بزرگ تشخيص داده نمی شوند‪.‬‬
‫اين برنامه نيز می تواند لغات کليدی را که دارای فاصله ھستند جستجو کند‪.‬‬
‫روش ساده يافتن سريع سندی که بايد خوانده شود‪ ،‬وارد نمودن لغات کليدی توضيح داده شده در زير است‪.‬‬
‫برای يادگيری نحوه استفاده از عملکرد مورد نظر شما‪:‬‬
‫نام فھرست نمايش داده شده روی صفحه عمليات دستگاه يا رايانه را وارد کنيد )برای مثال‪ ،‬کپی پاک کردن قاب(‪.‬‬
‫برای يافتن توضيح عملکرد مورد نظر برای ھدفی خاص‪:‬‬
‫عملکرد ‪ +‬گزينه مورد نظر جھت چاپ را وارد کنيد )برای مثال‪ ،‬چاپ تقويم(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی شروع جستجو )‪ (Start Searching‬کليک کنيد‬
‫جستجو شروع می شود‪ ،‬و اسنادی که حاوی لغات کليدی ھستند‪ ،‬در فھرست نتايج جستجو نمايش داده می شوند‪.‬‬
‫زمانی که شما با وارد کردن چندين لغت کليدی جستجو می کنيد‪ ،‬نتايج جستجو طبق زير نمايش داده می شوند‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 91‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 92‬از ‪704‬‬
‫استفاده از لغات کليدی برای ﯾافتن ﯾک سند‬
‫اسناد حاوی موارد مشابه )‪(Documents Containing Perfect Match‬‬
‫اسنادی که حاوی رشته نويسه کامل جستجو )شامل فاصله( ھستند‪ ،‬يعنی دقيقا ً لغاتی که وارد کرده ايد )کامالً مطابق با لغت کليدی(‬
‫اسناد حاوی تمام لغات کليدی )‪(Documents Containing All Keywords‬‬
‫اسنادی که حاوی ھمه لغات کليدی ھستند که وارد نموده ايد‬
‫اسناد حاوی ھرکدام از لغات کليدی )‪(Documents Containing Any Keyword‬‬
‫اسنادی که حاوی حداقل يکی از لغات کليدی ھستند که وارد نموده ايد‬
‫‪ .4‬نمايش سندی که می خواھيد آن را بخوانيد‬
‫از ليست نتايج جستجو‪ ،‬روی عنوان سند مورد نظر جھت خواندن دو بار کليک کنيد )يا کليد ‪ Enter‬را انتخاب کرده و فشار دھيد(‪.‬‬
‫زمانی که اسناد عنوان مزبور نمايش داده می شود‪ ،‬لغات کليدی يافت شده در اين اسناد برجسته می شوند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫واقع در سمت‬
‫تاريخچه جستجو درصورت تصحيح واژه کليدی و انجام چندين جستجو‪ ،‬باقی می ماند‪ .‬برای حذف تاريخچه جستجو‪ ،‬روی‬
‫راست لغت کليدی )‪ (Keyword‬کليک کنيد‪ ،‬و پاک کردن تاريخچه )‪ (Clear History‬که نمايش داده می شود را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 93‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ثبت اسناد در راھنمای من‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < ثبت اسناد در راھنمای من‬
‫ثبت اسناد در راھنمای من‬
‫اسنادی که غالبا ً خوانده می شوند را به عنوان اسناد راھنمای من ثبت کنيد‪ ،‬تا بتوانيد به آسانی در ھر زمان دلخواه به آنھا مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬نمايش سند‬
‫سندی را که به راھنمای من افزوده می شود‪ ،‬نمايش دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کليک کنيد‬
‫‪ .2‬روی‬
‫پنجره راھنمای من در سمت چپ ‪ on-screen manual‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای بستن يا نمايش پنجره راھنمای من‪ ،‬روی‬
‫کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ثبت سند در راھنمای من‬
‫روی افزودن )‪ (Add‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عنوان سندی که نمايش داده می شود در فھرست راھنمای من )‪ (List of My Manual‬اضافه می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھمچنين می توانيد با استفاده از روش ھای زير اسناد را به راھنمای من اضافه کنيد‪ .‬درصورت اضافه نمودن يک سند به راھنمای من‪،‬‬
‫عالمت در نمادھای سند پنجره محتوا نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫از ليست اسنادی که اخيراً نمايش داده شده اند )‪ (Recently Displayed Documents‬روی عنوان سندی که بايد به راھنمای‬
‫من جھت نمايش آن اضافه شود‪ ،‬دو بار کليک کنيد )يا سندی را انتخاب کرده و کليد ‪ Enter‬را فشار دھيد( و سپس روی افزودن )‬
‫‪ (Add‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫روی عنوان سند نمايش داده شده در پنجره محتوا يا پنجره توضيحات کليک راست کنيد و سپس افزودن به راھنمای من )‪Add to My‬‬
‫‪ (Manual‬را از فھرست کليک راست انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در پنجره محتوا عنوان سند مورد نظر برای افزودن به راھنمای من را انتخاب کنيد و سپس افزودن به راھنمای من )‪Add to My‬‬
‫‪ (Manual‬را از سمت راست پايين پنجره کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 94‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ثبت اسناد در راھنمای من‬
‫‪ .4‬نمايش راھنمای من‬
‫زمانی که بر روی عنوان سند نمايش داده شده در فھرست راھنمای من )‪ (List of My Manual‬دوبار کليک می کنيد )يا کليد )‪ (Enter‬را‬
‫انتخاب کرده و فشار می دھيد(‪ ،‬آن سند در پنجره توضيحات نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای حذف يک سند از فھرست راھنمای من )‪ ،(List of My Manual‬عنوان را از فھرست انتخاب کرده و سپس روی حذف )‬
‫‪ (Delete‬کليک کنيد‪) ،‬يا کليد ‪ Delete‬را فشار دھيد(‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 95‬از ‪704‬‬
‫عالمت ھای استفاده شده در اﯾن سند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < عالمت ھای استفاده شده در اين سند‬
‫عالمت ھای استفاده شده در اين سند‬
‫ھشدار‬
‫دستورالعمل ھايی که عدم توجه به آنھا‪ ،‬ممکن است موجب مرگ يا جراحات جدی ناشی از استفاده نادرست از دستگاه شود‪ .‬برای استفاده ايمن از‬
‫دستگاه بايد اين دستورالعمل ھا را رعايت کرد‪.‬‬
‫احتياط‬
‫دستورالعمل ھايی که عدم توجه به آنھا‪ ،‬ممکن است موجب بروز جراحت يا خسارات مالی ناشی از استفاده نادرست از دستگاه شود‪ .‬برای استفاده ايمن‬
‫از دستگاه بايد اين دستورالعمل ھا را رعايت کرد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫دستورالعمل ھای حاوی اطالعات مھم‪ .‬اين دستورالعمل ھا را حتما ً مطالعه نماييد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫دستورالعمل ھا شامل نکته ھايی برای استفاده و توضيحات بيشتر ھستند‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 96‬از ‪704‬‬
‫عالئم تجاری و مجوزھا‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < نحوه استفاده از اين دفترچه راھنما < عالئم تجاری و مجوزھا‬
‫عالئم تجاری و مجوزھا‬
‫‪ Microsoft‬عالمت تجاری ثبت شده ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬است‪.‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬عالمت تجاری يا عالمت تجاری ثبت شده ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬در اياالت متحده و يا ساير کشورھاست‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬عالمت تجاری يا عالمت تجاری ثبت شده ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬در اياالت متحده و يا ساير کشورھاست‪.‬‬
‫‪ Internet Explorer‬عالمت تجاری يا عالمت تجاری ثبت شده ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬در اياالت متحده و يا ساير کشورھاست‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬و ‪ Mac‬عالئم تجاری ‪ Apple Inc.‬ھستند که در اياالت متحده و ساير کشورھا به ثبت رسيده اند‪.‬‬
‫‪ Bonjour‬عالمت تجاری ‪ Apple Inc.‬است که در اياالت متحده و ساير کشورھا به ثبت رسيده است‪.‬‬
‫‪ Adobe RGB ،Adobe Photoshop ،Adobe‬و ‪ (1998) Adobe RGB‬عالئم تجاری ثبت شده يا عالئم تجاری ‪Adobe‬‬
‫‪ Systems Incorporated‬در اياالت متحده و‪/‬يا ساير کشورھا ھستند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫نام رسمی ‪ Windows Vista‬سيستم عامل ‪ Microsoft Windows Vista‬است‪.‬‬
‫‪Exif Print‬‬
‫اين دستگاه از ‪ Exif Print‬پشتيبانی می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ Exif Print‬استانداردی برای ارتقاء برقراری ارتباط بين دوربين ھا و چاپگرھای ديجيتال است‪ .‬با اتصال به يک دوربين ديجيتال سازگار با ‪Exif‬‬
‫‪ ،Print‬داده ھای تصوير دوربين در ھنگام تصويربرداری مورد استفاده قرار می گيرد و بھينه می شود و در نھايت چاپ ھايی با کيفيت فوق العاده باال‬
‫به دست می آيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 97‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ از راﯾانه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ از رايانه‬
‫چاپ از رايانه‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 98‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ از رايانه < چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫‪ Easy-PhotoPrint EX‬چيست؟‬
‫چاپ کردن عکس‬
‫ايجاد يک آلبوم‬
‫چاپ تقويم ھا‬
‫چاپ برچسب ھا‬
‫چيدمان چاپ‬
‫تصحيح و ارتقاء کيفيت عکس‬
‫‪) Creating Still Images from Videos‬ايجاد تصاوير ثابت از فيلمھا(‬
‫‪) Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites‬دريافت تصاوير از سايتھای اشتراک عکس(‬
‫پرسش و پاسخ‬
‫تنظيمات چاپ عکس‬
‫تنظيمات ديگر‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint
EX?
A000
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with
digital cameras.
You can also print borderless photos easily.
Important
Easy-PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers. It does not support some Canon
compact photo printers, including SELPHY CP series.
If a printer that supports Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, you cannot print items you create.
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy-LayoutPrint installed, EasyLayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Note
See Help of Easy-PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX screens.
Click Help in a screen or dialog box, or select Easy-PhotoPrint EX Help... from the Help menu. Help
appears.
About Exif Print
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports "Exif Print." Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication
between digital cameras and printers.
By connecting to an Exif Print-compliant digital camera, the image data at the time of shooting is used
and optimized, yielding extremely high quality prints.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications
Easy-PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications.
See the application's manual for details on the procedure for starting.
704 ‫ از‬99 ‫صفحه‬
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later supports the following functions.
- Photo Print
- Album
ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.0 or later supports the following functions.
- Photo Print
- Album
ZoomBrowser EX Ver.5.8 or later supports the following function.
- Album
Digital Photo Professional Ver.3.2 or later supports the following function.
- Photo Print
Important
Easy-PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo
Professional:
Menu and Open do not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen.
Images cannot be corrected/enhanced.
Image display order cannot be changed.
Edited images cannot be saved.
Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on
the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. Therefore, you cannot use the Vivid Photo
and Photo Noise Reduction functions.
Solution Menu EX Ver.1.0.0 or later supports the following functions.
- Photo Print
- Album
- Calendar
- Layout Print
Important
When Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started by selecting a function from Solution Menu EX, Menu does
not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen.
Supported Image/Video Data Formats (Extensions)
BMP (.bmp)
JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg)
TIFF (.tif, .tiff)
PICT (.pict, .pct)
Easy-PhotoPrint image files (.epp)
MOV ( .mov)
Important
Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are supported.
When selecting an image, if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder, the image may not be
displayed correctly or Easy-PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format. In such
cases, move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different data format, and then
select the folder again.
Note
(Question Mark).
The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as
When Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional, all image files supported by
Digital Photo Professional will be displayed.
704 ‫ از‬100 ‫صفحه‬
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
704 ‫ از‬101 ‫صفحه‬
File Formats (Extensions) Supported by Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5)
Page top
Printing Photos
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos
A010
Printing Photos
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts.
You can also create borderless photos easily.
Corrections suitable for photos can be applied automatically when printing.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting a Photo
3. Selecting the Paper
4. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Creating Still Images from Videos
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
704 ‫ از‬102 ‫صفحه‬
Printing Photos
704 ‫ از‬103 ‫صفحه‬
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬104 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Starting
Easy-PhotoPrint EX
A011
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX >
Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos >
Selecting a Photo
A012
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Photo Print from Menu.
The Select Images screen appears.
Important
The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows:
- A black line appears along an edge of the image.
- An edge of the image appears cropped.
However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print
results will not be affected.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Important
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX, ZoomBrowser EX
or Digital Photo Professional), the folder tree area will not be displayed.
The images selected in the application will be displayed as thumbnails.
Note
You can also use still images captured from videos.
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
704 ‫ از‬105 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬106 ‫صفحه‬
3. Click the image you want to print.
The number of copies appears as "1" below the clicked image, while the selected image itself will
appear in the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
To print two or more copies of an image, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
(Up arrow) until the number of copies you
want is reached. To reduce the number of copies shown in the box, click
(Down arrow).
You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen.
You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name.
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Selecting the Paper
704 ‫ از‬107 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos >
Selecting the Paper
A013
Selecting the Paper
1. Click Select Paper.
The Select Paper screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Paper Source
Paper Size
Media Type
Note
The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer. See Help for details.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
Note
You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise.
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
See Help for details on the Select Paper screen.
Page top
Printing
704 ‫ از‬108 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Printing
A014
Printing
1. Click Layout/Print.
The Layout/Print screen appears.
Important
The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows:
- A black line appears along an edge of the image.
- An edge of the image appears cropped.
However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print
results will not be affected.
2. Select a layout you want to use.
Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer, paper size, and media
type.
3. Click Print.
Important
The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings.
It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again.
Saving Photos
When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may
become wider than the other.
Printing
704 ‫ از‬109 ‫صفحه‬
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Note
You can crop images or print dates on photos.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
You can specify advanced Photo Print settings (number of copies, print quality, etc.) in the
Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
See Help for details on the Layout/Print screen.
Page top
Creating an Album
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album
A020
Creating an Album
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Creating Still Images from Videos
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
704 ‫ از‬110 ‫صفحه‬
Creating an Album
704 ‫ از‬111 ‫صفحه‬
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬112 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
A021
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX >
Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
A022
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Album from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Cover
Double page album
Page number
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the
Cover Options dialog box. To display the Cover Options dialog box, select Front or Front & Back
for Cover and click Options....
Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout (consisting of twopage master). In a double-page album, you can arrange an image across the left and right
pages.
You can customize the page numbers (position, font size, etc.) in the Page Number Settings
dialog box. To display the Page Number Settings dialog box, select the Page number checkbox
and click Settings....
You can customize the margins of the front cover, inside pages and back cover in the Margin
Settings dialog box. To display the Margin Settings dialog box, click Margins....
3. Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout.
704 ‫ از‬113 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting the Paper and Layout
704 ‫ از‬114 ‫صفحه‬
4. If you want to change the layout, click Layout....
The Change Layout dialog box appears.
In the Change Layout dialog box, you can change the layout or select whether to print the date (on
which the picture was taken) on the photo.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, Double
page album, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout
dialog box and click Date Settings....
5. If you want to change the background, click Background....
The Change Background dialog box appears.
In the Change Background dialog box, you can paint the background in a single color or paste an
image file to it.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬115 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Selecting a Photo
A023
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Important
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser
EX), the folder tree area will not be displayed.
The images selected in the application will be displayed as thumbnails.
Note
You can also use still images captured from videos.
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
3. Select the image(s) you want to print, and click one of the buttons below.
To print on the front cover, click
To print on the inside pages, click
To print on the back cover, click
(Import to Front Cover).
(Import to Inside Pages).
(Import to Back Cover).
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬116 ‫صفحه‬
The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging it (them) into the selected image
area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
704 ‫ از‬117 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Editing
A024
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit your album if necessary.
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
album. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows:
C1: Front cover
C2: Inside the front cover
Editing
704 ‫ از‬118 ‫صفحه‬
C3: Inside the back cover
C4: Back cover
"C2"/"C3" appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank/Leave the inside of back
cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
704 ‫ از‬119 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Printing
A025
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print each page of the album on a full page without
borders.
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
Printing
704 ‫ از‬120 ‫صفحه‬
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Calendars
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars
A040
Printing Calendars
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Creating Still Images from Videos
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Setting Calendar Display
Setting Holidays
Saving
704 ‫ از‬121 ‫صفحه‬
Printing Calendars
704 ‫ از‬122 ‫صفحه‬
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬123 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
A041
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX >
Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
A042
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Calendar from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Start from
Period
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can add holidays to your calendar.
Setting Holidays
3. Select a layout for Design.
If necessary, make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background.
Note
You can customize the calendar display (font colors of the dates and days of the week, position
and size of the calendar, etc.).
Setting Calendar Display
You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change
Background dialog box. To display the Change Background dialog box, click Background....
704 ‫ از‬124 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting the Paper and Layout
704 ‫ از‬125 ‫صفحه‬
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬126 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Selecting a Photo
A043
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Note
You can also use still images captured from videos.
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging it (them) into the selected image
area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬127 ‫صفحه‬
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
704 ‫ از‬128 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Editing
A044
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the calendar if necessary.
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Setting Calendar Display
Setting Holidays
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
calendar. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
Editing
704 ‫ از‬129 ‫صفحه‬
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
704 ‫ از‬130 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Printing
A045
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
Printing
704 ‫ از‬131 ‫صفحه‬
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Stickers
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers
A050
Printing Stickers
You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Creating Still Images from Videos
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
704 ‫ از‬132 ‫صفحه‬
Printing Stickers
704 ‫ از‬133 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬134 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
A051
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX >
Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
704 ‫ از‬135 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
A052
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Stickers from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Print date
Use the same image in all frames
Note
Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected.
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings....
Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the
frames on the page.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬136 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Selecting a Photo
A053
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Note
You can also use still images captured from videos.
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging it (them) into the selected image
area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬137 ‫صفحه‬
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
704 ‫ از‬138 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Editing
A054
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the stickers if necessary.
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
stickers. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
704 ‫ از‬139 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Printing
A055
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box. To display the Adjust
Print Position dialog box, click Print Position....
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Note
Printing
704 ‫ از‬140 ‫صفحه‬
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Layout
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout
A150
Printing Layout
You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Creating Still Images from Videos
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Changing Layout
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
704 ‫ از‬141 ‫صفحه‬
Printing Layout
704 ‫ از‬142 ‫صفحه‬
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬143 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Starting
Easy-PhotoPrint EX
A151
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX >
Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
A152
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Layout Print from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Print date
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings....
3. Select a layout from Layouts.
Note
The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
704 ‫ از‬144 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting the Paper and Layout
704 ‫ از‬145 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬146 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout >
Selecting a Photo
A153
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Note
You can also use still images captured from videos.
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging it (them) into the selected image
area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Selecting a Photo
704 ‫ از‬147 ‫صفحه‬
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
704 ‫ از‬148 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Editing
A154
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the layout if necessary.
Changing Layout
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout.
It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Editing
704 ‫ از‬149 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Printing
704 ‫ از‬150 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Printing
A155
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos.
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
Printing
704 ‫ از‬151 ‫صفحه‬
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos
A060
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
You can correct and enhance images.
(Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of
Click
Photo Print. You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct/Enhance Images
window.
Important
For Photo Print, if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box,
you cannot correct/enhance images.
Note
See "Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Auto Photo Fix
This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Red-Eye Correction Function
You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Face Brightener Function
You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background.
Using the Face Brightener Function
Face Sharpener Function
You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Digital Face Smoothing Function
You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Blemish Remover Function
You can remove moles.
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Image Adjustment
You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image.
704 ‫ از‬152 ‫صفحه‬
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
704 ‫ از‬153 ‫صفحه‬
You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color.
Adjusting Images
Page top
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
704 ‫ از‬154 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
A066
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections.
Important
The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to automatically
apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing, by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color
correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Preferences... from the File menu.
Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto
Photo Fix.
Also, Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital camera,
etc. manufactured by other companies.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct/Enhance
Images window.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
704 ‫ از‬155 ‫صفحه‬
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
4. Click Auto Photo Fix, then click OK.
The entire photo is corrected automatically and the
the upper left of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings
made at the time of shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for corrected images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
704 ‫ از‬156 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
A061
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash.
You can perform the Red-Eye Correction function either automatically or manually.
Note
Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing. To correct automatically,
select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences
dialog box and select the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct/Enhance
Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
704 ‫ از‬157 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Correction
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
4. Click Red-Eye Correction.
5. Click OK.
Red eyes are corrected and the
the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of
Important
Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Correction
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Red-Eye Correction.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red-Eye Correction.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Paintbrush).
5. Drag to select the red area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Red eye is corrected and the
704 ‫ از‬158 ‫صفحه‬
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the
image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Face Brightener Function
704 ‫ از‬159 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Brightener Function
A062
Using the Face Brightener Function
You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background.
Note
You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo
Fix.
If the correction had not been made sufficiently, applying Face Brightener function is recommended.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct/Enhance
Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
Using the Face Brightener Function
704 ‫ از‬160 ‫صفحه‬
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Face Brightener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter, and
the
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Using the Face Brightener Function
704 ‫ از‬161 ‫صفحه‬
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Face Sharpener Function
704 ‫ از‬162 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Sharpener Function
A063
Using the Face Sharpener Function
You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo.
You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct/Enhance
Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
Auto Correction
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
704 ‫ از‬163 ‫صفحه‬
4. Click Face Sharpener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener.
5. Click OK.
The face is sharpened and the
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the
image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Correction
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Face Sharpener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the
Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
704 ‫ از‬164 ‫صفحه‬
(Correction/
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
704 ‫ از‬165 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
A064
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to enhance from the thumbnail list in the Correct/
Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
Auto Enhancement
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
704 ‫ از‬166 ‫صفحه‬
4. Click Digital Face Smoothing.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing.
5. Click OK.
Skin is enhanced beautifully and the
of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so
Click
that you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation.
If you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Enhancement
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Digital Face Smoothing.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the
mark appears on the upper left of the image.
704 ‫ از‬167 ‫صفحه‬
(Correction/Enhancement)
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
(Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so
Click
that you can compare and check the result.
Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for enhanced images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images.
Page top
Using the Blemish Remover Function
704 ‫ از‬168 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Blemish Remover Function
A065
Using the Blemish Remover Function
You can remove moles.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to enhance from the thumbnail list in the Correct/
Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Blemish Remover.
Using the Blemish Remover Function
704 ‫ از‬169 ‫صفحه‬
Note
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Moles in and around the selected area are removed and the
appears on the upper left of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so
Click
that you can compare and check the result.
Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for enhanced images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images.
Page top
Adjusting Images
704 ‫ از‬170 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Adjusting Images
A067
Adjusting Images
You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be adjusted.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list in the Correct/Enhance
Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Adjust.
4. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level.
The following adjustments are available:
Brightness
Adjusting Images
704 ‫ از‬171 ‫صفحه‬
Contrast
Sharpness
Blur
Show-through Removal
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the adjustment side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone. See "
Advanced " in the descriptions of the Correct/Enhance Images window for details.
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save adjusted images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for adjusted images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Correct/Enhance Images Window
A068
Correct/Enhance Images Window
You can correct/enhance images in this window.
(Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select
To display the Correct/Enhance Images window, click
Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print.
(1) Task Area
(2) Toolbar
(1) Task Area
Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs.
Click the Auto or Manual tab to display the corresponding tab.
Auto Tab
Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image.
704 ‫ از‬172 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
704 ‫ از‬173 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Photo Fix
Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos.
Important
The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to
automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing, by selecting Enable Auto
Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Preferences... from the File menu.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select
Prioritize Exif Info
Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of
shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images
(JPEG).
For Photo Print, you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically
by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox.
Red-Eye Correction
Corrects red eyes.
Note
For Photo Print, you can also automatically correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix
in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting
the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox.
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Apply to all images
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Automatically corrects/enhances all images displayed in the thumbnail list.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected/enhanced image (the selected one).
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected/enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Manual Tab
There are two menus on the Manual tab: Adjust and Correct/Enhance.
Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image.
Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas.
Adjust
Brightness
Adjusts the overall image brightness.
Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast.
Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Sharpness
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the photo
is out of focus or text is blurred.
Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image.
Blur
Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image.
Move the slider to the right to soften the image.
Show-through Removal
704 ‫ از‬174 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document
from appearing on the image.
Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect.
Advanced
Opens the Advanced Adjustment dialog box in which you can make fine adjustments to the image
brightness and color tone.
For Brightness/Contrast and Tone, select a color in Channel to adjust either Red, Green or Blue, or
select Master to adjust three colors together.
Brightness/Contrast
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image.
Move the Brightness slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Move the Contrast slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Tone
Adjust the brightness balance by specifying Highlight (the brightest level), Shadow (the darkest
level) and Midtone (the color in the middle of Highlight and Shadow).
Move the Highlight slider to the left to brighten the image.
Move the Midtone slider to the left to brighten and right to darken the image.
Move the Shadow slider to the right to darken the image.
Color Balance
Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image.
Move the Color Balance slider to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.
Note
These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed).
You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and
increasing the complementary color. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color
affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is
recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all
three color pairs so that the portion turns white.
Defaults
Resets all adjustments.
Close
Closes the Advanced Adjustment dialog box.
Note
The Brightness and Contrast values set in Adjust do not change even if the brightness and
704 ‫ از‬175 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
color tone are adjusted in the Advanced Adjustment dialog box.
Defaults
Resets each adjustment (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal).
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected/enhanced/adjusted image (the selected one).
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected/enhanced/adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correct/Enhance
Red-Eye Correction
Corrects red eyes in the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Note
For Photo Print, red eyes are automatically corrected when printing by selecting Enable Auto
Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and
selecting the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox. To correct manually, deselect the
checkbox.
Face Brightener
Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Face Sharpener
Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles in the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Blemish Remover
704 ‫ از‬176 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
704 ‫ از‬177 ‫صفحه‬
Removes moles in the selected area.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the specified area.
Undo
Cancels the latest correction/enhancement.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected/enhanced/adjusted image (the selected one).
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected/enhanced/adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
(2) Toolbar
Toolbar
(Zoom In/Zoom Out)
Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the image.
(Full Screen)
Displays the entire image in Preview.
(Compare)
Displays the Compare Images window. You can compare the images before and after the correction/
enhancement/adjustment side by side.
The image before the correction/enhancement/adjustment is displayed on the left, and the image
after the correction/enhancement/adjustment is displayed on the right.
Page top
Creating Still Images from Videos
704 ‫ از‬178 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating Still Images from
Videos
A160
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can capture video frames and create still images.
Important
This function is supported under Windows XP or later. However, it is not supported under the 64-bit
editions of Windows XP.
This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.5 or later (supplied with Canon digital
cameras supporting MOV format video recording) is not installed.
Videos may not play smoothly depending on your environment.
When the color tone of a video is changed via the settings of the graphic driver (video card) or its
utility, such a change is not reflected in still images captured from the video. Therefore, color tones
may differ between videos and captured still images.
1. In the Select Images screen, click
(Capture frames from video).
The Video Frame Capture window and Select Video dialog box appear.
Note
You can also display the Video Frame Capture window by clicking
(Capture frames from
video) in the Add Image dialog box. To display the Add Image dialog box, select the page you
(Add Image).
want to add images to in the Edit screen, then click
See " Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window " for details on the Video Frame Capture
window.
2. In the Select Video dialog box, select the folder containing the video from which you
want to capture still images.
The videos in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Creating Still Images from Videos
704 ‫ از‬179 ‫صفحه‬
Note
Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are displayed.
The selected video plays.
3. Select the video from which you want to capture still images and click OK.
The selected video plays in Preview of the Video Frame Capture window.
Note
(Pause) appears while a video plays, and
video is stopped.
(Pause) and
Use
the frame you want to capture.
(Playback) appears while a
(Frame backward/Frame advance) to display
4. Display the frame you want to capture and click
(Capture).
The captured still image is displayed in the Captured frame(s) area.
Important
You can capture up to 150 frames from one video.
5. Select the image(s) you want to save and click Save.
When the Save dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Note
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for saving created still images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The captured still images will be deleted if you exit before saving them.
Note
You can automatically capture multiple still images from a video.
Creating Still Images from Videos
704 ‫ از‬180 ‫صفحه‬
Display the Auto Frame Capture Settings area, then use
(Set start time/Set end time) in
the Preview area to specify the time range. In the Auto Frame Capture Settings area, select a
capture method and click Capture.
You can correct the captured still images in the Correct Captured Frames window. To display the
Correct Captured Frames window, select the image(s) you want to correct in the Captured frame(s)
area, then click
(Correct image).
When the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX, you can print the captured still
images.
To print, specify the printer and media in the Print area, then click Print.
When you print from the Movie Print window, images are automatically cropped. Therefore,
images will be printed with the left and right sides cut off.
If you want to adjust the cropping area before printing, save the captured still image and print it
from a function of Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
The saved still images can be used along with other images to create albums, calendars, etc. in
Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Page top
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating Still Images from
Videos > Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
A161
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
You can capture video frames and create still images in these windows.
In the Movie Print window, you can print the captured still images.
Important
This function is supported under Windows XP or later. However, it is not supported under the 64-bit
editions of Windows XP.
This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.5 or later (supplied with Canon digital
cameras supporting MOV format video recording) is not installed.
When the color tone of a video is changed via the settings of the graphic driver (video card) or its
utility, such a change is not reflected in still images captured from the video. Therefore, color tones
may differ between videos and captured still images.
To display the Video Frame Capture window, click
(Capture frames from video) in the Select Images
screen or Add Image dialog box. To display the Add Image dialog box, select the page you want to add
images to in the Edit screen, then click
(Add Image).
To display the Movie Print window, select Photo Print in Solution Menu EX and click the Movie Print icon.
Note
The Movie Print window displayed via Solution Menu EX is used as an example in the following
descriptions. The window displayed varies depending on how Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons Area
(2) Preview Area
(3) Captured Frame(s) Area
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons Area
704 ‫ از‬181 ‫صفحه‬
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
Print Area
You can print the captured still images.
Note
This function is available only when the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX.
Media Type
Displays the media type specified in the Print Settings dialog box.
Page Size
Displays the paper size specified in the Print Settings dialog box.
Print Settings
Displays the Print Settings dialog box in which you can make the basic print settings (select printer/
media, etc.).
Print
Starts printing the still images selected in the Captured frame(s) area.
Auto Frame Capture Settings Area
You can capture multiple still images according to the settings.
Note
Use
(Down arrow/Up arrow) to show/hide the Auto Frame Capture Settings area.
Start time/End time
Displays the start/end time of the time range from which to capture still images.
Total captures
Displays the number of still images to be captured.
Capture Method
Select from All frames, frame(s), sec. int. and frame int..
Capture
Captures still images according to the settings.
You can capture up to 150 frames at a time from one video.
704 ‫ از‬182 ‫صفحه‬
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
704 ‫ از‬183 ‫صفحه‬
Select Video
Displays the Select Video dialog box.
Select a folder, then select the video from which you want to capture still images.
Save
Saves the still images selected in the Captured frame(s) area.
Exit
Click to close the Video Frame Capture/Movie Print window.
(2) Preview Area
The video selected in the Select Video dialog box appears in Preview.
(Frame backward/Frame advance)
Click to reverse/advance one frame and pause.
You can also click during playback to reverse/advance one frame and pause.
(Playback/Pause)
Plays or pauses the video.
(Pause) appears while a video plays, and
(Playback) appears while a video
is stopped.
(Stop)
Stops the video.
(Capture)
Captures the current frame and displays the still image in the Captured frame(s) area.
You can also capture during playback.
(Mute/Clear mute)
Switches audio OFF/ON.
Playback Slider
Displays the video playback progress.
Current playback time is displayed to the left of the slider.
(Set start time/Set end time)
Set the start/end time of the time range from which to capture still images automatically.
Note
These buttons are displayed only when the Auto Frame Capture Settings area is displayed.
Time Range Slider
(Set start time/Set end time).
Displays the time range set with
You can also set the start/end time by moving
(Start/End point) located below the slider.
Note
This slider is displayed only when the Auto Frame Capture Settings area is displayed.
(3) Captured Frame(s) Area
Displays the thumbnails of the captured still images.
Double-click a thumbnail image to display the Zoom In window in which you can check the details of the
image.
(Select all frames)
Selects all the images displayed in the Captured frame(s) area.
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
When you select an image, a checkmark appears in its checkbox.
(Clear all check-marks)
Cancels all image selections in the Captured frame(s) area.
(Correct image)
Displays the Correct Captured Frames window in which you can correct all the images selected in
the Captured frame(s) area.
Note
When a frame in which the subject or camera has moved significantly is captured, the image
may not be corrected properly.
(1) Task Area
Noise Reduction
Reduces noise (tonal variation that may appear in images taken in dark locations such as night
scenes using a digital camera).
Enhance resolutions
Select this checkbox to reduce the jaggies (roughness) in images.
Apply to all frames
Select this checkbox to correct all the images displayed in the thumbnail list.
OK
Applies Noise Reduction to the selected images or all images. Noise will be reduced to make
the images more vivid.
Note
Correction may take time depending on your environment.
When the Enhance resolutions checkbox is selected, Noise Reduction and Enhance
resolutions are applied simultaneously.
Reset Selected Frames
Cancels all corrections applied to the selected images.
Exit
Closes the Correct Captured Frames window and returns to the Video Frame Capture or Movie
Print window.
Source images will be overwritten by the corrected ones.
704 ‫ از‬184 ‫صفحه‬
Video Frame Capture/Movie Print Window
704 ‫ از‬185 ‫صفحه‬
(2) Toolbar
(Reduce/Enlarge frame)
Reduces or enlarges the displayed image.
(Whole frame)
Displays the entire image in Preview.
(Compare)
Displays the Compare Captured Frames window. You can compare the images before and after
the correction side by side.
The image before the correction is displayed on the left, and the image after the correction is
displayed on the right of the window.
Sort by Time
Displays the captured still images in the order of the time code.
Note
See "Creating Still Images from Videos " for details on how to create still images from videos.
Page top
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Downloading Images
from Photo Sharing Sites
A170
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
You can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to
print.
Important
Internet connection is required to use this function. Internet connection fees apply.
For the purpose of using this function, your product name, OS information, regional information and
(Import photos from photo sharing sites) will be collected and
information that you have clicked
sent to Canon.
This function may not be available in some regions.
It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from
the copyright holder, except for personal use, use within the home, or other use within the limited
scope as defined by the copyright.
Additionally, reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights.
You may be required permission of way to use the work from copyright holder when using the work
of others except for personal use, use within the home, or other use within the limited scope as
defined by the copyright. Please check the details carefully of the web page of work in the photo
sharing site.
Please also check terms of service in the photo sharing site before using the work of others.
Canon is not responsible for the any copyright problems by using this function.
This function is supported under Windows XP or later.
This product uses the Flickr API but is not endorsed or certified by Flickr.
1. In the Select Images screen, click
(Import photos from photo sharing sites).
The Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window appears.
Note
You can also display the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window by clicking
(Import photos from photo sharing sites) in the Add Image dialog box. To display the Add
Image dialog box, select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen, then click
704 ‫ از‬186 ‫صفحه‬
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
704 ‫ از‬187 ‫صفحه‬
(Add Image).
When you click
(Import photos from photo sharing sites), a message about created works
and personality rights appear.
To hide the message, select the Do not show this message again checkbox.
See " Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window " for details on the Import Photos from
Photo Sharing Sites window.
2. Enter the search text in Search.
3. Set Sort by, Number of Results per Page and License Type.
4. Click Start Search.
Search starts, then the images that match the search text appear in the Thumbnail window.
Important
Some images, such as images in formats other than JPEG, do not appear.
Note
(Go to the next page)
(Back to the previous page) to display the previous page. Click
Click
to display the next page.
Alternatively, enter a page number in the page number entry box and click View to display the
page.
The number of search results (images) may be small depending on the language of the
search text. In that case, entering English search text may increase search results.
5. Select the image(s) you want to download.
The selected image(s) is (are) displayed in the Selections area.
Note
You can select up to 300 images.
Click
(Cancel all image selections) to cancel all image selections in the Selections area.
(Cancel image selection) to cancel the selection of images selected in the
Click
Selections area.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save Selected Images.
When the Save Selected Image/Save Selected Images dialog box appears, specify the save location
and file name, then click Save.
The selected images are saved.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them in the Selections area and click Save Selected
Image. To save all images, click Save Selected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif data format is available for saving downloaded images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The search results (images) will be deleted if you exit before saving them.
Page top
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window
704 ‫ از‬188 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Downloading Images
from Photo Sharing Sites > Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window
A171
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window
In this window, you can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the
images you want to print.
Important
Internet connection is required to use this function. Internet connection fees apply.
This function is supported under Windows XP or later.
This product uses the Flickr API but is not endorsed or certified by Flickr.
To display the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window, click
(Import photos from photo
sharing sites) in the Select Images screen or Add Image dialog box. To display the Add Image dialog
box, select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen, then click
(Add Image).
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons Area
(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail Window
(4) Selections Area
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons Area
Photo Sharing Sites
Displays the name of the photo sharing site.
Search
Enter the search text.
Note
Alternatively, click
(Down arrow) to display up to 20 search history records and select
among them.
When you want to enter multiple keywords, insert a space between the keywords.
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window
Sort by
Select how to sort the search results in the Thumbnail window. Select Popularity or Date.
You cannot change the setting after a search.
Number of Results per Page
Select the number of images displayed in the Thumbnail window, from 10, 20 and 30.
You cannot change the setting after a search.
License Type
Select the license type of images to search for, from All types, CC license (Non-Commercial) and CC
license (Others).
Select All types to display all images regardless of license type.
Select CC license (Non-Commercial) to display CC licensed images that can be used for noncommercial purposes only. Select CC license (Others) to display other CC licensed images.
Note
License type varies by image. Point to an image to display a tooltip in which you can check the
license type.
License Type
All types
License Type
All Rights
Reserved
Unauthorized copying of images is illegal except for
personal/home use or for use within such limited
scope. Copying portraits (photographs of persons)
may infringe personality rights.
Attribution NonCommercial (CC
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not use the work for commercial purposes.
license)
Attribution Non-
Commercial No
Derivatives (CC
license)
Attribution Non-
Commercial
Share Alike (CC
license)
Attribution (CC
license)
Attribution No
Derivatives (CC
license)
CC license (Non
-Commercial)
Usage Precautions/Conditions
(Comply with the following conditions when using CC
licensed images except for personal use or use
within the home.)
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not use the work for commercial purposes.
- You may not modify the work.
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not use the work for commercial purposes.
- Even if your creation is built upon the work of others,
you must apply the same conditions to it as those set
out for the original work by the licensor.
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not modify the work.
Attribution Share
Alike (CC license)
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- Even if your creation is built upon the work of others,
you must apply the same conditions to it as those set
out for the original work by the licensor.
Attribution NonCommercial (CC
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not use the work for commercial purposes.
license)
license)
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not use the work for commercial purposes.
- You may not modify the work.
Attribution Non-
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
Attribution Non-
Commercial No
Derivatives (CC
704 ‫ از‬189 ‫صفحه‬
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window
Commercial
work along with your creation.
- You may not use the work for commercial purposes.
- Even if your creation is built upon the work of others,
you must apply the same conditions to it as those set
out for the original work by the licensor.
Share Alike (CC
license)
Attribution (CC
CC license
(Others)
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
license)
Attribution No
Derivatives (CC
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- You may not modify the work.
license)
Attribution Share
Alike (CC license)
- You must show the title and licensor of the original
work along with your creation.
- Even if your creation is built upon the work of others,
you must apply the same conditions to it as those set
out for the original work by the licensor.
Start Search
Starts searching for images, and displays the images that match the search text in the Thumbnail
window.
Important
Some images, such as images in formats other than JPEG, do not appear.
Save Selected Image
Saves the image selected in the Selections area.
Save Selected Images
Saves all the images displayed in the Selections area.
Exit
Click to close the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window.
(2) Toolbar
(Select all images)
Selects all the images in the page displayed in the Thumbnail window.
When you select an image, a checkmark appears in its checkbox.
Note
You can select up to 300 images.
(Clear all check-marks)
Cancels all image selections in the page displayed in the Thumbnail window.
(Back to the previous page/Go to the next page)
Displays the previous/next page.
Page number entry box/Total pages/View
Enter a page number and click View to display the page.
Thumbnail Size Slider
Resizes the images in the Thumbnail window.
Move the slider to the right to enlarge and left to reduce the images.
(3) Thumbnail Window
Displays the thumbnails (miniatures) of the search results (images). The title is displayed under each
704 ‫ از‬190 ‫صفحه‬
Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window
704 ‫ از‬191 ‫صفحه‬
thumbnail.
To select an image, click the thumbnail or checkbox.
Important
Due to limitations of photo sharing sites, if the search results exceed 4,000 images, the same
images as those displayed in the page containing the 4,001st image will be displayed in all the
subsequent pages.
For example, when Number of Results per Page is set to 20, the images displayed in page 201 are
the same as those displayed in page 202 and subsequent pages.
Note
Point to a thumbnail to display its title, license type and other information.
Right-click a thumbnail and select Open web page of work from the displayed menu to start a
browser and display the page of a photo sharing site on which the image is posted.
(4) Selections Area
Thumbnails of the images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed, along with the number of
images (number of selected images/number of search results).
(Cancel all image selections)
Cancels all image selections in the Selections area.
(Cancel image selection)
Cancels the selection of images selected in the Selections area.
Note
See "Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites" for details on how to download images from
photo sharing sites.
Page top
Questions and Answers
704 ‫ از‬192 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
A200
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page top
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
704 ‫ از‬193 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
A095
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
If you want to move (or copy) a file created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another,
you need to move (or copy) the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as
well.
For example, when you save a file named "MyAlbum.el1," a folder named "MyAlbum.el1.Data" is
automatically created in the same folder that contains the "MyAlbum.el1" file. If you want to move (or copy)
the "MyAlbum.el1" file to another folder, move (or copy) the "MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder as well. The
"MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder contains the photos used in the album.
Note
The icons may vary depending on the items.
Important
Do not change the Data folder name; otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited
with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Page top
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
704 ‫ از‬194 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
A096
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start
from?
As shown below, printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout/Print screen.
Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates.
See your printer manual for details on how to load paper (to print on the front/back, etc.).
Page top
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
704 ‫ از‬195 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> How Do I Print with Even Margins?
A097
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become
wider than the other, depending on the image and printer.
To always print with even margins, select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins
checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Preferences... from the File menu.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select
Crop the photo to apply even margins individually.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Note
This setting is available only when Photo Print is selected.
Page top
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
704 ‫ از‬196 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> What Is "C1" or "C4"?
A098
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
When an album is printed, labels such as "C1" and "C4" are printed as page numbers.
The "C1" and "C4" represent the front cover and back cover, respectively.
C1: Front cover
C2: Inside the front cover
C3: Inside the back cover
C4: Back cover
Note
"C2"/"C3" appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank/Leave the inside of back
cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box.
Page top
Photo Print Settings
704 ‫ از‬197 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings
A101
Photo Print Settings
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Page top
Printing Vivid Photos
704 ‫ از‬198 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Vivid Photos
A071
Printing Vivid Photos
Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing.
Important
This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo.
This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox, this effect applies only to the print result. The original
image or preview image will not be affected.
Page top
Reducing Photo Noise
704 ‫ از‬199 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Reducing Photo Noise
A072
Reducing Photo Noise
When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera, noise may appear in
the image.
Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and
make the printed photos more vivid.
Important
This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
When the noise is severe, change Normal to Strong.
The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result. The original image or preview image will
not be affected.
Page top
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
A073
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the
necessary portions.
Click
(Crop Image) in the Layout/Print screen or double-click the preview image.
Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK.
Note
To move the cropping area, place the cursor within the white frame and drag it. Drag the white lines
to enlarge/reduce the cropping area.
Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines. To create a balanced
composition, drag any of the intersecting points (white squares) or white broken lines over the main
subject of the photo.
The cropping effect applies only to the print result. The original image will not be cropped.
See Help for details on the Crop window.
704 ‫ از‬200 ‫صفحه‬
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
704 ‫ از‬201 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
704 ‫ از‬202 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
A074
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
To print the date the photo was taken on the photo, click
(Date Settings) in the Layout/Print screen,
then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box.
Note
The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system.
See Help for details on setting dates.
Page top
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
704 ‫ از‬203 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
A076
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple-photo layout in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type.
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: Borderless (x4)
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
Page top
Printing an Index
704 ‫ از‬204 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing an Index
A077
Printing an Index
You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one
page. It is convenient for managing your photos.
To print an index, select Index from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Important
Index cannot be printed if you select any of the following paper sizes.
- Credit Card
You can print up to 80 images on one page.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: Index (x20)
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
menu.
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
Printing an Index
704 ‫ از‬205 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
A078
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
You can print a variety of ID photos.
Important
The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use.
For details, contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo.
To print ID photos, select 4"x6" 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select a layout of
the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
The number of frames per page varies depending on the size of the ID photo to create. Check the
number of frames in the layouts displayed in the Layout/Print screen, then specify the number of
copies in the Select Images screen.
You can select two or more images and print different types of ID photos on one page.
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: ID Photo 3.5x4.5cm
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
704 ‫ از‬206 ‫صفحه‬
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
704 ‫ از‬207 ‫صفحه‬
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
ID photos can only be printed on 4"x6" 10x15cm paper.
Page top
Printing Photo Information
704 ‫ از‬208 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Photo Information
A079
Printing Photo Information
You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side.
To print them, select Letter 8.5"x11" or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select Captured
Info from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8.5"x11" and A4.
Page top
Saving Photos
704 ‫ از‬209 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Saving Photos
A092
Saving Photos
You can save edited photos. The information of cropping and layout can be saved.
Click Save in the Layout/Print screen.
When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Important
If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu
and save.
Note
Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen.
Page top
Opening Saved Files
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Opening Saved Files
A093
Opening Saved Files
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
1. Click Library from Menu.
The Open dialog box appears.
You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX in icon view (only for Windows 7/
Windows Vista) or thumbnail view.
Important
When using 64-bit editions of Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, the contents of files
cannot be displayed on Explorer.
2. Select the file you want to open and click Open.
The Layout/Print screen appears.
3. Edit the file if necessary.
Note
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format (extension).
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6)
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from
Library in Menu.
- Click Open in the step button area of each screen, then select the file you want to edit.
- Double-click the file.
- From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit.
You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
704 ‫ از‬210 ‫صفحه‬
Opening Saved Files
704 ‫ از‬211 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Other Settings
704 ‫ از‬212 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings
A102
Other Settings
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Setting Holidays
Setting Calendar Display
Opening Saved Files
Page top
Changing Layout
704 ‫ از‬213 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Layout
A080
Changing Layout
You can change the layout of each page separately.
Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen, then click
(Change Layout).
Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK.
Album
Important
If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will
happen:
: Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames
If the number of layout
in the new layout.
frames is increased
: Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the
If the number of layout
pages with the current layout can be fitted.
frames is decreased
If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames, any
image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted, starting with the last image that was added
to the former layout page.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, or the type of
page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly
selected.
Calendar
Changing Layout
704 ‫ از‬214 ‫صفحه‬
Important
The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout.
All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Layout Print
Important
If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will
happen:
: Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames
If the number of layout
in the new layout.
frames is increased
If the number of layout
frames is decreased
: Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the
pages with the current layout can be fitted.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly
selected.
Changing Layout
704 ‫ از‬215 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Changing Background
704 ‫ از‬216 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Background
A081
Changing Background
You can change the background of each page.
Important
You cannot change the background of the Stickers and Layout Print.
Click Background... in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in
the Edit screen, then click
(Change Background).
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box.
When Select from samples Is Selected
Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK.
Note
Changing Background
Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected.
Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application.
Click Search backgrounds... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional
materials for free.
Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply.
Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds.
When Single color Is Selected
Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK.
When Image file Is Selected
Set Image File Path and Image Layout, then click OK.
704 ‫ از‬217 ‫صفحه‬
Changing Background
704 ‫ از‬218 ‫صفحه‬
Note
See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box.
Page top
Adding Photos
704 ‫ از‬219 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding
Photos
A082
Adding Photos
You can add images to pages.
Select the page you want to add photos to in the Edit screen, then click
(Add Image).
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add
Image dialog box, and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right.
Note
Click an image to select it (background turns blue) or deselect it (background turns white). You can
also select multiple images.
You can also use still images captured from videos.
Creating Still Images from Videos
You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet.
Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites
Select an option for Add to and click OK.
Important
You can add up to 20 images at one time.
You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time. Add it one at a time.
Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined.
When the number of pages increases due to added images, you cannot add images beyond page
400.
Note
In the Add Image dialog box, you can select all images at one time or change the display size and
order of the thumbnails. See Help for details.
Adding Photos
704 ‫ از‬220 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Swapping Positions of Photos
704 ‫ از‬221 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Swapping Positions of Photos
A083
Swapping Positions of Photos
You can swap the positions of images.
Click
(Swap Image Positions) in the Edit screen.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the target and source images you want to swap, then click Swap.
When you finish swapping all images you want to swap, click Back to Edit.
Page top
Replacing Photos
704 ‫ از‬222 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Replacing Photos
A084
Replacing Photos
You can replace an image with another image.
Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen, then click
(Replace Selected Image).
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the
Replace Image dialog box. Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the
right of the screen and click OK.
If you want to select from the images already imported, click the Imported Images tab and select the
image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK.
Important
You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box.
Note
If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function, all the images
selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog
box.
When images are replaced, the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image.
- Position
- Size
- Frame
- Position and size of the date
The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited.
In the Replace Image dialog box, you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails. See
Help for details.
Page top
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
704 ‫ از‬223 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
A085
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
You can adjust the position, angle and size of images.
(Edit
Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click
Image) or double-click the image.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Set the Center Position, Rotation and Size, then click OK.
Note
You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen.
Select an image in the Edit screen, then click
(Free Rotate) and drag a corner of the image to
rotate it.
See Help for details on the position and size of images.
Page top
Cropping Photos
704 ‫ از‬224 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Cropping Photos
A086
Cropping Photos
Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the
necessary portions.
Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click
image.
(Edit Image) or double-click the
Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK.
Note
See Help for details on cropping.
Page top
Framing Photos
704 ‫ از‬225 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Framing
Photos
A087
Framing Photos
You can add frames to images.
Important
You cannot add frames to images in Stickers and Layout Print.
Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click
image.
(Edit Image) or double-click the
Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK.
Important
You cannot print dates on framed photos.
Note
Framing Photos
704 ‫ از‬226 ‫صفحه‬
Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images on a
selected page at one time.
Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application.
Click Search frames... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional
materials for free.
Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply.
Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing frames.
Search frames... will be displayed only if Album has been selected.
See Help for details on frames.
Page top
Printing Dates on Photos
704 ‫ از‬227 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Printing
Dates on Photos
A088
Printing Dates on Photos
You can print dates on images.
Select the image you want to print the date on in the Edit screen and click
click the image.
(Edit Image) or double-
Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the Show date checkbox.
Set the Text Orientation, Position, Font Size and Color, then click OK.
Important
You cannot print dates on framed images.
Note
The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system.
See Help for details on setting dates.
Printing Dates on Photos
704 ‫ از‬228 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Attaching Comments to Photos
704 ‫ از‬229 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Attaching Comments to Photos
A089
Attaching Comments to Photos
You can attach comments to images and display them in your album. The photo name, shooting date
and comments are displayed (from top to bottom) in a comment box.
Important
You cannot attach comments to Calendar, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click
double-click the image.
(Edit Image) or
Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Attaching Comments to Photos
704 ‫ از‬230 ‫صفحه‬
Select the Show comment box checkbox.
Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display, and enter comments.
Set the size and color of font, and position of the comments, etc., then click OK.
Note
See Help for details on comments.
Page top
Adding Text to Photos
704 ‫ از‬231 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding
Text to Photos
A090
Adding Text to Photos
You can add text to photos.
Click
(Add Text) in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text, then click OK.
Note
In the Edit Text Box dialog box, you can change the position, angle and size of the text. You can also
set the color and line of the text box. See Help for details.
To change the entered text, select the text box and click
dialog box appears. You can change the text.
(Edit Text Box). The Edit Text Box
Page top
Saving
704 ‫ از‬232 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Saving
A091
Saving
You can save edited items.
Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen.
Note
The screen(s) for Album printing is (are) used as example(s) in the following descriptions. The
screen(s) may vary depending on what you create.
When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Important
If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu
and save.
Note
Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen.
Page top
Setting Holidays
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting
Holidays
A099
Setting Holidays
You can add holidays to your calendar.
Click Set Holidays... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or click
(Setup Period/Holiday) in the
Edit screen and click Set Holidays... in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday
Settings dialog box.
To add a holiday, click Add.... The Add/Edit Holiday dialog box appears. To edit a saved holiday, select it
and click Edit....
To delete a holiday, select it and click Delete. To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar
period, click Clear.
In the Add/Edit Holiday dialog box that appears by clicking Add... or Edit..., you can specify the name and
date of the holiday.
704 ‫ از‬233 ‫صفحه‬
Setting Holidays
704 ‫ از‬234 ‫صفحه‬
Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date.
Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar.
Note
See Help for details on each dialog box.
Page top
Setting Calendar Display
704 ‫ از‬235 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting
Calendar Display
A100
Setting Calendar Display
You can customize the calendar display (fonts, lines, colors, position, size, etc.).
Click Settings... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click
(Setup Calendar) to display the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Important
The Position & Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from
the Edit screen.
Note
See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Page top
Opening Saved Files
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Opening
Saved Files
A103
Opening Saved Files
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
1. Click Library from Menu.
The Open dialog box appears.
You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX in icon view (only for Windows 7/
Windows Vista) or thumbnail view.
Important
When using 64-bit editions of Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, the contents of files
cannot be displayed on Explorer.
2. Select the file you want to open and click Open.
The Edit screen appears.
3. Edit the file if necessary.
Note
See the following sections for details on the editing procedures.
Editing Album
Editing Calendar
Editing Stickers
Editing Layout Print
Note
704 ‫ از‬236 ‫صفحه‬
Opening Saved Files
704 ‫ از‬237 ‫صفحه‬
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats (extensions).
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5)
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from
Library in Menu.
- Click Open in the step button area of each screen, then select the file you want to edit.
- Double-click the file.
- From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit.
You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 238‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی دﯾگر‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ از رايانه < چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫چاپ با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫روش ھای مختلف چاپ‬
‫تغيير کيفيت چاپ و تصحيح داده ھای تصوير‬
‫مروری بر درايور چاپگر‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Various Printing Methods
704 ‫ از‬239 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Stapling Margin
Execute Borderless Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Booklet Printing
Duplex Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Printing an Envelope
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Page top
Printing with Easy Setup
704 ‫ از‬240 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Printing with Easy Setup
P000
Printing with Easy Setup
The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine, is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select a frequently used profile
In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.
When you select a printing profile, the Additional Features, Media Type, and Printer Paper Size
settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset.
3. Select the print quality
For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Fast according to your purpose.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose.
Important
When you select the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings specified on the
Quick Setup, Main, Page Setup, and Effects tabs are saved, and you can print with the same
settings from the next time as well. (Effects tab cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used.)
Click Save... to register the specified settings. For instructions on registering settings, see "
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile."
Page top
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
P400
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application. When the page size and
orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the
application, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
When you are not able to specify them with the application, the procedure for selecting a page size and
orientation is as follows:
You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the paper size
Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Set Orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to
perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation.
Note
If Normal-size is selected for Page Layout, then Automatically reduce large document that the
printer cannot output is displayed.
Normally, you can leave the Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output
check box checked. During printing, if you do not want to reduce large documents that cannot be
printed on the printer, uncheck the check box.
704 ‫ از‬241 ‫صفحه‬
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
704 ‫ از‬242 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
P001
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows:
You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the number of copies to be printed
For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed.
3. Specify the print order
Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order, and
uncheck the check box when you want to print from the first page.
Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print
out all pages in each copy together. Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with
the same page number together.
Print from Last Page:
/Collate:
Print from Last Page:
/Collate:
704 ‫ از‬243 ‫صفحه‬
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Print from Last Page:
/Collate:
Print from Last Page:
/Collate:
704 ‫ از‬244 ‫صفحه‬
4. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing
order.
Important
When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give
priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the
function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the
printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be
multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected
for Page Layout.
Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page
Layout.
Note
By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are
collated one by one starting from the last page.
These settings can be used in combination with Normal-size, Borderless, Fit-to-Page, Scaled,
Page Layout, and Duplex Printing.
Page top
Setting the Stapling Margin
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting the Stapling Margin
P002
Setting the Stapling Margin
The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the side to be stapled
Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab.
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
staple position. When you want to change the setting, select from the list.
3. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
704 ‫ از‬245 ‫صفحه‬
Setting the Stapling Margin
704 ‫ از‬246 ‫صفحه‬
Note
The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width.
Important
Staple Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when:
Borderless, Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout.
Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing is also selected, only Staple Side can
be specified).
Page top
Execute Borderless Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Execute Borderless Printing
P003
Execute Borderless Printing
The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that
it extends slightly off the paper. Without the borderless printing function, a margin is provided around the
printed data. When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it, set
borderless printing.
The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows:
You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
Setting Borderless Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set borderless printing
Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
When a message prompting you to change the media type appears, select a media type from the
list and click OK.
704 ‫ از‬247 ‫صفحه‬
Execute Borderless Printing
3. Check the paper size
Check the Page Size list. When you want to change, select another page size from the list. The list
displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing.
4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper
If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider.
Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper, and moving the slider to
the left decreases the amount.
It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases.
Important
When you set the slider at the rightmost position, the back side of the paper may become
smudged.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the data is printed without any margins on the paper.
Important
When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically
changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing.
When High Resolution Paper, T-Shirt Transfers, or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on
the Main tab, you cannot perform borderless printing.
When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Duplex Printing, Staple Side settings, and the
Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are
unavailable.
Depending on the type of the media used during borderless printing, the print quality may
deteriorate at the top and bottom of the sheet or stains may form.
When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not
be printed depending on the size of the media used.
In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size.
Note
When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not
recommended, and therefore the message for media selection appears.
When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK.
Expanding the Range of the Document to Print
Setting a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems.
However, the portion of the document extending off the paper range will not be printed. Subjects around
the perimeter of a photo may not be printed.
Try borderless printing once. When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the
amount of extension. The extension amount decreases as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to
the left.
Important
When the amount of extension is decreased, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print,
depending on the size of the paper.
Note
When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the
full size.
When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm whether there will be no
704 ‫ از‬248 ‫صفحه‬
Execute Borderless Printing
704 ‫ از‬249 ‫صفحه‬
border before printing.
Page top
Fit-to-Page Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Fitto-Page Printing
P004
Fit-to-Page Printing
The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be
used is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set fit-to-page printing
Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size for the data
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application.
4. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When
the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
704 ‫ از‬250 ‫صفحه‬
Fit-to-Page Printing
704 ‫ از‬251 ‫صفحه‬
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
Page top
Scaled Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Scaled Printing
P005
Scaled Printing
The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set scaled printing
Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size for the data
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application.
4. Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods:
Select a Printer Paper Size
When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced.
When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
704 ‫ از‬252 ‫صفحه‬
Scaled Printing
Specify a scaling factor
Directly type in a value into the Scaling box.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale.
Important
When the application software which you created the original has the scaled printing function,
configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting
in the printer driver.
When Scaled is selected, the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable (when
Duplex Printing is not selected).
Note
704 ‫ از‬253 ‫صفحه‬
Scaled Printing
704 ‫ از‬254 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
Page top
Page Layout Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Page Layout Printing
P006
Page Layout Printing
The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of
paper.
The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set page layout printing
Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete.
4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and
click OK.
704 ‫ از‬255 ‫صفحه‬
Page Layout Printing
704 ‫ از‬256 ‫صفحه‬
Pages
To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of
pages from the list.
You can also set 2-Page Print or 4-Page Print on the Quick Setup tab.
Page Order
To change the page arrangement order, select an icon from the list to change the page placement
order.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in
the specified order.
Page top
Poster Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Poster Printing
P401
Poster Printing
The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print
these pages on separate sheets of paper. When the pages are pasted together, they form a large print
like a poster.
The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows:
Setting Poster Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set poster printing
Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
Setting 2 by 2-page poster printing is complete.
704 ‫ از‬257 ‫صفحه‬
Poster Printing
4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box, and then
click OK.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the
number of sheets used for printing increases, allowing you to create a larger poster.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Note
This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
To leave out cut lines, uncheck this check box.
Print page range
Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.
To reprint only a specific page, select Pages and enter the page number you want to print. To specify
multiple pages, enter the page numbers by separating them with commas or by entering a hyphen
between the page numbers.
Note
You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be divided into several pages during printing.
After all poster pages have been printed, paste the pages together to create a poster.
Printing Only Specific Pages
If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing, you can reprint only the specific pages by following the
procedure below:
1. Set the print range
In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab, click the pages that do not need to be
printed.
The pages that were clicked are deleted, and only the pages to be printed are displayed.
704 ‫ از‬258 ‫صفحه‬
Poster Printing
704 ‫ از‬259 ‫صفحه‬
Note
Click the deleted pages to display them again.
Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages.
2. Complete the setup
After completing the page selection, click OK.
When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed.
Important
When Poster is selected, the Duplex Printing, Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed
out and are unavailable.
Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.
Page top
Booklet Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Booklet Printing
P402
Booklet Printing
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the
paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the
printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set booklet printing
Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
4. Set the margin for stapling and the margin width
Click Specify... and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box, and then click
OK.
704 ‫ از‬260 ‫صفحه‬
Booklet Printing
704 ‫ از‬261 ‫صفحه‬
Margin for stapling
Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed.
Insert blank page
To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank.
Margin
Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width
for one page.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check the check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper. When the
printing of one side is complete, set the paper correctly by following the message and click OK.
When the printing of the other side is complete, fold the paper at the center of the margin and make
a booklet.
Important
Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on
the Main tab.
When Booklet is selected, Duplex Printing, Staple Side, Print from Last Page, and Collate appear
grayed out and are unavailable.
Note
The stamp and background are not printed on the inserted blank sheets with the Insert blank page
function of booklet printing.
Page top
Duplex Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Duplex Printing
P007
Duplex Printing
The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows:
You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set duplex printing
Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the layout
Select Normal-size (or Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout) from the Page Layout list.
4. Specify the side to be stapled
The machine analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list.
5. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
704 ‫ از‬262 ‫صفحه‬
Duplex Printing
704 ‫ از‬263 ‫صفحه‬
6. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper. After one side
is printed, reload the paper correctly according to the message.
Then click OK to print the opposite side.
Important
When a media type other than Plain Paper is selected from Media Type, Duplex Printing appears
grayed out and is unavailable.
When Borderless, Poster or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing and
Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Note
If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing, perform Bottom Plate
Cleaning in the Maintenance tab.
Related Topic
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Page top
Stamp/Background Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing
P403
Stamp/Background Printing
Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also
allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light
illustration behind the document data.
The procedure for performing stamp/background printing is as follows:
Printing a Stamp
"CONFIDENTIAL," "IMPORTANT," and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre-registered.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens.
Note
704 ‫ از‬264 ‫صفحه‬
Stamp/Background Printing
With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button
and only the stamp function can be used.
3. Select a stamp
Check the Stamp check box, and select the stamp to be used from the list.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
4. Set the stamp details
If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK.
Define Stamp... button
To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position, click this (see " Registering a Stamp ").
Place stamp over text
To print the stamp on the front of the document, check this check box.
Note
The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the
sections where the stamp and the document data overlap. When this check box is unchecked,
the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections
depending on the application used.
Place stamp over text cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used.
When the XPS printer driver is used, the stamp is normally printed in the foreground of the
document.
Print semitransparent stamp
Check this check box to print a semi-transparent stamp on the document.
This function is available only when the XPS printer driver is used.
Stamp first page only
To print the stamp only on the first page, check this check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified stamp.
Printing a Background
Two bitmap files are pre-registered as samples.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Select the background
Check the Background check box, and select the background to be used from the list.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
4. Set the background details
If necessary, complete the following settings, and then click OK.
Select Background... button
To use another background or change the layout or density of a background, click this (see "
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background ").
Background first page only
To print the background only on the first page, check this check box.
704 ‫ از‬265 ‫صفحه‬
Stamp/Background Printing
704 ‫ از‬266 ‫صفحه‬
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background.
Important
When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button appears grayed out and is
unavailable.
Note
The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page
function of booklet printing.
Related Topics
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Page top
Registering a Stamp
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing > Registering a Stamp
P404
Registering a Stamp
This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used.
You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and register some of the settings of an
existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows:
Registering a New Stamp
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens.
Note
With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button
and only the stamp function can be used.
704 ‫ از‬267 ‫صفحه‬
Registering a Stamp
3. Click Define Stamp...
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
Stamp tab
Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type.
For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary,
change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the
stamp by clicking Select Color....
For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary,
change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area.
For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are
displayed in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font, Style, Size, and
Outline. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color....
Important
Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date/Time/User Name is selected.
Placement tab
Select the stamp position from the Position list. You can also select Custom from the Position
list and specify coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window.
To change the stamp position angle, type a value in the Orientation box directly.
5. Save the stamp
Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
6. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings
1. Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed
704 ‫ از‬268 ‫صفحه‬
Registering a Stamp
704 ‫ از‬269 ‫صفحه‬
Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box, and then select the title of
the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list.
2. Click Define Stamp...
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
4. Overwrite save the stamp
Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab.
When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp
1. Click Define Stamp... in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the stamp to be deleted
Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab. Then
click Delete.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens again.
Page top
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing > Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
P405
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used.
You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and
register some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted at
any time.
The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows:
Registering New Background
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
Note
With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button
704 ‫ از‬270 ‫صفحه‬
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
and Background cannot be used.
3. Click Select Background...
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the image data to be registered to the background
Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open.
5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window
Layout Method
Select how the background image data is to be placed.
When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window.
Intensity
Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider. To lighten the background,
move the slider to the left. To darken the background, move the slider to the right. To print the
background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.
6. Save the background
Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Background list.
Changing and Registering Some Background Settings
1. Select the background for which the settings are to be changed
Check the Background check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of
the background you want to change from the Background list.
2. Click Select Background...
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
3. Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window
704 ‫ از‬271 ‫صفحه‬
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
704 ‫ از‬272 ‫صفحه‬
4. Save the background
Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different
title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Background list.
Deleting an Unnecessary Background
1. Click Select Background... in the Stamp/Background dialog box
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the background to be deleted
Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings
tab, and then click Delete.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
Page top
Printing an Envelope
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Printing an Envelope
P406
Printing an Envelope
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status
Monitor" when reading this information.
For details on how to load an envelope into the machine, refer to "Loading Paper" in the manual: Basic
Guide.
The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows:
1. Fold down the paper support
2. Load an envelope into the machine
Fold down the envelope flap.
Orient the envelope so that the address side is on top and the flap is on the left, and then load the
envelope vertically in the rear tray.
3. Open the printer driver setup window
4. Select the media type
Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
704 ‫ از‬273 ‫صفحه‬
Printing an Envelope
704 ‫ از‬274 ‫صفحه‬
5. Select the paper size
When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed, select Comm.Env. #10, DL Env., Youkei 4
105x235mm, or Youkei 6 98x190mm, and then click OK.
6. Set the orientation
To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation.
7. Select the print quality
Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
8. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope.
Important
When you execute envelope printing, guide messages are displayed.
To hide the guide messages, check the Do not show this message again. check box.
To show the guide again, click the View Printer Status... button on the Maintenance tab, and start the
Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu, and change the
setting to on.
Page top
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
704 ‫ از‬275 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
P009
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status
Monitor" when reading this information.
You can display and check the print result before printing.
The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows:
You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the preview
Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the Canon IJ Preview opens and displays the print results.
Related Topic
Canon IJ Preview
Page top
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
P010
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such
a paper size is called "custom size."
The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows:
You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Set the custom size in the application software
On your application's paper size feature, specify the custom size.
Important
When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the
height and width values, use the application software to set the values. When the application
software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly, use the
printer driver to set the values.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Select the paper size
Select Custom... for Page Size on the Page Setup tab.
The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬276 ‫صفحه‬
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
704 ‫ از‬277 ‫صفحه‬
4. Set the custom paper size
Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size.
Page top
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
704 ‫ از‬278 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Simulating an Illustration
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Page top
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
P011
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a
Halftoning Method
You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning
method.
The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the print quality
Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab, and click Set....
The Custom dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬279 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
704 ‫ از‬280 ‫صفحه‬
3. Setting the print quality and halftone expression method
Move the Quality slider to select the quality level.
Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK.
Note
Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color.
The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones.
When you select Auto, the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected
print quality. Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones.
Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image data is printed with the selected print quality level and halftoning
method.
Important
Certain quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of
Media Type.
Note
If part of an object is not printed, selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem.
Related Topics
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
P012
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows:
You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set grayscale printing
Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document is converted to grayscale data. It allows you to print the color
document in monochrome.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked, the printer driver processes image data as
sRGB data. In this case, actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data.
When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data, convert the data to sRGB data
using an application software.
704 ‫ از‬281 ‫صفحه‬
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
704 ‫ از‬282 ‫صفحه‬
Note
During Grayscale Printing, color inks may be used as well as black ink.
Page top
Specifying Color Correction
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction
P013
Specifying Color Correction
You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed.
Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed
with color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data.
When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively,
select ICM or ICC Profile Matching. When you want to use an application software to specify a printing
ICC profile, select None.
The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows:
You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following,
and click OK.
704 ‫ از‬283 ‫صفحه‬
Specifying Color Correction
704 ‫ از‬284 ‫صفحه‬
Driver Matching
By using Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction.
ICM/ICC Profile Matching
Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing.
Specify the input profile to be used.
None
The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an
individually created printing ICC profile in an application software to print data.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified color correction method.
Important
When ICM is disabled in the application software, ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the
printer may not be able to print the image data properly.
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Color Correction appears
grayed out and is unavailable.
Related Topics
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Page top
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
704 ‫ از‬285 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
P014
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones
differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.
To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing
method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose.
Color Management
Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently. Color
management (color matching) is a method that manages device-dependent "colors" as a common color
space. For Windows, a color management system called "ICM" is built into the operating system.
Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces. Adobe RGB has a wider color
space than sRGB.
ICC profiles convert device-dependent "colors" into a common color space. By using an ICC profile and
carrying out color management, you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color
reproduction area that the printer can express.
Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data
The recommended printing method depends on the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image
data or the application software to be used. There are two typical printing methods. Check the color
space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data and the application software to be used, and then select
the printing method suited to your purpose.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver.
To print using Canon Digital Photo Color
The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer, reproducing colors of the original image
data and producing three-dimensional effects and high, sharp contrasts.
To print by directly applying editing and touch-up results of an application software
When printing the data, the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas,
while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact.
When printing the data, the printer applies fine adjustment results, such as brightness adjustments
made with an application software.
Printing with ICC Profiles
Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively.
You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so
that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data.
The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used.
Page top
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
P015
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that
most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.
When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them,
use a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management.
The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
3. Select the print quality
For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Fast according to your purpose.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select Driver Matching for Color Correction.
704 ‫ از‬286 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
704 ‫ از‬287 ‫صفحه‬
6. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Printing with ICC Profiles
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Printing with ICC Profiles
P016
Printing with ICC Profiles
When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe
RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively.
The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print.
Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data
When you print the editing and touch-up results of Adobe Photoshop, Canon Digital Photo Professional,
or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles, you print by
effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data.
To use this printing method, use your application software to select color management items and
specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data.
Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself from your application software, be
sure to select color management items from your application software.
For instructions, refer to the manual of the application software you are using.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
3. Select the print quality
For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Fast according to your purpose.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬288 ‫صفحه‬
Printing with ICC Profiles
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction.
6. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print
Print from an application software that cannot identify input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one
by using the color space of the input ICC profile (sRGB) found in the data. When printing Adobe RGB
data, you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not
support Adobe RGB.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
704 ‫ از‬289 ‫صفحه‬
Printing with ICC Profiles
3. Select the print quality
For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Fast according to your purpose.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select ICM or ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction.
6. Select the input profile
Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data.
For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile:
Select Standard.
For Adobe RGB data:
704 ‫ از‬290 ‫صفحه‬
Printing with ICC Profiles
704 ‫ از‬291 ‫صفحه‬
Select Adobe RGB (1998).
Important
When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer
driver becomes invalid.
When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) will not be
displayed. You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
7. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
8. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Color Balance
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Color Balance
P017
Adjusting Color Balance
You can adjust the color tints when printing.
Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes
the total color balance of the document. Use the application software when you want to change the color
balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish
yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform.
No adjustment
Adjust color balance
The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows:
You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬292 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Color Balance
704 ‫ از‬293 ‫صفحه‬
3. Adjust color balance
There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the
corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is
moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The
current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the document is printed with the adjusted color balance.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow
appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Brightness
704 ‫ از‬294 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Brightness
P018
Adjusting Brightness
You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing.
This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate
colors.
The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed.
Light is selected
Normal is selected
Dark is selected
The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows:
You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Specify the brightness
Select Light, Normal, or Dark for Brightness, and click OK. The current settings are displayed in the
settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
Adjusting Brightness
704 ‫ از‬295 ‫صفحه‬
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Intensity
704 ‫ از‬296 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Intensity
P019
Adjusting Intensity
You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing.
The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more
intense when the image data is printed.
No adjustment
Higher intensity
The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows:
You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity on the Main tab, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust intensity
Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies (darkens) the colors. Moving the slider to the left
dilutes (brightens) the colors.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The
current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Adjusting Intensity
704 ‫ از‬297 ‫صفحه‬
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Contrast
704 ‫ از‬298 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Contrast
P020
Adjusting Contrast
You can adjust the image contrast during printing.
To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct,
increase the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of
images smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast.
No adjustment
Adjust the contrast
The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows:
You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust the contrast
Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast, and moving it to the left decreases the
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The
current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
Adjusting Contrast
704 ‫ از‬299 ‫صفحه‬
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Page top
Simulating an Illustration
704 ‫ از‬300 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Simulating an Illustration
P021
Simulating an Illustration
This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used.
With the Simulate Illustration function, you can print full-color or 256-color image data so that it looks like
a hand-drawn illustration. This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors.
The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the Simulate Illustration
If necessary, check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab, and adjust the Contrast.
Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the
image data.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed so that it looks hand-drawn.
Page top
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Representing Image Data with a Single Color
P022
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used.
With the Monochrome Effects function, you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a
photograph to a sepia tone image.
The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Monochrome Effects
Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color.
When you use Select Color, move the Color slider to specify the color you want.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with a single color.
704 ‫ از‬301 ‫صفحه‬
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
704 ‫ از‬302 ‫صفحه‬
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Monochrome Effects appears
grayed out and is unavailable.
Page top
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
704 ‫ از‬303 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
P023
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used.
The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors.
The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human
skin color natural. By using this function, you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid.
The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows:
You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Vivid Photo
Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with vivid colors.
Page top
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Smoothing Jagged Outlines
P407
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used.
The Image Optimizer function reduces the jagged outlines that are produced when photos and graphics
are enlarged with your application. It allows you to print smooth outlines. This feature is especially useful
when printing low-resolution images from Web pages.
The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set image optimizer
Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The photos and graphics will be adjusted and printed with smooth outlines.
Note
Depending on application software or resolution of image data, the image optimizer may have no
discernible effects.
704 ‫ از‬304 ‫صفحه‬
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
704 ‫ از‬305 ‫صفحه‬
It may take longer to complete printing when the image optimizer is used.
Page top
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
P408
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used.
The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images. It is
specially designed to compensate for color shift, overexposure, and underexposure.
The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Photo Optimizer PRO
Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab.
Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box.
Images within each page are optimized on an image-by-image basis.
Note
Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been
processed, such as being cropped or rotated. In this case the entire page will be treated as a
single image to be optimized.
3. Complete the setup
704 ‫ از‬306 ‫صفحه‬
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
704 ‫ از‬307 ‫صفحه‬
Click OK.
When you execute print, the printer corrects the photo coloring and prints out the photos.
Important
Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when:
Background is set in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab.
Define Stamp... is selected in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab, and the
bitmapped stamp is configured.
Note
Depending on images, the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect.
Page top
Reducing Photo Noise
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Reducing Photo Noise
P024
Reducing Photo Noise
This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used.
With the Photo Noise Reduction function, you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the
image quality of the digital print.
The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Photo Noise Reduction
Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the
level.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced.
704 ‫ از‬308 ‫صفحه‬
Reducing Photo Noise
704 ‫ از‬309 ‫صفحه‬
Note
It is recommended to select Normal for most cases. Select Strong if you have selected Normal and
the noise still bothers you.
Depending on application software or resolution of image data, effects of digital camera noise
reduction may not be obvious.
When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras, image may be distorted.
Page top
Overview of the Printer Driver
704 ‫ از‬310 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
Overview of the Printer Driver
Printer Driver Operations
Canon IJ Printer Driver
XPS Printer Driver
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Maintenance Tab
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Page top
Printer Driver Operations
704 ‫ از‬311 ‫صفحه‬
MA-6355-V1.00
| Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) | How to Use This Manual | Printing This Manual |
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing
Order
Changing Machine Settings from Your
Computer
Changing the Print Options
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
Setting the Stapling Margin
Managing the Machine Power
Execute Borderless Printing
Reducing the Machine Noise
Fit-to-Page Printing
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Print Heads
Booklet Printing
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Duplex Printing
Aligning the Print Head Position
Stamp/Background Printing
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Printing an Envelope
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Overview of the Printer Driver
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Canon IJ Printer Driver
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting
Image Data
XPS Printer Driver
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality
Level and a Halftoning Method
Maintenance Tab
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Updating the MP Drivers
Adjusting Brightness
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Adjusting Intensity
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Adjusting Contrast
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Simulating an Illustration
Installing the MP Drivers
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve
Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Appendix
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from
the Print History
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Sharing the Printer on a Network
Canon IJ Printer Driver
704 ‫ از‬312 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver
P025
Canon IJ Printer Driver
The Canon IJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this
machine.
The Canon IJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your
printer can understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.
Because different models support different print data formats, you need a Canon IJ printer driver for the
specific model you are using.
How to Use Printer Driver Help
You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of
the Canon IJ printer driver.
To view all descriptions of a tab...
Click the Help button on each tab. A dialog box opens, displaying a description of each item on the
tab.
You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked
dialog box.
To see a description for each item...
Right-click the item you want to learn about and then click What's This?.
Alternatively, when the
Help button is found at the right end of the title bar, click that button, and
then click the item you want to learn about.
A description of the item is displayed.
Related Topic
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Page top
XPS Printer Driver
704 ‫ از‬313 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > XPS Printer Driver
P416
XPS Printer Driver
The following two printer drivers can be installed on Windows Vista SP1 or later:
IJ printer driver
XPS printer driver
The XPS printer driver is suited to print from an application that supports XPS printing.
Important
To use the XPS printer driver, the standard IJ printer driver must already be installed on your
computer.
With the XPS printer driver, application software distributed with printers, such as Easy-PhotoPrint
EX and My Printer, cannot be used.
Installing the XPS Printer Driver
Load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the machine, and then select "XPS Printer Driver" from Custom
Install to install the driver.
Using the XPS Printer Driver
To use the XPS printer driver for printing, open the Print dialog box in application you are using, and
select "your printer name XPS."
Page top
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
704 ‫ از‬314 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
P409
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start
menu of the Windows.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software
Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing.
1. Select the command that you perform printing on the application software
In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box.
2. Select your model name and click Preferences (or Properties)
The printer driver setup window appears.
Note
Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary and
there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application software.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu
Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to
configure printing profile that are common for all application software.
1. Select items from the Start menu as shown below:
If you are using Windows 7, select the Start menu -> Devices and Printers.
If you are using Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound > Printers.
If you are using Windows XP, select the start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other
Hardware -> Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click your model name icon, and then select Printing Preferences from the
displayed menu
The printer driver setup window appears.
Important
Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties (Windows 7) or Properties
(Windows Vista, Windows XP) displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the
Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences
or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions, refer to the user's manual for
the Windows.
Page top
Maintenance Tab
704 ‫ از‬315 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > Maintenance Tab
P410
Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the
machine.
Features
Cleaning the Print Heads
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Aligning the Print Head Position
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
Managing the Machine Power
Related Features
Reducing the Machine Noise
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Page top
Canon IJ Status Monitor
704 ‫ از‬316 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Status Monitor
P411
Canon IJ Status Monitor
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status
Monitor" when reading this information.
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the
progress of printing on the Windows screen. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons,
and messages.
Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer. When launched, the
Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar.
Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
Note
To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the printer driver setup
window and click View Printer Status... on the Maintenance tab.
The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or
region where you are using your machine.
When Errors Occur
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs (e.g., if the printer runs out of
paper or if the ink is low).
In such cases, take the appropriate action as described.
Page top
Canon IJ Preview
704 ‫ از‬317 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Preview
P412
Canon IJ Preview
The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a
document is actually printed.
The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the
document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type settings.
When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , click the Quick
Setup tab or the Main tab, and check the Preview before printing check box.
When you do not want to display a preview before printing, uncheck the check box.
Important
If you are using the XPS printer driver, see " Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print
History."
Related Topic
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 318‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 319‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < کپی کردن‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫گرفتن کپی‬
‫کوچکنمايی يا بزرگنمايی کپی‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 320‬از ‪704‬‬
‫گرفتن کپی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < کپی کردن < گرفتن کپی‬
‫‪U031‬‬
‫گرفتن کپی‬
‫برای مراحل اصلی کپی گرفتن به کپی کردن مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کوچکنمايی يا بزرگنمايی کپی‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫کوچکنماﯾی ﯾا بزرگنماﯾی کپی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < کپی کردن < کوچکنمايی يا بزرگنمايی کپی‬
‫‪U033‬‬
‫کوچکنمايی يا بزرگنمايی کپی‬
‫عملکرد کپی تنظيم برای صفحه به شما امکان می دھد سند را به صورت خودکار و متناسب با اندازه صفحه انتخابی کپی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد اندازه کاغذ وارد شده در سينی عقب را بدون در نظر گرفتن اندازه نشان داده شده روی صفحه عمليات بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪11 × 8.5‬‬
‫اينچ )‪ (Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫‪ .1‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬کاغذ ساده را در سينی عقب بگذاريد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬اسناد اصلی را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬جھت انتخاب اندازه صفحه و نوع رسانه مطابق با کاغذ قرار داده شده در مرحله ‪ ،2‬دکمه ‪ Paper‬را مکرراً فشار‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورت انتخاب کاغذ ساده برای نوع رسانه‪ ،‬اسناد با حاشيه چاپ می شوند‪ .‬در صورت انتخاب کاغذ عکس برای نوع رسانه‪ ،‬اسناد‬
‫بدون حاشيه و تمام صفحه چاپ می شوند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫چراغ تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬روشن می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای لغو کپی تنظيم برای صفحه‪ ،‬دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬را مجدداً فشار دھيد‪ .‬ھنگام فشار دادن دکمه ‪Fit to Page‬‬
‫‪ ،‬چراغ‪ Fit to Page‬خاموش می شود و کپی تنظيم برای صفحه لغو می شود‪.‬‬
‫شما می توانيد از دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬تنھا زمانيکه از عملکرد کپی استفاده می کنيد استفاده نماييد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬تعداد کپی ھا را تعيين می کند )حداکثر ‪ 20‬نسخه(‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 1‬تا ‪ 9‬يا ‪ 20‬کپی‬
‫تعداد مورد نظر برای کپی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‪ .‬با ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه ‪ +‬عدد نمايش داده شده روی ‪ LED‬يکی بيشتر می شود‪.‬‬
‫وقتی ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نشان داده می شود‪ ،‬تعداد کپی ھا روی "‪ "20‬تنظيم خواھد شد‪ .‬برای بازگشت به "‪ ،"1‬دکمه ‪ +‬را مجدداً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 10‬تا ‪ 19‬کپی‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫دکمه ‪ +‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نشان داده شود‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫فقط تعداد مورد نظر برگه ھا برای کپی را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫با فشار دادن دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬تعداد کپی ھا به ‪ 1‬باز می گردد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬برای کپی رنگی دکمه ‪) Color‬رنگی( يا برای کپی سياه و سفيد دکمه ‪) Black‬سياه( را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه‪ ،‬کپی تنظيم برای صفحه را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 321‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 322‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کوچکنماﯾی ﯾا بزرگنماﯾی کپی‬
‫پس از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬سند اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 10‬تا ‪ 19‬کپی‬
‫ھنگامی که ھمه کاغذھای وارد شده جھت چاپ مصرف شود‪ ،‬خطای تمام شدن کاغذ نمايش داده می شود‪ .‬توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪(Stop/Reset‬‬
‫را برای از بين رفتن خطا فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا سند اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ خارج نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای لغو کپی‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای تنظيم کيفيت چاپ روی "سريع" )سرعت در اولويت(‬
‫فقط در صورت انتخاب کاغذ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬در اندازه کاغذ و نوع رسانه انتخاب شده‪ ،‬می توانيد کيفيت چاپ را روی "سريع"‬
‫تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫دکمه ‪) Color‬رنگی( يا ‪) Black‬سياه( را به مدت ‪ 2‬ثانيه يا بيشتر در مرحله ‪ 7‬فشار داده و نگه داريد‪.‬‬
‫‪ LED‬يکبار چشمک می زند‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫دکمه را رھا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه کپی را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫وقتی کيفيت چاپ روی "سريع" تنظيم شده باشد‪ ،‬سرعت چاپ بر کيفيت چاپ اولويت دارد‪ .‬برای اولويت دادن به کيفيت چاپ‪ ،‬دكمه رنگی )‬
‫‪ (Color‬يا سياه )‪ (Black‬را كمتر از ‪ 2‬ثانيه فشار دھيد‪ ،‬تا دستگاه اقدام به كپی با كيفيتی "استاندارد" نمايد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 323‬از ‪704‬‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < کپی کردن < استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی‬
‫‪U036‬‬
‫استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫اندازه صفحه وارد شده در سينی عقب را می توانيد بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫کپی بدون حاشيه‬
‫شما می توانيد تصاوير را طوری کپی کنيد که تمام صفحه را بدون حاشيه پر کنند‪.‬‬
‫کپی کردن بدون حاشيه )کپی بدون حاشيه(‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 324‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < کپی کردن < استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی < تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫‪U097‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫اندازه صفحه وارد شده در سينی عقب را می توانيد بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اين تنظيم در صورتی مفيد است که ھميشه کاغذ اندازه ‪ Letter‬را بدون توجه به اندازه کاغذ نشان داده شده روی صفحه عملکرد "‪ "A4‬در سينی عقب‬
‫قرار دھيد و يا برعکس‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬دکمه ‪) Maintenance‬مراقبت و نگھداری( را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نمايش داده شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬برای انتخاب ‪ ،A4‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬را فشار دھيد يا برای انتخاب ‪ ،Letter‬دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگامی که اندازه صفحه را به ‪ A4‬يا ‪ Letter‬تغيير می دھيد‪ ،‬کاغذ مورد نظر را با اندازه انتخاب شده بدون توجه به اندازه نشان داده شده‬
‫روی صفحه عمليات در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که اندازه صفحه روی ‪ A4‬تنظيم شده است؛ کاغذ ساده ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ عکس را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که اندازه صفحه روی ‪ Letter‬تنظيم شده است؛ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ Letter‬يا کاغذ عکس را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اين تنظيمات حتی در صورت خاموش کردن دستگاه نيز حفظ می شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫کپی کردن بدون حاشيه )کپی بدون حاشيه(‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < چاپ با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < کپی کردن < استفاده از عملکردھای مفيد کپی < کپی کردن بدون حاشيه )کپی بدون حاشيه(‬
‫‪U039‬‬
‫کپی کردن بدون حاشيه )کپی بدون حاشيه(‬
‫شما می توانيد تصاوير را طوری روی کاغذ عکس کپی کنيد که تمام صفحه را بدون حاشيه پر کنند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬کاغذ عکس را در سينی عقب بگذاريد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬دکمه ‪ Paper‬را برای انتخاب اندازه صفحه فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اندازه صفحه را مطابق با کاغذ قرار داده شده در سينی عقب انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اندازه صفحه وارد شده در سينی عقب را می توانيد بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪ Letter‬تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫تغيير اندازه صفحه بين اندازه ھای ‪ A4‬و ‪Letter‬‬
‫زمانيکه اندازه صفحه برای کاغذ ساده انتخاب شده است‪ ،‬کپی بدون حاشيه در دسترس نيست‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫چراغ تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬روشن می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای لغو کپی بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬را مجدداً فشار دھيد‪ .‬ھنگام فشار دادن دکمه ‪، Fit to Page‬‬
‫چراغ‪ Fit to Page‬خاموش می شود و کپی بدون حاشيه لغو می شود‪.‬‬
‫شما می توانيد از دکمه تنظيم برای صفحه )‪ (Fit to Page‬تنھا زمانيکه از عملکرد کپی استفاده می کنيد استفاده نماييد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬تعداد کپی ھا را تعيين می کند )حداکثر ‪ 20‬نسخه(‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 1‬تا ‪ 9‬يا ‪ 20‬کپی‬
‫تعداد مورد نظر برای کپی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‪ .‬با ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه ‪ +‬عدد نمايش داده شده روی ‪ LED‬يکی بيشتر می شود‪.‬‬
‫وقتی ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نشان داده می شود‪ ،‬تعداد کپی ھا روی "‪ "20‬تنظيم خواھد شد‪ .‬برای بازگشت به "‪ ،"1‬دکمه ‪ +‬را مجدداً فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 10‬تا ‪ 19‬کپی‬
‫‪ .1‬دکمه ‪ +‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نشان داده شود‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫فقط تعداد مورد نظر برگه ھا برای کپی را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫با فشار دادن دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬تعداد کپی ھا به ‪ 1‬باز می گردد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬برای کپی رنگی دکمه ‪) Color‬رنگ( يا برای کپی سياه و سفيد دکمه ‪) Black‬سياه( را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 325‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 326‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی کردن بدون حاشيه )کپی بدون حاشيه(‬
‫دستگاه کپی بدون حاشيه را شروع می کند‪.‬‬
‫پس از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬سند اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای ايجاد ‪ 10‬تا ‪ 19‬کپی‬
‫ھنگامی که ھمه کاغذھای وارد شده جھت چاپ مصرف شود‪ ،‬خطای تمام شدن کاغذ نمايش داده می شود‪ .‬توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪(Stop/Reset‬‬
‫را برای از بين رفتن خطا فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از اتمام کپی‪ ،‬درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا سند اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ خارج نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ممکن است قسمتی از لبه ھا حذف شوند تا اندازه تصوير کپی شده برای قرار گرفتن در تمام صفحه بزرگ شوند‪.‬‬
‫برای لغو کپی‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 327‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن‬
‫اسکن کردن‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫ساير روش ھای اسکن‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 328‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوﯾر‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫قبل از اسکن‬
‫قرار دادن اسناد‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 329‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوﯾر‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن کردن تصاوير < اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫‪U046‬‬
‫اسکن کردن تصاوير‬
‫می توانيد از دستگاه تصاوير را اسکن کنيد و آنھا را به آسانی در رايانه ذخيره کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عالوه بر اين‪ ،‬می توانيد از يک رايانه با استفاده از نرم افزار کاربردی تصاوير را با تنظيمات پيشرفته اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫با در نظر گرفتن ھدف خود‪ ،‬روش اسکن را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به رايانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 330‬از ‪704‬‬
‫قبل از اسکن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن کردن تصاوير < قبل از اسکن‬
‫‪U047‬‬
‫قبل از اسکن‬
‫مطمئن شويد سند اصلی که بايد اسکن شود شرايط الزم يک سند برای قرار گرفتن بر روی صفحه شيشه ای را دارد‪.‬‬
‫برای شرايط الزم و نحوه قرار دادن سند اصلی روی صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ به قرار دادن اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Placing Documents
704 ‫ از‬331 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Documents
S005
Placing Documents
Learn how to place documents on the machine's Platen. Place documents correctly according to the type
of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly.
Important
Do not place objects on the Document Cover. The objects may fall into the machine when the
Document Cover is opened. This may damage the machine.
Close the Document Cover when scanning.
Placing Documents
Place documents as described below to allow the machine to detect the document type or size
automatically.
Important
When scanning by specifying the document size in MP Navigator EX or ScanGear (scanner driver),
align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Photos that have been cut to various shapes and documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm)
square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.
Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly.
For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards or BD/
For Magazines, Newspapers or Text Documents
DVD/CD
Placing a Single Document
Place the document face-down on the Platen, with
0.39 inches (1 cm) or more space between the
edges (diagonally striped area) of the Platen and
the document. Portions placed on the diagonally
striped area cannot be scanned.
Place the document face-down on the Platen and
align an upper corner of the document with the
corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Portions placed on the diagonally striped area
cannot be scanned.
Important
Important
Large documents (such as A4 size photos)
The portion within 0.039 inches (1 mm)
inwards from the alignment mark cannot be
Placing Documents
that cannot be placed away from the edges/
arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be
saved as PDF files. To save in a format other
than PDF, scan by specifying the file format.
704 ‫ از‬332 ‫صفحه‬
scanned.
0.039 inches (1 mm)
Placing Multiple Documents
Allow 0.39 inches (1 cm) or more space between
the edges (diagonally striped area) of the Platen
and documents, and between documents.
Portions placed on the diagonally striped area
cannot be scanned.
more than 0.39 inches (1 cm)
Note
You can place up to 12 documents.
Positions of slanted documents (10 degrees
or less) are corrected automatically.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 333‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به رايانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫ضميمه‪ :‬تنظيمات مختلف اسکن‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به راﯾانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه < انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به رايانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫‪U051‬‬
‫انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به رايانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫می توانيد با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‪ ،‬داده اسکن شده را به رايانه ھدايت کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه نوع اسناد قرار داده شده روی صفحه شيشه ای را به صورت خودکار شناسايی کرده و تصوير با وضوح و اندازه بھينه شده به رايانه انتقال داده‬
‫می شود‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫اسناد را درست مطابق با نوع آنھا قرار دھيد؛ در غير اينصورت‪ ،‬برخی اسناد ممکن است درست اسکن نشوند‪.‬‬
‫برای کسب آگاھی در مورد نحوه قرار دادن سند اصلی در صفحه شيشه ای به قرار دادن اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫موارد زير را می توانيد اسکن کنيد‪:‬‬
‫عکس‪ ،‬کارت پستال‪ ،‬کارت ويزيت‪ ،‬مجله‪ ،‬روزنامه‪ ،‬سند‪BD/DVD/CD ،‬‬
‫موارد زير را نمی توانيد درست اسکن کنيد‪:‬‬
‫عکس ھای با اندازه ‪A4‬‬
‫اسناد کوچکتر از‪ 127‬ميلی متر × ‪ 178‬ميلی متر )‪ 5‬اينچ × ‪ 7‬اينچ( مانند يک کتاب جلد نازک که عطف آن جدا شده باشد‬
‫اسناد اصلی روی کاغذ سفيد نازک‬
‫اسناد دراز و نازک مانند عکسھای تمام نما‬
‫قبل از ھدايت داده اسکن شده به رايانه‪ ،‬موارد زير را تأييد کنيد‪:‬‬
‫برنامه نرم افزاری مورد نياز )‪ MP Drivers‬و ‪ (MP Navigator EX‬نصب شده است‪.‬‬
‫اگر برنامه نرم افزاری )‪ MP Drivers‬و ‪ (Navigator EX‬ھنوز نصب نشده است‪ ،‬برای نصب ﺳﯽ دی راه اﻧداز )‪(Setup CD-ROM‬‬
‫را در درايو ديسک رايانه قرار داده و سپس ‪ Custom Install‬را اجرا کرده و ‪ MP Drivers‬و ‪ MP Navigator EX‬را انتخاب نماييد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه به درستی به رايانه وصل شده است‪.‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که دستگاه به درستی به رايانه وصل شده است‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام اسکن کردن تصاوير با دستگاه‪ ،‬يا ھنگامی که رايانه در حالت خواب يا آماده به کار قرار دارد‪ ،‬کابل ‪ USB‬را از پريز جدا نکرده يا به‬
‫پريز نزنيد‪.‬‬
‫مقصد و نام فايل در ‪ MP Navigator EX‬تعيين شده است‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد مقصد و نام فايل را در ‪ MP Navigator EX‬تعيين کنيد‪ .‬برای به دست آوردن جزئيات چگونگی انجام تنظيمات يا تنظيمات ابتدايی‪،‬‬
‫به زبانه‪) Scanner Button Settings‬ذخيره در رايانه( مراجعه کنيد ‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام اسکن کردن با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‪ ،‬نوع اسناد به صورت خودکار شناسايی می شود و تنظيمات در اندازه و وضوح سند‬
‫به طور خودکار انجام می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬اسناد اصلی را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای کسب آگاھی در مورد نحوه قرار دادن سند اصلی در صفحه شيشه ای به قرار دادن اسناد مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬دکمه اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اسکن شروع می شود و تصاوير طبق تنظيمات مشخص شده در ‪ MP Navigator EX‬به رايانه انتقال داده خواھند شد‪.‬‬
‫پس از اتمام اسکن‪ ،‬سند اصلی را از روی صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬تعيين ‪MP Navigator EX 4.0‬‬
‫در صورت استفاده از ‪ Windows 7‬يا ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫صفحه انتخاب برنامه ممکن است بعد از فشار دادن دکمه اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬نمايش داده شود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪ MP Navigator EX Ver4.0 ،‬را‬
‫صفحه ‪ 334‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 335‬از ‪704‬‬
‫انتقال داده ھای اسکن شده به راﯾانه با استفاده از صفحه عمليات دستگاه‬
‫انتخاب کرده و روی ‪ OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد ‪ MP Navigator EX‬را تنظيم کنيد تا در ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬راه اندازی شود‪ .‬برای جزئيات‪ ،‬به برای‬
‫کاربران ‪ Windows‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورت استفاده از ‪:Windows XP‬‬
‫صفحه انتخاب برنامه ممکن است بعد از فشار دادن اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬برای اولين بار نمايش داده شود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪MP Navigator EX ،‬‬
‫‪ Ver4.0‬را به عنوان برنامه نرم افزاری مورد استفاده قرار دھيد‪ Always use this program for this action ،‬را انتخاب کنيد‪،‬‬
‫سپس روی ‪ OK‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬از دفعه بعد‪ MP Navigator EX ،‬به طور خودکار راه اندازی می شود‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫بسته به نوع سند اصلی محل و اندازه آن به درستی اسکن نمی شود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪ ،‬به اسکن کردن عکس ھا و اسناد مراجعه کنيد تا‬
‫تنظيمات را در ‪ Document Type‬و ‪ Document Size‬از ‪ MP Navigator EX‬تغيير دھيد تا مطابق سند اصلی باشد و با‬
‫استفاده از ‪ MP Navigator EX‬آن را اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر می خواھيد اسناد اصلی را با استفاده از تنظيمات پيشرفته اسکن کنيد‪ ،‬يا اگر می خواھيد تصاوير اسکن شده را ويرايش يا چاپ‬
‫کنيد‪:‬‬
‫اگر با استفاده از رايانه و کمک ‪ MP Navigator EX‬اسناد را اسکن کنيد‪ MP Navigator EX ،‬شما را قادر می سازد تصاوير اسکن‬
‫شده را ويرايش کنيد‪ ،‬مثالً بھينه سازی و برش دھيد‪.‬‬
‫عالوه بر اين‪ ،‬می توانيد تصاوير اسکن شده را با استفاده از برنامه عرضه شده ويرايش يا چاپ کنيد تا از آنھا بھتر استفاده نماييد‪.‬‬
‫اسکن کنيد‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد از نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی سازگار با ‪) WIA‬فقط ‪ (Windows XP‬و صفحه کنترل برای اسکن اسناد با اين دستگاه‬
‫استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫جھت کسب اطالعات بيشتر به ساير روش ھای اسکن مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر می خواھيد يک سند اسکن شده را به متن تبديل کنيد‪ ،‬به ويرايش فايل ھا مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
704 ‫ از‬336 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan
Settings
S010
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Page top
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan
Settings > Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
S007
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel
Using MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX enables you to specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
1. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box opens.
Note
The Preferences dialog box can also be opened by clicking Preferences in the One-click Mode
screen.
3. On the Scanner Button Settings tab, specify Actions.
704 ‫ از‬337 ‫صفحه‬
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Note
See the section below for details.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
4. Click OK.
The operation will be performed according to the settings when you start scanning using the
Operation Panel of the machine.
Page top
704 ‫ از‬338 ‫صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 339‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ارائه شده‬
‫‪) MP Navigator EX‬نرم افزار ارائه شده اسکنر( چيست؟‬
‫اسکن کنيد‬
‫عملكردھای مفيد ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫استفاده از تصاوير در ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫صفحه ھای ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫ضميمه‪ :‬باز کردن فايل ھای غير از تصاوير اسکن شده‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied
Scanner Software)?
S101
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable
even for beginners.
Important
MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the
computer.
Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly.
What You Can Do with This Software
This software allows you to scan multiple documents at one time, or scan images larger than the Platen.
You can also save scanned images, attach them to e-mail or print them using the supplied applications.
Screens
There are two types of MP Navigator EX Main Menu: Navigation Mode screen and One-click Mode screen.
Navigation Mode Screen
You can start various tasks from the Navigation Mode screen, including simple scanning, scanning
using ScanGear (scanner driver), and enhancing/correcting images.
One-click Mode Screen
You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in
the One-click Mode screen.
704 ‫ از‬340 ‫صفحه‬
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
704 ‫ از‬341 ‫صفحه‬
Scan/Import Window
Use the Scan/Import window to scan photos and documents.
View & Use Window
Use the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images.
Note
See "File Formats " for data formats (extensions) supported by MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Let's Try Scanning
704 ‫ از‬342 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning
S100
Let's Try Scanning
Try scanning using MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
Scanning with a simple operation
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
Scanning documents, photos, magazines, etc. from the Platen
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scanning two or more photos (small documents) at one time
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Scanning images larger than the Platen
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Scanning easily according to purpose (scan and save, attach to e-mail, etc.)
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Starting MP Navigator EX
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Starting MP
Navigator EX
S111
Starting MP Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 4.0 >
MP Navigator EX 4.0.
MP Navigator EX starts.
Starting One-click Mode
1. Click
(Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the screen.
The One-click Mode screen appears.
704 ‫ از‬343 ‫صفحه‬
Starting MP Navigator EX
704 ‫ از‬344 ‫صفحه‬
Note
Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open
the Navigation Mode screen at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen
appears at startup.
Page top
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning
with Auto Scan
S108
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
Scan documents easily by automatically detecting the document type.
Important
Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and BD/DVD/CD. To scan other documents, specify the document type.
Scanning Photos and Documents
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
3. In Scan/Import, click Auto Scan.
4. Click Specify... as required.
Set the preferences if you want to apply suitable corrections based on the document type.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan)
5. Click Scan.
704 ‫ از‬345 ‫صفحه‬
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
A message about placing documents appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Click OK to start scanning.
Note
Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
6. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in " Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. You can also select images by dragging and
dropping them into the Selected Images area.
704 ‫ از‬346 ‫صفحه‬
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
704 ‫ از‬347 ‫صفحه‬
7. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Scanning Photos and Documents
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Photos
and Documents
S102
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
3. In Scan/Import, click Photos/Documents (Platen).
4. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
704 ‫ از‬348 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Photos and Documents
Note
When you select Magazine(Color), the descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes
longer than usual. To disable the descreen function, deselect the Descreen checkbox in the
Scan Settings dialog box.
Select Text(OCR) to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP
Navigator EX.
Color scanning is not available for Text(OCR). To scan in color, open the OCR dialog box from
the One-click Mode screen and scan with Color Mode set to Color.
5. Click Specify... to set the document size and scanning resolution as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Important
When scanning a large document (such as an A4 size photo), align its corner with the corner at
the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen and specify the document size in the Scan Settings
dialog box.
6. Click Scan.
Starts scanning.
Note
Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
704 ‫ از‬349 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Photos and Documents
704 ‫ از‬350 ‫صفحه‬
7. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. You can also select images by dragging and
dropping them into the Selected Images area.
8. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning
Multiple Documents at One Time
S105
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) at one time by setting Document Size to Auto
Detect (Multiple Documents) in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, start ScanGear
(scanner driver), then adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan
again.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
3. In Scan/Import, click Photos/Documents (Platen).
4. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
704 ‫ از‬351 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
5. Click Specify....
Select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) for Document Size.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
6. Click Scan.
704 ‫ از‬352 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Multiple documents are scanned at one time.
Note
Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
7. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. You can also select images by dragging and
dropping them into the Selected Images area.
8. Save the scanned images.
Saving
704 ‫ از‬353 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
704 ‫ از‬354 ‫صفحه‬
Saving as PDF Files
Note
If you want to preview the images before scanning, use ScanGear.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Images
Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
S106
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the
scanned images back into one image. You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the
Platen.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Note
You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the
corresponding icon in the One-click Mode screen. Stitch Assist is available from the One-click
Mode screen as well, by changing the document size. Click the corresponding icon and select
Stitch Assist for Document Size. Then skip ahead to Step 5.
2. In Scan/Import, click Photos/Documents (Platen).
3. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
704 ‫ از‬355 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
4. Click Specify....
Select Stitch Assist for Document Size, then specify the scanning resolution as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
5. Click Scan.
704 ‫ از‬356 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
The Stitch-assist window opens.
6. Place the left half of the document face-down on the Platen.
7. Click Scan.
The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch-assist window.
Note
Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
704 ‫ از‬357 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
8. Place the right half of the document face-down on the Platen.
9. Click Scan.
The right half of the document is scanned.
Note
Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
10. Adjust the scanned image as required.
Use the icons to swap the left and right halves, rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge/reduce the
image.
(Swap Left & Right)
Swaps the left and right halves.
Important
This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
Rotate 180°
Rotates right half of the image 180 degrees.
704 ‫ از‬358 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Important
This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the displayed image.
(Reduce)
Reduces the displayed image.
(Full-screen)
Displays the entire image.
Note
Enlarge/Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image.
When the document is scanned upside down, the image displayed in the Stitch-assist window
will also be upside down. Click Rotate 180° to rotate the image to the correct orientation.
You can drag the right half of the image from right to left or up and down to adjust the position.
If the left and right halves do not match due to a slanted document, place the document
correctly and click Back, then scan again.
11. Click Next.
12. Drag the mouse to specify the area to be saved, then click OK.
The combined image is created.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
704 ‫ از‬359 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
704 ‫ از‬360 ‫صفحه‬
13. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Easy Scanning with One-click
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning
with One-click
S104
Easy Scanning with One-click
You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One-click Mode screen appears.
Navigation Mode Screen
One-click Mode Screen
Note
Skip ahead to Step 4 if One-click Mode screen is open.
3. Click One-click.
704 ‫ از‬361 ‫صفحه‬
Easy Scanning with One-click
704 ‫ از‬362 ‫صفحه‬
4. Click the corresponding icon.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
One-click Mode Screen
5. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
6. Set the document size and scanning resolution as required.
7. Start scanning.
Starts scanning.
Note
Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Page top
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
704 ‫ از‬363 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
S400
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
With MP Navigator EX, you can correct/enhance scanned images beautifully, and search saved images
quickly.
Correcting/enhancing images automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/enhancing images manually
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Adjusting color characteristics such as brightness and contrast
Adjusting Images
Searching for lost images
Searching Images
Classifying and sorting images
Classifying Images into Categories
Page top
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
S401
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct/enhance scanned images automatically.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/
enhance.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
704 ‫ از‬364 ‫صفحه‬
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Make sure that Auto is selected.
5. Click Auto Photo Fix, Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing.
Important
Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto
Photo Fix. Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital
camera, etc. manufactured by other companies.
Note
The Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider
that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
When you apply Auto Photo Fix, dark backlit photos will be corrected automatically. If the image
is not corrected enough using Auto Photo Fix, it is recommended that you apply Face
Brightener on the Manual tab.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
704 ‫ از‬365 ‫صفحه‬
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
704 ‫ از‬366 ‫صفحه‬
6. Click OK.
The entire image is corrected/enhanced automatically and
the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image.
(Correct/Enhance) mark appears on
Note
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction/enhancement.
Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct/enhance all selected images.
7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif.
Adobe RGB images are saved as sRGB images.
8. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced
images.
Page top
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
S402
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
You can correct/enhance scanned images manually.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/
enhance.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
704 ‫ از‬367 ‫صفحه‬
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Select Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
5. Click Face Brightener, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish
Remover.
Note
The Face Brightener, Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be
changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
6. Drag to select the area you want to correct/enhance, then click OK that appears
over the image.
704 ‫ از‬368 ‫صفحه‬
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
The portion in and around the selected area is corrected/enhanced and
appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image.
704 ‫ از‬369 ‫صفحه‬
(Correct/Enhance) mark
Note
You can also drag to rotate the rectangle.
Click Undo to undo the latest correction/enhancement.
Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied
to the selected image.
7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif.
8. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced
images.
Page top
Adjusting Images
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Adjusting Images
S406
Adjusting Images
You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
704 ‫ از‬370 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Images
704 ‫ از‬371 ‫صفحه‬
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Select Manual, then click Adjust.
5. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level.
When you move a slider,
preview image.
(Correct/Enhance) mark appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and
Note
Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone. See "
Advanced " in the descriptions of the Correct/Enhance Images window for details.
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied
to the selected image.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save adjusted images as new files.
Note
Adjusting Images
704 ‫ از‬372 ‫صفحه‬
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of adjusted images is JPEG/Exif.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Page top
Searching Images
704 ‫ از‬373 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Searching Images
S407
Searching Images
In the View & Use window of the Navigation Mode screen, you can search images saved on your
computer and open them in MP Navigator EX. Opened images can be printed, edited, etc.
Note
Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder
and its subfolders.
See "Starting MP Navigator EX" to start MP Navigator EX.
Quick Search
In
(Text box) on the Toolbar, enter a word or phrase included in the file
name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for, then click
information, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched.
(Search). For Exif
Advanced Search
Click Search on the left of the screen to open search options. Enter information of the image you want to
search for, then click Start Search.
Searching Images
Search in
If you know where to look for, select the drive, folder or network from Specify Folder.
File Name
If you know the file name, enter it.
A word or phrase in the file
Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options.
Important
For PDF files, you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot search
PDF files created or edited in other applications. Also, searching PDF files is available only
when keyword search is set.
For details of creating PDF files that enables keyword search, see " PDF Settings Dialog Box ."
Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched.
Category
You can search for images by category.
Modified Date
To search for images that have been updated in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates
of the period.
Shooting Date
To search for images captured in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates of the period.
Note
"Shooting date" is the date and time of data creation, which are included in the image's Exif
information.
More Advanced Options
A word or phrase in the file
In A word or phrase in the file, select the items to search. If you select the Exif information
704 ‫ از‬374 ‫صفحه‬
Searching Images
704 ‫ از‬375 ‫صفحه‬
checkbox, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. If you select the
PDF text checkbox, text in PDF files is searched.
Important
Text in password-protected PDF files cannot be searched.
Search subfolders
Select this checkbox to search subfolders.
Case sensitive
Select this checkbox to match case.
Match all criteria
Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria.
Match any criteria
Searches for files that meet any of the specified criteria.
Start Search
Starts search.
Related Topic
View & Use Window
Page top
Classifying Images into Categories
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Classifying Images into Categories
S403
Classifying Images into Categories
Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category. You can classify images displayed in
Unclassified automatically, and also create custom categories. You can drag and drop an image to
move it from one category to another.
Note
If you have classified the images in MP Navigator EX 2.0 or later and then upgrade MP Navigator EX
to the latest version, the classification information on the second latest version is transferred upon
initial startup. After the initial startup, the classification information cannot be transferred.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2.
In
(Sort by), select Categories.
Images are automatically sorted by category and appear in the Thumbnail window.
Images are sorted into the following categories.
Photos: Portrait, Others
704 ‫ از‬376 ‫صفحه‬
Classifying Images into Categories
Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others
Custom categories: Displays your custom categories.
To create custom categories, see " Creating Custom Categories ."
Unclassified: Displays images that are not classified.
Note
Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically. Click Cancel
to stop.
Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Important
Even if you classify images saved in removable media such as USB flash drive and external hard
disk, the classification information will be deleted once you remove the media. From the next time,
the images are classified to Unclassified.
Images cannot be classified when Recently Saved Images is selected in the View & Use window.
Note
Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories. In
that case, drag and drop the image to the correct category.
Images saved in network folders may not be classified.
You can search for images by category. See " Searching Images " for details.
Creating Custom Categories
1. In the View & Use window, sort images by category and click Edit Custom
Categories.
The Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens.
2. Click Add to List.
The Add Category dialog box opens.
3. Enter Category name and click OK.
Note
You can create up to 20 custom categories.
Up to 50 single-byte characters can be used for a category name.
Double-click a created category to open the Change Category Name dialog box in which you can
change the category name.
Select a custom category and click Delete to delete it.
Related Topic
704 ‫ از‬377 ‫صفحه‬
Classifying Images into Categories
704 ‫ از‬378 ‫صفحه‬
View & Use Window
Page top
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
704 ‫ از‬379 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
S500
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images.
See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images.
Saving scanned images to computer
Saving
Saving scanned image as PDF Files
Saving as PDF Files
See the corresponding sections below for details on using images/files.
Creating/editing PDF files from scanned images
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing multiple scanned images at one time or printing at specific size, quality, etc.
Printing Documents
Printing scanned photos
Printing Photos
Sending scanned images via e-mail
Sending via E-mail
Correcting/enhancing scanned images or converting them to text
Editing Files
Setting passwords for created PDF files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page top
Saving
704 ‫ از‬380 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Saving
S112
Saving
Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer.
1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save.
2. In the Save dialog box, specify the save settings.
Specify the destination folder, file name and file type.
Save Dialog Box
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Black and White is selected for Color Mode on the Advanced
Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver).
Note
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Saving
704 ‫ از‬381 ‫صفحه‬
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
3. Click Save.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save
Complete dialog box.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Saving as PDF Files
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Saving as PDF Files
S113
Saving as PDF Files
Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files.
1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save as PDF file.
2. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, specify the save settings.
Specify the file type, file name and destination folder.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬382 ‫صفحه‬
Saving as PDF Files
704 ‫ از‬383 ‫صفحه‬
Note
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
You can set passwords for PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
3. Click Save.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save
Complete dialog box.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Creating/Editing PDF Files
S501
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Create/edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View
& Use window to create PDF files and add/delete pages, rearrange the page order, etc.
Important
You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Creating/Editing PDF Files with MP Navigator EX
1. Select images and click PDF.
Note
You can select PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files.
2. Click Create/Edit PDF file on the list.
Important
For PDF files, you can only edit those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot edit PDF files
created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be edited as well.
Note
704 ‫ از‬384 ‫صفحه‬
Creating/Editing PDF Files
If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
3. Add/delete pages as required.
To add an existing file, click Add Page and select the file. To delete a page, select it and click Delete
Selected Pages.
Note
You can add PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files.
When adding a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password.
4. Rearrange the page order as required.
Use the icons to rearrange the order. Alternatively, drag the thumbnail to the target location.
Note
See " Create/Edit PDF file Window " for details on the Create/Edit PDF file window.
5. Click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal
directions.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
6. Specify the save settings in the Save as PDF file dialog box, then click Save.
Images are saved according to the settings.
Opening PDF Files in an Application
You can open PDF files created with MP Navigator EX in an associated application and edit or print them.
1. Select PDF files and click PDF.
Important
For PDF files, you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot select PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected
704 ‫ از‬385 ‫صفحه‬
Creating/Editing PDF Files
704 ‫ از‬386 ‫صفحه‬
as well.
2. Click Open PDF file on the list.
The application associated with the file extension (.pdf) by the operating system starts.
Important
Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed.
3. Use the application to edit/print the file.
For details, refer to the application's manual.
Important
In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password
may differ from those in MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Printing Documents
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Printing Documents
S502
Printing Documents
You can print multiple scanned images at one time, print at specific quality, etc. using MP Navigator EX.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Print, then click Print Document on the list.
Important
If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
3. Specify print settings as required.
In the displayed dialog box, specify print count, quality, scale, etc.
Print Document Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬387 ‫صفحه‬
Printing Documents
704 ‫ از‬388 ‫صفحه‬
Important
At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In
that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size.
4. Click Print.
Starts printing.
Note
When printing a multiple-page PDF file via Print Document, printing may take time depending
on your computer. In that case, follow these steps and change settings.
Windows 7:
1. From the Start menu, select Devices and Printers.
2. Right-click the icon of your printer and click Printer Properties.
The printer properties dialog box opens.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.
5. Select Start printing after last page is spooled.
6. After printing, return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately.
Windows Vista/Windows XP:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Click Printer (Windows XP: Printers and Faxes).
3. Right-click the icon of your printer and click Properties.
The printer properties dialog box opens.
4. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.
6. Select Start printing after last page is spooled.
7. After printing, return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately.
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Printing Photos
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Printing Photos
S503
Printing Photos
You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After
scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select how you want to print the
photos.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
When Printing Photos Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Easy-PhotoPrint EX enables you to print scanned photos at high quality or to layout and print images.
1. Select images and click Print.
2. Click Print Photo or Print Album on the list.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts. See " Printing with the Bundled Application Software " for details.
Note
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, print with MP Navigator EX.
When Printing Photos Using MP Navigator EX
1. Select images and click Print.
704 ‫ از‬389 ‫صفحه‬
Printing Photos
704 ‫ از‬390 ‫صفحه‬
2. Click Print Photo on the list.
3. Specify print settings as required.
In the displayed dialog box, specify paper size, print count, etc.
Print Photo Dialog Box
4. Click Print.
Starts printing.
Note
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Sending via E-mail
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Sending via E-mail
S504
Sending via E-mail
Send scanned images via e-mail.
Important
MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs:
- Microsoft Outlook
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP)
(If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.)
Note
If an e-mail software program is not selected, manually attach the scanned and saved image to e-
mail.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Note
Only PDF and JPEG files can be attached to e-mail.
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Send, then click Attach to E-mail on the list.
3. Set the e-mail software program and file save options as required.
704 ‫ از‬391 ‫صفحه‬
Sending via E-mail
704 ‫ از‬392 ‫صفحه‬
Specify the e-mail software program, destination folder and file name.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Note
You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e-mail. Click Set... to open
a dialog box and select a compression type from High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
4. Click OK.
Files are saved according to the settings, and the e-mail software program starts.
5. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail.
For details, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Page top
Editing Files
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Editing Files
S505
Editing Files
You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies
the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select what
you want to do with the images.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a computer.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Correcting Photo Images
You can correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
1. Select images and click Edit/Convert.
2. Click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
3. Correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Note
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
See the corresponding sections below for correcting/enhancing images.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
704 ‫ از‬393 ‫صفحه‬
Editing Files
704 ‫ از‬394 ‫صفحه‬
Converting Documents to Text
Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
Important
PDF files cannot be converted to text.
1. Select images and click Edit/Convert.
2. Click Convert to text file on the list.
Notepad (included with Windows) starts and editable text appears.
Note
Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to
Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language
according to the language of the document to be scanned.
When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file.
General Tab
Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of
the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
- Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
- Slanted documents
- Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with narrow line spacing
- Documents with colors in the background of text
- Documents containing multiple languages
Page top
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
S508
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set passwords for opening, editing and printing PDF files.
You can set two passwords: one for opening the file and one for editing/printing it.
This section explains how to set passwords for images scanned into the Scan/Import window of MP
Navigator EX and how to set passwords for existing files via the View & Use window.
Important
You will not be able to open/edit the file if you forget the password. Record your passwords in a safe
place for future reference.
Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password may
differ from those in MP Navigator EX.
Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched by text from the " View & Use Window ."
Passwords cannot be set when images are automatically saved after scanning.
1. Open the password setting screen from images scanned into MP Navigator EX or
existing files.
Setting Passwords for Scanned Images
1. Scan documents into the Scan/Import window.
Let's Try Scanning
2. Click Save as PDF file.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
3. Select the Password security settings checkbox.
704 ‫ از‬395 ‫صفحه‬
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens.
Setting Passwords for Existing Files
1. In the View & Use window, select image/PDF files and click PDF.
2. Click Create/Edit PDF file on the list.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
3. Edit files in the Create/Edit PDF file window, then click Save Selected Pages or
Save All Pages.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
4. Select the Password security settings checkbox.
The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens.
Note
You can also open the Password Security -Settings dialog box by clicking Set..., then selecting
Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box.
2. Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict
printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox, then enter a
password.
704 ‫ از‬396 ‫صفحه‬
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Important
Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password. Passwords are
case sensitive.
Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password.
You cannot use the same password for both.
3. Click OK.
The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens.
Document Open Password
Permissions Password
4. Re-enter the password and click OK.
The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
Important
If you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save, the settings in the Password
Security -Settings dialog box will be deleted.
Passwords are deleted once the file is edited. Reset the passwords when saving edited files.
Note
If you set the passwords via the PDF Settings dialog box, the PDF Settings dialog box returns.
Click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
5. Click Save.
Files are saved according to the settings.
704 ‫ از‬397 ‫صفحه‬
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
704 ‫ از‬398 ‫صفحه‬
Related Topic
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page top
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
704 ‫ از‬399 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
S509
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Enter a password to open or edit/print password-protected PDF files.
Password entry method varies by operation. The following procedures are examples only.
Important
You can open, edit or print only PDF files whose passwords were set with MP Navigator EX. You
cannot edit PDF files edited in other applications or whose passwords were set with other
applications. Only MP Navigator EX version 1.1 and 2.0 or later supports opening, editing and
printing password-protected PDF files.
Passwords are case sensitive.
You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX.
Entering a Password to Open a File
1. In the View & Use window, select the PDF file you want to open and click
Zoom
in.
Alternatively, double-click the PDF file.
Note
Only the Document Open Password will be required. The Permissions Password will not be
required.
If the Zoom in dialog box with a lock icon opens, click Enter Password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
2. The Password dialog box opens. Enter the password and click OK.
The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box.
Note
To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box, re-enter the password.
Entering a Password (Permissions Password) to Edit or Print a File
1. In the View & Use window, select PDF files and click PDF or Print.
704 ‫ از‬400 ‫صفحه‬
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
704 ‫ از‬401 ‫صفحه‬
2. To create a PDF file or edit the file, select Create/Edit PDF file on the list. To print
the file, click Print Document.
In the Password dialog box, you will be prompted to enter a password.
Note
If the Document Open Password is set as well, the Document Open Password will be
required, then the Permissions Password will be required.
3. Enter the password and click OK.
The corresponding dialog box opens.
Important
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Related Topic
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
MP Navigator EX Screens
704 ‫ از‬402 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens
S700
MP Navigator EX Screens
Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan)
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
View & Use Window
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Print Document Dialog Box
Print Photo Dialog Box
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Custom Scan with One-click Tab / One-click Mode Screen
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
PDF Dialog Box
Mail Dialog Box
OCR Dialog Box
Custom Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings)
Page top
Navigation Mode Screen
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens >
Navigation Mode Screen
S735
Navigation Mode Screen
This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX.
Select an icon at the top of the screen to display the corresponding tab. Use each tab depending on what
you want to do.
Scan/Import
Scan photos and documents.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
View & Use
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit
them using an application that accompanies the machine.
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
One-click
You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding
icon.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete "from scanning to
saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
704 ‫ از‬403 ‫صفحه‬
Navigation Mode Screen
704 ‫ از‬404 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
704 ‫ از‬405 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan/
Import Documents or Images Tab
S702
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan/Import Documents or Images tab.
Scan photos and documents.
Auto Scan
Opens the Scan/Import window with Auto Scan selected.
Scan documents easily by automatically detecting the document type.
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Opens the Scan/Import window with Photos/Documents (Platen) selected.
Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete "from scanning to
saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Page top
View Use Images on your Computer Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View &
Use Images on your Computer Tab
S703
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
Select View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View & Use Images on your Computer
tab.
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit
them using an application that accompanies the machine.
My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
Opens the View & Use window with My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) selected.
You can open and use images saved in My Box.
"My Box" is a specific folder for saving images scanned with MP Navigator EX.
Note
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Specify Folder
Opens the View & Use window with Specify Folder selected.
You can open and use images saved in specific folders.
Recently Saved Images
Opens the View & Use window with Recently Saved Images selected.
You can open and use "Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or
"Sent to Application" recently.
View & Use Window
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete "from scanning to
saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
704 ‫ از‬406 ‫صفحه‬
View Use Images on your Computer Tab
704 ‫ از‬407 ‫صفحه‬
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Related Topic
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom
Scan with One-click Tab
S704
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Select One-click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One-click tab.
You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Auto Scan
Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files
are saved to a computer.
When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings.
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save to PC
Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected
automatically.
When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save as PDF file
Scan documents and save them as PDF files.
When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application
settings.
PDF Dialog Box
Attach to E-mail
Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail.
When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail
software program settings.
Mail Dialog Box
OCR
Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
OCR Dialog Box
Custom
Scan documents/photos and open them in a specified application. The document type can be
automatically detected.
When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and
704 ‫ از‬408 ‫صفحه‬
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
704 ‫ از‬409 ‫صفحه‬
application settings.
Custom Dialog Box
Start scanning by clicking the button
Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately.
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode. The One-click Mode screen appears.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Important
The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save
dialog box or Custom dialog box.
When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not
select Auto Mode).
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto
Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
S744
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Auto Scan or click Auto Scan in the Scan/
Import window to open the Auto Scan screen (Scan/Import window).
Open this window when you want to scan documents by automatically detecting the document type.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail Window
(4) Selected Images Area
Supported Documents
Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and BD/DVD/CD.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. To scan other documents, specify
the document type.
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Scanning Photos and Documents
Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
To reduce moire, open the " Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " and set
Document Type to Magazine(Color).
704 ‫ از‬410 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Settings and Operation Buttons
(View & Use)
Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use
window opens.
View & Use Window
Auto Scan
Displays the screen for scanning documents by automatically detecting the document type, etc.
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The
screen for scanning photos and documents appears.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Document Type
Auto Mode is set.
Specify...
Select whether or not to apply suitable corrections based on the document type.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan)
Scan
Scanning starts.
Clear
Delete all images in the Thumbnail window.
Note
Images not saved on a computer will be deleted. To keep important images, use Save or other
methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear.
Save
Save the selected images. Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings.
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file
Save the selected images as PDF files. Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the
save settings.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
704 ‫ از‬411 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise.
(Invert)
Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trims the target image (outlined in orange). "Trimming" is the act of selecting the area you want
to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. Click this button to open the Crop window and
specify the trimming frame.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date (ascending or descending).
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Note
Thumbnails may appear as "?" when there is not enough memory to display the images.
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Close All / Open All
You can hide or show all images in the displayed categories.
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
When you click Close All, the button changes to Open All.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
704 ‫ از‬412 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
704 ‫ از‬413 ‫صفحه‬
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan)
704 ‫ از‬414 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan)
S745
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Auto Scan)
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window.
Document Type
Auto Mode is set.
Important
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Recommended Image Correction
Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type.
Important
When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Defaults
Restore the default settings.
Page top
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Photos/
Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
S708
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Select Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos/Documents (Platen) or click Photos/
Documents (Platen) in the Scan/Import window to open the Photos/Documents (Platen) screen (Scan/
Import window).
Open this window when you want to scan documents from the Platen.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail Window
(4) Selected Images Area
Settings and Operation Buttons
(View & Use)
Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use
window opens.
View & Use Window
Auto Scan
Click this when you want to scan documents by automatically detecting the document type, etc. The
screen for scanning with Auto Scan appears.
Auto Scan Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Displays the screen for scanning photos, documents and other printed materials.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo
Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR)
Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color)
704 ‫ از‬415 ‫صفحه‬
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Important
You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
Specify...
Specify the document size, resolution, and other advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Important
Specify... is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear (scanner driver). Use ScanGear to
correct images and adjust colors when scanning.
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
This button changes to Open Scanner Driver when you select the Use the scanner driver
checkbox.
Open Scanner Driver
ScanGear starts.
See "ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens " for details on ScanGear screens.
Note
This button changes to Scan when you deselect the Use the scanner driver checkbox.
Clear
Delete all images in the Thumbnail window.
Note
Images not saved on a computer will be deleted. To keep important images, use Save or other
methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear.
Save
Save the selected images. Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings.
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file
Save the selected images as PDF files. Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the
save settings.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
704 ‫ از‬416 ‫صفحه‬
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise.
(Invert)
Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trims the target image (outlined in orange). "Trimming" is the act of selecting the area you want
to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. Click this button to open the Crop window and
specify the trimming frame.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date (ascending or descending).
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Note
Thumbnails may appear as "?" when there is not enough memory to display the images.
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Close All / Open All
You can hide or show all images in the displayed categories.
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
When you click Close All, the button changes to Open All.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
704 ‫ از‬417 ‫صفحه‬
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
704 ‫ از‬418 ‫صفحه‬
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
S713
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window.
In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo
Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR)
Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color)
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
You cannot select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Auto Detect when Document Type is
Text(OCR).
Scanning Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Note
The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(OCR).
300 dpi / 400 dpi
704 ‫ از‬419 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Auto Photo Fix / Auto Document Fix
The displayed item varies by Document Type.
Auto Photo Fix
This is displayed when Document Type is Color Photo. Select this checkbox to automatically
analyze the captured scene (landscape, night scene, etc.) and apply suitable corrections.
Auto Document Fix
This is displayed when Document Type is Color Document, Black and White Document or
Magazine(Color). Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better
readability.
Important
When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Black and White Photo or Text(OCR).
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Descreen
Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns.
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or
Text(OCR).
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Unsharp Mask
Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Remove gutter shadow
Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Stitch
Assist is selected for Document Size.
When scanning, align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of
the Platen.
Note
Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning
non-standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set.
See "Gutter Shadow Correction " for details.
Reduce Show-through
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or
Text(OCR).
704 ‫ از‬420 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
704 ‫ از‬421 ‫صفحه‬
Note
Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the
scanned image.
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images
- Hand-written documents
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in
Document Language.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly. In that case, select the scanned image in the Thumbnail window of the "
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " and rotate it with Edit Tools.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and
rotate images.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
Defaults
Restore the default settings.
Page top
Save Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬422 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box
S716
Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan/Import window.
In the Save dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Black and White is selected for Color Mode on the Advanced
Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver).
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as
PDF file Dialog Box
S717
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF
files. You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP
Navigator EX.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
When Opened from the Scan/Import Window
When Opened from the View & Use Window
Save as type
Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images.
704 ‫ از‬423 ‫صفحه‬
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬424 ‫صفحه‬
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
When Opened from the View & Use Window, PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set...
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified
as well.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files as
separate PDF files, 4 digits are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF
Settings Dialog Box
S736
PDF Settings Dialog Box
In the PDF Settings dialog box, you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings
for creating PDF files.
Important
Only the Security setting is available for images with resolutions outside the range of 75 dpi to 600
dpi.
Enable keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data. This will enable an easy search
by keyword.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation.
Important
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
704 ‫ از‬425 ‫صفحه‬
PDF Settings Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬426 ‫صفحه‬
- Documents containing figures/images
- Hand-written documents
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
PDF Compression
Select a compression type for saving.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high
compression.
Important
Compression type cannot be set when Color Mode is Black and White.
Security
Set passwords for opening, editing and printing the created PDF files.
Important
This function is not available when images are automatically saved after scanning.
Note
Select Password Security and set passwords in the Password Security -Settings dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
View Use Window
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View &
Use Window
S711
View & Use Window
Select View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Specify
Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View & Use window.
Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer.
(1) Display Setting Items
(2) Image Handling Buttons
(3) Toolbar
(4) Thumbnail Window
(5) Selected Images Area
Important
For PDF files, only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed. You cannot display PDF files
created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be displayed as well.
Display Setting Items
(Scan/Import)
Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The
Scan/Import window opens.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
704 ‫ از‬427 ‫صفحه‬
View Use Window
My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
Displays folders of images (grouped by year, year/month and year/month/date) in My Box in tree
view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right.
Image date is the scanned, captured or updated date.
Specify Folder
Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view. Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail
window to the right.
Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name, allowing you to rename it.
Recently Saved Images
"Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or "Sent to Application"
recently are displayed in tree view by date. Select a Month/Date/Year folder to display images by date
in the Thumbnail window to the right.
Image date is the scanned or sent date.
Click Clear History to clear all data (date folders and images) displayed in Recently Saved Images.
Note
The actual image files are not deleted.
Search
The advanced search options opens.
Searching Images
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Important
Jump to Main Menu is not displayed when the window is opened directly from Solution Menu
EX.
Image Handling Buttons
Image Handling Buttons
Specify what to do with the selected images. See the corresponding sections below for details on
each button.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Note
The buttons in Image Handling Buttons are displayed when the corresponding applications are
installed.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
704 ‫ از‬428 ‫صفحه‬
View Use Window
704 ‫ از‬429 ‫صفحه‬
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
(Image Correction/Enhancement)
Allows you to correct the target image (outlined in orange). Click this button to open the Correct/
Enhance Images window in which you can correct/enhance images and also adjust the
brightness, contrast, etc.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Important
Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary
files.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it. You can check all pages when you select a PDF file.
You can also check file information such as file name, date, size and security setting. A lock icon
appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
(Search)
Enter a word or phrase included in the file name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you
(Search). For Exif information, text in Maker, Model,
want to search for, then click
Description and User Comment is searched.
Note
Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a
selected folder and its subfolders.
(Refresh)
Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category, date (ascending or descending) or
name (ascending or descending).
Images can be sorted by category only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify
Folder is displayed.
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Selecting an image and clicking the file name highlights the file name, allowing you to rename it.
Drag and drop an image to do the following things.
- Move from one category to another within the Thumbnail window
- Move to a category folder displayed in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
- Copy to a folder displayed in Specify Folder
Important
You cannot change the extension (.jpg, .pdf, etc.) when renaming a file.
You cannot move or copy images to the date folders displayed in tree view in My Box (Scanned/
Imported Images) or Recently Saved Images.
View Use Window
Note
A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set.
Thumbnails may appear as "?" in the following cases.
- Opening unsupported images
- File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image
- The file is corrupted
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Scanned images are displayed by category.
Note
Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories.
In that case, drag and drop an image and move it from one category to another.
Category name Images: N (Selected: n)
Category name
The following categories are provided.
Photos: Portrait, Others
Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others
Custom categories: Displays your custom categories.
Unclassified: Displays images that are not classified.
Images: N
The number of images classified into the category is displayed.
(Selected: n)
The number of images with the checkbox selected is displayed.
Note
This portion is displayed only when one or more images are selected.
Close All / Open All
You can hide or show all images in the displayed categories.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
Immediately after opening the View & Use window or sorting images, all images appear
and Close All is displayed.
When you click Close All, the button changes to Open All.
All Categories / Specific Categories
You can display all categories or only those containing images.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
All Categories
Displays all categories and images.
704 ‫ از‬430 ‫صفحه‬
View Use Window
704 ‫ از‬431 ‫صفحه‬
Specific Categories
Displays categories containing images, along with the contained images. More images will
be displayed in the Thumbnail window, allowing you to find or move images easily.
Note
Immediately after opening the View & Use window, categories containing images appear
along with the contained images, and All Categories is displayed.
Click All Categories, to changes to Specific Categories.
Edit Custom Categories
When My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed, the Edit Custom
Categories dialog box opens.
In the Edit Custom Categories dialog box, you can add/delete categories displayed in Custom
Categories.
See "Classifying Images into Categories " for details.
Classify Images
Images imported from hard disks appear in Unclassified. Click Classify Images to classify
them automatically.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
Note
Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Create/
Edit PDF file Window
S715
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Click PDF in the View & Use window, then click Create/Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create/Edit
PDF file window.
In the Create/Edit PDF file window, you can add/delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files
created with MP Navigator EX.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX.
Rearrange Pages
You can move the selected image (outlined in orange).
Moves the selected image to the top.
Moves the selected image up one page.
Moves the selected image down one page.
Moves the selected image to the end.
Note
You can also drag the image to rearrange the order.
Delete Selected Pages
704 ‫ از‬432 ‫صفحه‬
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Deletes the selected image.
Add Page
Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file.
Note
A password will be required to add a password-protected PDF file.
Undo
Cancels the latest change made.
Reset
Cancels all the changes made.
Save Selected Pages
Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. Only the selected page is saved.
Note
When multiple pages are selected, a multiple-page PDF file is created.
See "Save as PDF file Dialog Box " for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Save All Pages
Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings and save all pages in the list as one
PDF file or save all pages as separate PDF files.
Note
See "Save as PDF file Dialog Box " for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Finish
Closes the Create/Edit PDF file window.
Toolbar
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the page 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the page 90 degrees clockwise.
(Preview Mode)
Switches to Preview Mode.
The selected page appears in Preview.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the image displayed in Preview.
704 ‫ از‬433 ‫صفحه‬
Create/Edit PDF file Window
704 ‫ از‬434 ‫صفحه‬
(Reduce)
Reduces the image displayed in Preview.
(Full-screen)
Displays the entire image.
(Thumbnail Mode)
Switches to Thumbnail Mode. The pages are displayed in thumbnail view.
Page top
Print Document Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬435 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print
Document Dialog Box
S718
Print Document Dialog Box
Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document
dialog box.
In the Print Document dialog box, you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images
at one time.
Printer
Select the printer to use.
Paper Source
Select paper source.
Page Layout
Select a print type.
Normal-size Printing
Print one image per sheet.
Scaled Printing
Print images at the selected scale (enlarged or reduced).
Fit-to-Page Printing
Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced).
Borderless Printing
Print the image on an entire sheet of paper without borders.
Page Layout Printing (2 on 1)
Layout and print two images on a sheet of paper.
Page Layout Printing (4 on 1)
Layout and print four images on a sheet of paper.
Enlarge/Reduce
Enlarge or reduce images to print.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Print Document Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬436 ‫صفحه‬
Print a reduced or enlarged image by specifying a scale in increments of 1%.
Auto
Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size.
Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size.
Scale
Select a scale from the list.
Important
At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In
that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine.
Note
Selectable paper sizes depend on the selected printer.
Media Type
Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type.
Note
Selectable paper types depend on the selected printer.
Print Quality
Select the print quality.
Density
Click
(Density adjustment) to select the print density.
Copies
Click
(Copy setting) to select the number of copies to be printed.
Grayscale Printing
Select this checkbox to print the document in black and white.
Preview before printing
Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing.
Defaults
Restore the default settings.
Print
Start printing with the specified settings.
Note
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Print Photo Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print
Photo Dialog Box
S729
Print Photo Dialog Box
Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box.
Important
The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts
instead.
PDF files cannot be printed.
Note
Double-click an image to display it in a different window.
Printer
Select the printer to use.
Properties...
Displays the selected printer's advanced setting screen.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine.
Media Type
Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type.
Page Layout
Select a print type.
Normal-size Printing
Print one image per sheet.
Fit-to-Page Printing
Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced).
Borderless Printing
704 ‫ از‬437 ‫صفحه‬
Print Photo Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬438 ‫صفحه‬
Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without borders.
Important
Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing.
This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing.
Orientation
Specify the print orientation.
Important
This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing. For others, the image is
automatically rotated according to the aspect ratio of the paper.
Copies
Specify the number of copies to print.
Vivid Photo
Select this checkbox to print the image in vivid colors.
Preview before printing
Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing.
Print
Starts printing.
Note
Only the images in the Thumbnail window with the checkbox selected are printed.
Close
Closes the dialog box without printing the photo.
Page top
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Send via
E-mail Dialog Box
S719
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Click Send in the View & Use window, then click Attach to E-mail on the list to open the Send via E-mail
dialog box.
In the Send via E-mail dialog box, you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e-mail.
Important
MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs:
- Microsoft Outlook
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP)
(If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.)
Note
Only PDF and JPEG files can be attached to e-mail.
Mail Program
The e-mail software program set up on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Select the e-mail software program you want to use.
Adjust attachment file size
When the file type is JPEG, selecting this checkbox allows you to resize the images. Select a size from
Size.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another
one. If resized, the resized images are saved.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be attached (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Set...
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files.
Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression).
704 ‫ از‬439 ‫صفحه‬
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬440 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window
704 ‫ از‬441 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Correct/
Enhance Images Window
S712
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Click
(Image Correction/Enhancement) in the View & Use window or click Fix photo images in
Image Handling Buttons to open the Correct/Enhance Images window.
In the Correct/Enhance Images window, you can make advanced settings including image correction/
enhancement and brightness/contrast adjustment.
You can also display the source image and corrected image side by side for comparison.
(1) Task Area
(2) Toolbar
Important
Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
Enhancement) in the Zoom in dialog box.
It may take a while to correct large images.
See "View & Use Window" for details on the View & Use window.
(Image Correction/
Task Area
Available tasks and settings vary between the Auto and Manual tabs.
Click the Auto or Manual tab to open the corresponding tab.
Auto Tab
Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image.
See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically " for details.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Auto Photo Fix
Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos.
Prioritize Exif Info
Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of
shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
"Exif" is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images
(JPEG).
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Apply to all images
Automatically corrects/enhances all images displayed in the thumbnail list.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected/enhanced image (the selected one).
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected/enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Manual Tab
There are two menus on the Manual tab: Adjust and Correct/Enhance.
Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image.
Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas.
704 ‫ از‬442 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually " for details.
Adjustment
Brightness
Adjusts the overall image brightness.
Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast.
Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Sharpness
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the
photo is out of focus or text is blurred.
Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image.
Blur
Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image.
Move the slider to the right to soften the image.
Show-through Removal
Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document
from appearing on the image.
Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect.
Advanced
Opens the Advanced Adjustment dialog box in which you can make fine adjustments to the image
brightness and color tone.
For Brightness/Contrast and Tone, select a color in Channel to adjust either Red, Green or Blue, or
select Master to adjust three colors together.
704 ‫ از‬443 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Brightness/Contrast
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image.
Move the Brightness slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Move the Contrast slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Tone
Adjust the brightness balance by specifying Highlight (the brightest level), Shadow (the darkest
level) and Midtone (the color in the middle of Highlight and Shadow).
Move the Highlight slider to the left to brighten the image.
Move the Midtone slider to the left to brighten and right to darken the image.
Move the Shadow slider to the right to darken the image.
Color Balance
Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image.
Move the Color Balance slider to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.
Note
These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed).
You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and
increasing the complementary color. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color
affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is
recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all
three color pairs so that the portion turns white.
Defaults
Resets all adjustments.
Close
Closes the Advanced Adjustment dialog box.
Note
The Brightness and Contrast values set in Adjust do not change even if the brightness and
color tone are adjusted in the Advanced Adjustment dialog box.
Defaults
Resets all settings (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal).
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected/enhanced/adjusted image (the selected one).
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected/enhanced/adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list.
704 ‫ از‬444 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correction/Enhancement
Face Brightener
Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Face Sharpener
Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles in the selected area.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Blemish Remover
Removes moles in the selected area.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the specified area.
Undo
Cancels the latest correction/enhancement.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected/enhanced image (the selected one).
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected/enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Toolbar
Toolbar
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
704 ‫ از‬445 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise.
(Invert)
Inverts the image horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. In
the displayed window, drag the white frame to specify the trimming area. Move the cursor inside
the white frame and drag to move the trimming area.
Note
Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a
balanced image.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the displayed image.
(Reduce)
Reduces the displayed image.
(Full-screen)
Displays the entire image in Preview.
(Compare)
Opens a window in which you can compare the images before and after the correction/
enhancement side by side.
The source image appears on the left and the corrected image appears on the right.
704 ‫ از‬446 ‫صفحه‬
Correct/Enhance Images Window
704 ‫ از‬447 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
One-click Mode Screen
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > One-click
Mode Screen
S701
One-click Mode Screen
Click
(Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One-click
Mode screen.
You can complete "from scanning to saving", etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Auto
Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files
are saved to a computer.
When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings.
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save
Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected
automatically.
When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
PDF
Scan documents and save them as PDF files.
When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application
settings.
PDF Dialog Box
Mail
Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail.
When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail
software program settings.
Mail Dialog Box
OCR
Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
OCR Dialog Box
Custom
Scan documents/photos and open them in a specified application. The document type can be
automatically detected.
When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and
application settings.
Custom Dialog Box
(Switch Mode)
Switches to Navigation Mode. The Navigation Mode screen appears.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
704 ‫ از‬448 ‫صفحه‬
One-click Mode Screen
704 ‫ از‬449 ‫صفحه‬
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Important
The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save
dialog box or Custom dialog box.
When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not
select Auto Mode).
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto
Scan Dialog Box
S742
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Auto in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Auto Scan dialog box.
Supported Documents
Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and BD/DVD/CD.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, click another icon in
the One-click Mode screen or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab and specify the document
type or size.
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
To reduce moire, click another icon in the One-click Mode screen or on the Custom Scan with
One-click tab and set Document Type to Magazine.
Scan Settings
Recommended Image Correction
Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type.
Important
When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
704 ‫ از‬450 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Dialog Box
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Save Settings
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP or PDF.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the
document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
You cannot set passwords for PDF files.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for items detected as
documents, and for items detected as photos.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Important
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button is not displayed when the dialog box is opened
directly from Solution Menu EX.
Apply
704 ‫ از‬451 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬452 ‫صفحه‬
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
S721
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Save in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Save dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically
set as well.
Important
Document types supported by Auto Mode are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines,
newspapers, text documents and BD/DVD/CD.
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case,
specify the document type or size.
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
704 ‫ از‬453 ‫صفحه‬
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Save dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen.
Specify...
Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode. When
saving as PDF files, select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
Important
When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
704 ‫ از‬454 ‫صفحه‬
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an
option other than Auto in Save as type.
If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in
AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable.
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for items detected as
documents, and for items detected as photos.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB
Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB.
Important
This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto
Mode.
This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed.
Note
You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an
underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg)
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information)
Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings
such as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
(Input Exif information). After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
704 ‫ از‬455 ‫صفحه‬
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
704 ‫ از‬456 ‫صفحه‬
Application Settings
Open with
You can select whether to open the View & Use window or Explorer after saving the images.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
S734
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in a dialog box of the One-click Mode
screen.
In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected.
In that case, Color Mode, Document Size, etc. are automatically set as well.
Important
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Black and White
This mode renders the image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain
levels (threshold level) into black and white and is rendered in two colors.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
704 ‫ از‬457 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Scanning Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Recommended Image Correction / Auto Photo Fix / Auto Document Fix
The displayed item varies by Document Type.
Recommended Image Correction
This is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode. Select this checkbox to apply auto photo fix
or auto document fix based on the document type.
Auto Photo Fix
This is displayed when Document Type is Photo. Select this checkbox to automatically analyze the
captured scene (landscape, night scene, etc.) and apply suitable corrections.
Auto Document Fix
This is displayed when Document Type is Magazine or Document. Select this checkbox to
sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.
Important
When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
These functions are not available when the Scan Settings dialog box is opened from the OCR
dialog box.
Auto Photo Fix is not available when Color Mode is Grayscale or Black and White.
Auto Document Fix is not available when Color Mode is Black and White.
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Descreen
Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns.
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Unsharp Mask
Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image.
Remove gutter shadow
Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Stitch
Assist is selected for Document Size.
When scanning, align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of
the Platen.
704 ‫ از‬458 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Note
Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning
non-standard size documents or when custom cropping frames are set.
See "Gutter Shadow Correction " for details.
Reduce Show-through
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Note
Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the
scanned image.
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images
- Hand-written documents
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in
Document Language.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and
rotate images.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
Defaults
Restore the default settings.
704 ‫ از‬459 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
704 ‫ از‬460 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Save Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box
S731
Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box opens when you scan from the Save dialog box or Custom dialog box of the Oneclick Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif
information).
You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP, PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
704 ‫ از‬461 ‫صفحه‬
Save Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬462 ‫صفحه‬
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Important
PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) and PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned from the
Custom dialog box.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Exif Settings...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif, you can input Exif information into the file to be saved.
Exif Settings Dialog Box
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Note
This function is available only when Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as
well.
Rotate Left 90° / Rotate Right 90°
Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Exif Settings Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬463 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Exif
Settings Dialog Box
S732
Exif Settings Dialog Box
You can input Exif information into a file to be saved. "Exif" is a standard format for embedding various
shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Embedding Exif information into scanned images
allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images.
The Exif Settings dialog box can be opened when Save as type is JPEG/Exif.
Basic Information
Displays the information obtained automatically from the machine or software.
Advanced Information
Displays the information specified on the right side of the screen.
Advanced Information Settings Area
You can input Exif information such as the title and shooting data. Select the checkbox of the items you
want to specify, and select or enter information.
Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically
Select this checkbox to automatically display the information you specified for the previous image.
Apply
After specifying all the information you need, click Apply to embed it into the image. The information
appears in Advanced Information.
OK
Embeds the specified information into the image and closes the screen. The specified information is
saved.
Cancel
Cancels the settings and closes the screen.
Information is embedded when Cancel is clicked after clicking Apply.
Page top
PDF Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF
Dialog Box
S725
PDF Dialog Box
Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click PDF in the One-click Mode screen
to open the PDF dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
704 ‫ از‬464 ‫صفحه‬
PDF Dialog Box
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Specify...
Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
Note
See "Creating/Editing PDF Files " to delete or rearrange the pages of saved PDF files.
Set...
You can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files.
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added.
704 ‫ از‬465 ‫صفحه‬
PDF Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬466 ‫صفحه‬
To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified
as well.
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save
settings such as destination folder and file name.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After
scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Application Settings
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application
that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images
are scanned.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application
may not start.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application to start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents as PDF files with the specified settings.
Page top
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as
PDF file Dialog Box
S730
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from the PDF dialog box of the One-click Mode
screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image.
In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Save as type
Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images.
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
704 ‫ از‬467 ‫صفحه‬
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬468 ‫صفحه‬
PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set...
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as
well.
Rotate Left 90° / Rotate Right 90°
Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Mail Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Mail
Dialog Box
S722
Mail Dialog Box
Click Attach to E-mail on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Mail in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Mail dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
704 ‫ از‬469 ‫صفحه‬
Mail Dialog Box
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen.
Specify...
Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save Settings
File Size
Select a size from Small (fits in a 640 by 480 window), Medium (fits in a 800 by 600 window), Large
(fits in a 1024 by 768 window) and Original.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages).
Important
You cannot set passwords for PDF files.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
When Save as type is PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Attachment Settings
Mail Program
Specify an e-mail software program.
Note
704 ‫ از‬470 ‫صفحه‬
Mail Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬471 ‫صفحه‬
Select Add... to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e-mail
software program. If the e-mail software program you want to use is not listed, click Add to List
and select it.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Important
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button is not displayed when the dialog box is opened
directly from Solution Menu EX.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans documents with the specified settings.
When scanning is completed, attachment files are created and saved. If using an MP Navigator EX
compatible e-mail software program, it starts automatically and a new message screen appears
with the image attached.
Page top
OCR Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > OCR
Dialog Box
S724
OCR Dialog Box
Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the OCR
dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
704 ‫ از‬472 ‫صفحه‬
OCR Dialog Box
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen.
Specify...
Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Note
When scanning slanted documents, select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve
the text recognition accuracy.
Save Settings
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Application Settings
OCR with
Specify an OCR application.
When MP Navigator EX is specified, after the image is scanned, the text in the image is extracted
and appears in Notepad (included with Windows).
Note
Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to
Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language
according to the language of the document to be scanned.
When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file.
General Tab
Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of
the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
704 ‫ از‬473 ‫صفحه‬
OCR Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬474 ‫صفحه‬
- Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
- Slanted documents
- Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with narrow line spacing
- Documents with colors in the background of text
- Documents containing multiple languages
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the text may not be extracted correctly or the application
may not start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Important
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button is not displayed when the dialog box is opened
directly from Solution Menu EX.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans documents with the specified settings.
Page top
Custom Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom
Dialog Box
S726
Custom Dialog Box
Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the
Custom dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically
set as well.
Important
Document types supported by Auto Mode are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines,
newspapers, text documents and BD/DVD/CD.
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case,
specify the document type or size.
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
704 ‫ از‬475 ‫صفحه‬
Custom Dialog Box
Note
To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Custom dialog box will be
disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen.
Specify...
Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode.
Important
When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD and business cards: JPEG
704 ‫ از‬476 ‫صفحه‬
Custom Dialog Box
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an
option other than Auto in Save as type.
You cannot set passwords for PDF files.
If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in
AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable.
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for items detected as
documents, and for items detected as photos.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB
Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB.
Important
This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto
Mode.
This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed.
Note
You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an
underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg)
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information)
Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings
such as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Application Settings
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application
that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images
are scanned.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application
may not start.
704 ‫ از‬477 ‫صفحه‬
Custom Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬478 ‫صفحه‬
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application to start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Preferences Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬479 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens >
Preferences Dialog Box
S705
Preferences Dialog Box
Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box.
In the Preferences dialog box, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings and how to respond
when scanning using the Operation Panel, via the General and Scanner Button Settings tabs.
Note
See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab.
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
Page top
General Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > General
Tab
S740
General Tab
On the General tab, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings.
Product Name
Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
Save in (My Box)
Displays the folder in which to save scanned documents. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Location of Temporary Files
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
Important
An error may occur if you set the destination to the root directory of the drive on which the
operating system is installed. Be sure to specify a folder.
An error may occur if you set the destination to a network folder. Be sure to specify a local folder.
Application to run
Displays the applications that can be started via MP Navigator EX. Install the applications from the
Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
For Attach to E-mail, you can select an e-mail software program to start.
For Open PDF file, the application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system is
704 ‫ از‬480 ‫صفحه‬
General Tab
704 ‫ از‬481 ‫صفحه‬
displayed.
Important
You can change which items are installed during installation from the Setup CD-ROM by
selecting Custom Install. If you choose not to install some applications with Custom Install, the
corresponding MP Navigator EX functions will be unavailable. To use those functions, install the
corresponding applications.
Note
For Convert to text file, Notepad (included with Windows) is displayed. Click Set... to open a dialog
box, then specify Document Language and how to scan multiple documents.
Document Language
Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. Only text
written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to
Notepad.
Combine multiple text conversion results
When scanning multiple documents, select the checkbox to collect the conversion results (text)
into one file.
When the checkbox is selected, you can scan up to 99 pages at one time.
Deselect the checkbox to display each conversion result (text) in a separate file.
When the checkbox is not selected, you can scan up to 10 pages at one time.
Page top
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner
Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
S707
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation
Panel of the machine.
Event
Select Event
Save to PC is set.
Document Type
Auto Scan is set.
Actions
Scan Settings
Document Size
This setting is automatically set.
Resolution
This setting is automatically set.
Specify...
Select whether or not to apply suitable corrections based on the document type.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings)
Save Settings
704 ‫ از‬482 ‫صفحه‬
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File Name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters).
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif or TIFF.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the
document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
Opens the Auto Save Settings dialog box in which you can specify the file format and other advanced
save settings. Select a file format for items detected as documents, and for items detected as
photos.
When JPEG/Exif is Selected
Click Set... to specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression),
Standard or Low(High Compression).
When PDF is Selected
Click Set... to make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for
details.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
By default, the scanned images are saved in the following folders.
Windows 7: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
704 ‫ از‬483 ‫صفحه‬
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC)
704 ‫ از‬484 ‫صفحه‬
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Select this to open the save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such
as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After
scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings)
704 ‫ از‬485 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings)
S743
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings)
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... on the Scanner Button Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Document Type
Auto Scan is set.
Important
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Recommended Image Correction
Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type.
Important
When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Defaults
Restore the default settings.
Page top
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
704 ‫ از‬486 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images
S011
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX.
Using images saved on a computer
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images > Opening Images Saved on a Computer
S507
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail using MP Navigator
EX. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. In the Navigation Mode screen, select View & Use and click My Box (Scanned/
Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images.
Click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) to open images saved in My Box (Scanned/Imported
Images), click Specify Folder to open images saved in a specific folder, or click Recently Saved
Images to open recently saved images.
Note
If the Show this window at startup checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. If
the Scan/Import window is displayed, click
(View & Use) on the upper left of the screen.
The View & Use window opens.
See " View & Use Images on your Computer Tab " for details on the View & Use Images on your
Computer tab.
3. Click the folder containing the images you want to open.
Images saved in the folder appear in the Thumbnail window.
704 ‫ از‬487 ‫صفحه‬
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
704 ‫ از‬488 ‫صفحه‬
4. Select the images you want to use, then select what you want to do with them.
See the corresponding sections below for details on using images.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 489‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی دﯾگر‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫اسکن با نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی ديگر‬
‫‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر( چيست؟‬
‫‪) (Scanner Driver) Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear‬اسکن كردن با تنظيمات پيشرفته با استفاده از‬
‫‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر((‬
‫تصحيح تصاوير و تنظيم رنگ ھا با استفاده از ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر(‬
‫صفحه ھای ‪) ScanGear‬درايور اسکنر(‬
‫ضميمه‪ :‬اطالعات مفيد برای اسکن کردن‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
704 ‫ از‬490 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
S201
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the
output size and make image corrections when scanning.
ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are compatible with a
standard interface called TWAIN. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.)
What You Can Do with This Software
This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when
scanning documents. It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone, as it allows you to make
various corrections and adjust brightness, contrast, etc.
Screens
There are three modes: Basic Mode, Advanced Mode and Auto Scan Mode.
Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen.
Note
ScanGear starts in the last used mode.
Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps (
,
and
Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc.
when scanning.
).
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
704 ‫ از‬491 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Mode
Use the Auto Scan Mode tab to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking
Scan.
Page top
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
704 ‫ از‬492 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
S200
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Starting ScanGear (scanner driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning documents after making simple image corrections
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightness/color adjustments
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning with a simple operation
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Scanning multiple documents at one time after making image corrections and color adjustments
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
S202
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning.
ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application.
Starting from MP Navigator EX
Navigation Mode Screen
Follow these steps to start ScanGear from the Navigation Mode screen of MP Navigator EX.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. In Scan/Import, click Photos/Documents (Platen).
The Scan/Import window opens.
3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox, then click Open Scanner Driver.
The ScanGear screen appears.
One-click Mode Screen
Follow these steps to start ScanGear from the One-click Mode screen of MP Navigator EX.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the One-click Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click the corresponding icon.
The corresponding dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬493 ‫صفحه‬
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
704 ‫ از‬494 ‫صفحه‬
3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings, then click Scan.
The ScanGear screen appears.
Important
Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the Auto Scan dialog box or PDF dialog box.
Starting from an Application
Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear from an application.
The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual.
1. Start the application.
2. On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine.
3. Select the command to scan a document (Scan/Import, Acquire image, etc.).
The ScanGear screen appears.
Page top
Scanning in Basic Mode
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Basic Mode
S203
Scanning in Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section explains how to scan a single document.
See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click
(Thumbnail) on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.
Note
To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine(Color).
3. Click Preview.
704 ‫ از‬495 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning in Basic Mode
704 ‫ از‬496 ‫صفحه‬
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Note
Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.
4. Set Destination.
5. Set Output Size.
Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.
6. Adjust the scan area (cropping frame) as required.
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
7. Set Image corrections as required.
8. Click Scan.
Starts scanning.
Note
Click
(Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
Page top
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Advanced Mode
S205
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone,
etc. when scanning.
This section explains how to scan a single document.
See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click
(Thumbnail) on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Click the Advanced Mode tab.
The Advanced Mode tab appears.
Note
Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
704 ‫ از‬497 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning in Advanced Mode
704 ‫ از‬498 ‫صفحه‬
3. Set Input Settings.
Input Settings
4. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Note
If you scan without preview, the show-through reduction function will be active. This function is
useful when scanning magazines. However, when scanning photos, the color tone of the
scanned image may differ from the source due to the show-through reduction function. In that
case, use preview first.
5. Set Output Settings.
Output Settings
6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image and adjust colors as required.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
7. Click Scan.
Starts scanning.
Note
Click
(Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab
Page top
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
S207
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Use the Auto Scan Mode tab to scan easily by automatically detecting the type of document placed on the
Platen.
Important
Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and BD/DVD/CD. To scan other documents, specify the document type on the Basic
Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab.
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Click the Auto Scan Mode tab.
The Auto Scan Mode tab appears.
Note
Select the Execute recommended image correction checkbox to apply suitable corrections
automatically according to the type of document to be scanned.
3. Click Scan.
Starts scanning.
Note
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
704 ‫ از‬499 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
704 ‫ از‬500 ‫صفحه‬
Related Topic
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Page top
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
S208
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time on the Basic Mode tab
and Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver).
This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab.
Important
To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view.
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping
frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
Note
See "Scanning in Auto Scan Mode " to scan easily by automatically detecting the document type.
You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced
Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image
brightness and color tone.
See the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab.
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear.
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.
704 ‫ از‬501 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
3. Click Preview.
Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are
specified) automatically according to the document size.
4. Set Destination.
5. Set Output Size.
6. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames) and set Image corrections as required.
Note
You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame (scan area) per image.
To create multiple cropping frames in an image, scan in whole image view.
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
7. Select the images you want to scan.
Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan.
704 ‫ از‬502 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
8. Click Scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan
multiple documents as a single image.
Note
Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view.
1. After previewing images, click
(Thumbnail) on the Toolbar.
Switch to whole image view.
Note
When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to
(Whole Image).
2. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames).
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. You can also
create two or more cropping frames.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
3. Set Destination.
4. Set Output Size.
5. Set Image corrections as required.
6. Click Scan.
Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.
704 ‫ از‬503 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Note
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Page top
704 ‫ از‬504 ‫صفحه‬
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
704 ‫ از‬505 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
S300
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
The following sections provide you with tips and know-how on advanced scanning techniques involving
color/brightness adjustment, etc.
Sharpening out-of-focus photos, reducing dust and scratches, and correcting faded colors
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
Previewing and changing the color tone of the entire image to scan
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Brightening colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting the color tone using histogram (a graph showing brightness distribution)
Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting the image brightness using tone curve (a graph of brightness balance)
Adjusting Tone Curve
Sharpening characters in text documents or reducing show-through effects
Setting Threshold
Page top
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, e... 704 ‫ از‬506 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
S308
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and
Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
The Image Settings functions on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to
enhance the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches and correct faded colors when scanning
images.
Setting Items
Click
(Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu.
Important
Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color
tone may be adversely affected.
See "Image Settings " for details and precautions on each function.
Note
See "Scanning in Advanced Mode " to start the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear and scan.
Adjusting the image brightness and color tone
Set Image Adjustment to Auto, Photo, Magazine, Newspaper or Document according to the document
type.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, e... 704 ‫ از‬507 ‫صفحه‬
None
Auto
Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images
Set Unsharp Mask to ON.
ON
OFF
Reducing gradations and stripe patterns
Set Descreen to ON.
ON
OFF
Note
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon
where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Reducing dust and scratches
Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of dust and scratches.
Medium
None
Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast
Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast.
None
Medium
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, e... 704 ‫ از‬508 ‫صفحه‬
Reducing graininess
Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of graininess.
None
Medium
Correcting backlit images
Set Backlight Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of backlight.
None
Medium
Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets
Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of shadows.
None
Medium
Page top
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
S301
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in
ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab.
Color Adjustment
Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a
specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
704 ‫ از‬509 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
704 ‫ از‬510 ‫صفحه‬
Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color.
Cyan & red, magenta & green and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a
shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color
and increasing the complementary color.
It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so
that the portion turns white.
Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them.
Below is an example of correcting a bluish image.
Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.
Before
After
Note
Color adjustments are applied only to the scan area (cropping frame) or the frame selected in
thumbnail view.
You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern
screen.
You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a
warm tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint.
Page top
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
704 ‫ از‬511 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
S303
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click
(Saturation/Color Balance).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Saturation
Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.
Move
(Slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the
right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Saturation decreased
Original image
Saturation increased
Note
The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much.
Color Balance
Adjust images that have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
704 ‫ از‬512 ‫صفحه‬
entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Move
(Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.
Cyan & Red
Magenta & Green
Yellow & Blue
These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can
reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary
color.
It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended
that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the
portion turns white.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted.
Cyan is increased
Red is increased
Page top
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
704 ‫ از‬513 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
S304
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click
(Brightness/Contrast).
Note
Click
(Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click
(Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
704 ‫ از‬514 ‫صفحه‬
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Brightness
Adjust the image brightness. Move
(Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten
the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Darkened
Original image
Brightened
Note
Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken
the image too much.
Contrast
"Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing
contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the
difference, thus softening the image.
Move
(Slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Decreased contrast
Original image
Increased contrast
Note
Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However,
shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much.
Page top
Adjusting Histogram
704 ‫ از‬515 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Histogram
S305
Adjusting Histogram
In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click
(Histogram).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Histograms
You can see the histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the histogram peak, the
more data is distributed to that level.
Adjusting Histogram
704 ‫ از‬516 ‫صفحه‬
(1) Bright area
(2) Dark area
(3) Whole image
More data is distributed to the
highlight side.
More data is distributed to the
Data is widely distributed between the
highlight and shadow.
shadow side.
Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider)
Select a Channel, then move
set as the shadow or highlight.
- All parts to the left of
- The parts at
(Black-point Slider) or
(White-point Slider) to specify the level to be
(Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).
(Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and white-point.
- All parts to the right of
(White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255).
When Image Adjustment is set to anything but None, the adjustments shown below are performed
automatically.
Moving the Black-point and White-point Sliders
Move the Black-point Slider or White-point Slider to adjust brightness.
Images with more data distributed to the highlight side
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side.
Images with more data distributed to the shadow side
Move the White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Images with widely distributed data
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Histogram
704 ‫ از‬517 ‫صفحه‬
Moving the Mid-point Slider
Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range.
Images with more data distributed to the highlight side
Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side.
Images with more data distributed to the shadow side
Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Histograms (Using the Droppers)
When you select a Channel and click the Black-point, Mid-point or White-point Dropper, the mouse
pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper. Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to
change the setting.
- The point clicked with
to 245).
(Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0
- The point clicked with
a value (5 to 250).
(Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also enter
- The point clicked with
(10 to 255).
(White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a value
- Click
(Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview
image.
The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted
accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole
image and reproduce natural colors.
Page top
Adjusting Tone Curve
704 ‫ از‬518 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Tone Curve
S306
Adjusting Tone Curve
In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click
(Tone Curve Settings).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Tone Curves
With ScanGear, scanning images via a scanner is the input, and displaying to a monitor is the output.
"Tone Curve" shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel.
Adjusting Tone Curve
Adjusting Tone Curve
In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High
contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image and Edit custom curve.
No correction (No adjustment)
Overexposure (Convex curve)
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a
bright-toned image when viewed on a monitor.
Underexposure (Concave curve)
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a darktoned image when viewed on a monitor.
High contrast (S curve)
The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image.
Reverse the negative/positive image (Downward-sloping line)
The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image.
704 ‫ از‬519 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Tone Curve
704 ‫ از‬520 ‫صفحه‬
Edit custom curve
You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding
areas.
Page top
Setting Threshold
704 ‫ از‬521 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Setting Threshold
S307
Setting Threshold
The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in
creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is
the borderline value that determines a color as black or white. By adjusting the threshold level, you can
sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White.
In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click
(Threshold).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Adjusting Threshold
Move
(Slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the
slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to
255).
Page top
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
704 ‫ از‬522 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
S800
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
The following sections describe ScanGear (scanner driver)'s screens and functions, and how to use
ScanGear.
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Input Settings
Output Settings
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Preferences Dialog Box
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Basic Mode Tab
S801
Basic Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Settings and Operation Buttons
Select Source
Photo(Color)
Scan color photos.
Magazine(Color)
Scan color magazines.
Newspaper(Grayscale)
Scan text and line drawings in black and white.
Document(Grayscale)
Scan documents and photos in black and white.
Select this mode to create high-resolution black and white images.
Note
When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active. The image
adjustment function which adjusts images based on the document type will also be active.
If you select Magazine(Color), the descreen function will be active.
704 ‫ از‬523 ‫صفحه‬
Basic Mode Tab
Display Preview Image
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Note
When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a while
until the preview image appears.
Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.
Print
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.
Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.
OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.
"OCR software" is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be
edited in word processors and other programs.
Output Size
Select an output size.
Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.
Flexible
Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames.
In thumbnail view
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a
cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Paper Size (L, A4, etc.)
Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of
the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining
the aspect ratio.
Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
704 ‫ از‬524 ‫صفحه‬
Basic Mode Tab
Select an output size in pixels.
A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the
cropping frame will be scanned. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while
maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected,
along with the predefined items.
Add
To add a size, enter Output Size Name, Width and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can
select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination
is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save
the items listed in Output Size List.
Delete
To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items
listed in Output Size List.
Important
You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
Save up to 10 items.
An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the setting range.
Note
For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).
Invert aspect ratio
This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Adjust cropping frames
You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Image corrections
Allows you to apply corrections to images.
Important
Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source.
Auto Document Fix, Fading correction and Backlight correction are available when
Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
704 ‫ از‬525 ‫صفحه‬
Basic Mode Tab
Auto Document Fix
Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability.
Important
When this checkbox is selected in ScanGear (scanner driver) started from MP Navigator
EX, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case,
deselect the checkbox and scan.
Auto Document Fix may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Fading correction
Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.
Backlight correction
Corrects photos that have been shot against light.
Gutter shadow correction
Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
For precautions on using this function, see " Gutter Shadow Correction ."
Color Pattern...
Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to
colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Important
This setting is not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of
the Preferences dialog box.
Perform Scan
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear.
Toolbar
Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view
In whole image view
704 ‫ از‬526 ‫صفحه‬
Basic Mode Tab
704 ‫ از‬527 ‫صفحه‬
(Thumbnail)/
(Whole Image)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
Preview Area
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in
the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are
croppable areas within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the
cropping frames.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
This page appears.
Preview Area
Preview Area
This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the
settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ."
When
(Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar
Basic Mode Tab
704 ‫ از‬528 ‫صفحه‬
Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the
checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
- Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
- Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and
Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while
pressing the Ctrl key.
- Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of
Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click
the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the
display to its non-magnified state.
When
(Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar
Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping
frames will be scanned.
Note
You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can
only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping
frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Basic Mode Tab
704 ‫ از‬529 ‫صفحه‬
Related Topic
Scanning in Basic Mode
Page top
Advanced Mode Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Advanced Mode Tab
S803
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution,
image brightness and color tone.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Settings and Operation Buttons
Favorite Settings
You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings and
Color Adjustment Buttons) on Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to save a
group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default
settings.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu and the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box
opens.
704 ‫ از‬530 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Mode Tab
704 ‫ از‬531 ‫صفحه‬
Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Favorite Settings List.
When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings
displayed in Favorite Settings List.
Note
You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.
Save up to 10 items.
Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Input Settings
Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.
Output Settings
Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
These buttons can be used to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You
can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values
(histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Color Adjustment Buttons
Zoom
Zooms in on an image or the portion within the cropping frame. When the image is zoomed in,
Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In thumbnail view
When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view, clicking this button zooms in on the selected
frame. Click
frame.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next
Note
You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again
to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In whole image view
Rescans the portion within the cropping frame at higher magnification.
Note
Zoom rescans the image and displays high-resolution image in Preview.
(Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the
resolution of the displayed image will be low.
Advanced Mode Tab
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in "
Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain
size. In that case, a warning message appears. It is recommended that you reduce the total
size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Toolbar
Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view
In whole image view
704 ‫ از‬532 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Mode Tab
(Thumbnail)/
704 ‫ از‬533 ‫صفحه‬
(Whole Image)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
Preview Area
(Clear)
Click this button to delete the preview image.
It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.
(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
(Move Image)
If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area, you can click this button and drag the
image across the screen until the part you want to see is displayed. You can also move the
image using the scroll bars.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Click this button then click on the image to enlarge it (zoom in). Right-click on the image to
reduce it (zoom out).
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in
the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are
croppable areas within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the
cropping frames.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Advanced Mode Tab
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
This page appears.
Preview Area
Preview Area
This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the
settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ."
When
(Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar
Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the
checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
- Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
- Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and
Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while
pressing the Ctrl key.
- Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
When
(Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar
Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping
frames will be scanned.
704 ‫ از‬534 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Mode Tab
704 ‫ از‬535 ‫صفحه‬
Note
You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can
only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping
frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Page top
Input Settings
704 ‫ از‬536 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Input
Settings
S804
Input Settings
Input Settings allows you to set the following items:
Select Source
The type of document to be scanned is displayed.
Paper Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole image view only.
When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.
Important
Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. ScanGear (scanner
driver) can scan data that is of:
- 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less
If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
Note
If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then
measure the size of the document and enter the values into
(Width) and
(Height).
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the
image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
Input Settings
704 ‫ از‬537 ‫صفحه‬
Select this mode to scan black and white photos, or to create black and white images. This mode
renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Black and White
Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white. This mode renders the
image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level)
into black and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with
(Threshold).
Input Size
In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview.
In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area)
size is displayed after preview.
You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into
Click
(Change Aspect Ratio) and change it to
when you specify the cropping frame size.
(Width) and
(Height).
(Keep Aspect Ratio) to maintain the aspect ratio
Important
Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you select
a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output Resolution is
displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed.
Note
The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum
size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100%.
When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since
the size will be prioritized.
See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames.
Page top
Output Settings
704 ‫ از‬538 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Output Settings
S805
Output Settings
Output Settings allows you to set the following items:
Output Resolution
Select the resolution to scan at.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value within the range
of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi (in 1 dpi increments).
Resolution
Output Size
Select an output size.
Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set
custom size and save it as a new output size option.
Flexible
You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frame.
In thumbnail view
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Note
To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into
(Width) and
(Height) in
Output Settings
Output Settings or specify a value (by 1%) for %. The maximum value available for %
depends on the Output Resolution. % can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum
available output resolution).
Paper Size (L, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
(Width),
(Height) and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped
according to the selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be
scanned at the size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to
enlarge, reduce or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them
at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
Add
To add a size, select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width,
and Height then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you
can only select pixels when Destination is Image display. The name of the added size appears in
Output Size List.
Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.
Delete
To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed
in Output Size List.
Important
You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
Save up to 10 items for each destination.
An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the range displayed in the message.
Note
See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames.
For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).
(Switch Aspect Ratio)
This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Data Size
The file size of the preview image when saved in BMP format is displayed.
Note
When the file size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning
704 ‫ از‬539 ‫صفحه‬
Output Settings
704 ‫ از‬540 ‫صفحه‬
message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce
Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Page top
Image Settings
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Image Settings
S806
Image Settings
Important
Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color
tone may be adversely affected.
Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image.
Note
Selectable settings depend on color mode settings.
Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings.
Image Settings allows you to set the following items:
Image Adjustment
When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized.
Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified
document type. The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image.
None
Image Adjustment will not be applied.
Auto
Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that
you normally select this setting.
Photo
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for photos.
Magazine
704 ‫ از‬541 ‫صفحه‬
Image Settings
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for magazines.
Newspaper
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for newspapers.
Document
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents.
Important
You can set Image Adjustment after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type.
The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set
Image Adjustment to None.
Unsharp Mask
When this is set to ON, the outline of the subjects is emphasized to sharpen the image.
Descreen
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Note
Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In
that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF.
Selecting Magazine(Color) in Select Source on the Basic Mode tab has the same effect as setting
Descreen to ON on the Advanced Mode tab.
Reduce Dust and Scratches
Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches. Use this function to reduce such
noise.
None
Dust and scratches will not be reduced.
Low
Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to reduce small/large dust particles and scratches. Evidence of the reduction process
may remain and may also remove delicate parts of the image.
Important
This function may not be effective for some types of photos.
Note
It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.
Fading Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a
phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong
colors.
None
704 ‫ از‬542 ‫صفحه‬
Image Settings
Fading correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image.
Important
You can set Fading Correction after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Fading Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Grain Correction
Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film.
None
Graininess will not be reduced.
Low
Select this when the photo is slightly grainy.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the
image.
Important
Grain Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Backlight Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have been shot against light.
When you change the Backlight Correction setting, the result will be reflected in the preview image.
None
Backlight correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct slightly backlit photos. This will not affect the image contrast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct strongly backlit photos. This can affect the image contrast.
Important
You can set Backlight Correction after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Note
Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied. Applying Grain Correction and
setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns.
704 ‫ از‬543 ‫صفحه‬
Image Settings
704 ‫ از‬544 ‫صفحه‬
Gutter Shadow Correction
Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.
Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is
pressed.
Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected.
None
Gutter shadow will not be corrected.
Low
Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting.
Important
Do not place items that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the Platen. Also, do not press on the
document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work
correctly or you might break the glass.
Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is
not white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all.
While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview
the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned.
Note
Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan
results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen.
If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page top
Color Adjustment Buttons
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color
Adjustment Buttons
S807
Color Adjustment Buttons
The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color
tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow
values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Important
The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
Selectable settings depend on color mode settings.
When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the
preview image.
Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items:
(Saturation/Color Balance)
Adjust the saturation (vividness) and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that
have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects
the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
(Brightness/Contrast)
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image
quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
704 ‫ از‬545 ‫صفحه‬
Color Adjustment Buttons
(Histogram)
A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can
specify the darkest level (shadow) and brightest level (highlight) within an image, cut the levels and
expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.
Adjusting Histogram
(Tone Curve Settings)
Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of
tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area.
Adjusting Tone Curve
(Final Review)
Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived
from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this
screen.
For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green or Blue, or select Master to
check three colors together.
If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only
L when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed.
(Threshold)
Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you
can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Setting Threshold
Custom
You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu. When Color Mode is set to anything but Black and
White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens. When Color Mode is Black and White,
the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬546 ‫صفحه‬
Color Adjustment Buttons
704 ‫ از‬547 ‫صفحه‬
Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold
Settings List.
Click Save to save.
You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the
settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu.
To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Click Save to save settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List.
Note
Save up to 20 items.
Defaults
Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram and tone curve).
Page top
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Auto
Scan Mode Tab
S813
Auto Scan Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button.
On the Auto Scan Mode tab, documents are automatically detected. You do not need to specify cropping
frames or make image corrections.
Supported Documents
Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and BD/DVD/CD.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, specify the document
type or size on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab and scan.
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Reflective disc labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Scan from the " Basic Mode Tab " or "Advanced Mode Tab " to reduce moire.
Placing Documents
"Placing Documents " appears.
Execute recommended image correction
Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type.
704 ‫ از‬548 ‫صفحه‬
Auto Scan Mode Tab
704 ‫ از‬549 ‫صفحه‬
Important
When this checkbox is selected in ScanGear (scanner driver) started from MP Navigator EX, the
files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only.
Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
View scanned images
Select this checkbox to display the thumbnails of scanned images in a different window.
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in "
Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
Instructions
This page appears.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear.
Related Topic
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Page top
Preferences Dialog Box
704 ‫ از‬550 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Preferences Dialog Box
S808
Preferences Dialog Box
Click Preferences... in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen to open Preferences dialog box.
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear functions via the Scanner,
Preview, Scan and Color Settings tabs.
Scanner Tab
Allows you to specify a folder to save images temporarily and a music file to play during or at the end of a
scan.
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear is started and how to display cropping
frames after previewing images. You can also select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned
documents.
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear after scanning images.
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Allows you to select how to adjust color, and specify the monitor gamma value.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Scanner Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Scanner Tab
S812
Scanner Tab
On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings.
Quiet Mode
Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or
scanning documents.
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
Sound Settings
You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan.
Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox, then
click Browse... and specify a sound file.
You can specify the following files.
- MIDI file (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi)
- Audio file (*.wav, *.aif, *.aiff)
- MP3 file (*.mp3)
Calibration Settings
When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing
and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images.
Note
Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in
some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on).
Calibration may take time depending on your computer.
704 ‫ از‬551 ‫صفحه‬
Scanner Tab
704 ‫ از‬552 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Preview Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Preview Tab
S809
Preview Tab
On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings.
Preview at Start of ScanGear
Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started.
Automatically Execute Preview
ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup.
Display Saved Preview Image
The previously previewed image will be displayed.
The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings
are also saved.
None
No preview image will be displayed at startup.
Note
Select None if you do not want to save the preview image.
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images
Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images.
Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images
The cropping frame will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing.
Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images
A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after
previewing.
None
704 ‫ از‬553 ‫صفحه‬
Preview Tab
704 ‫ از‬554 ‫صفحه‬
No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.
Cropping Size for Thumbnail View
Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents.
Larger
Displays 105% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Standard
The standard size.
Smaller
Displays 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Note
When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be
refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color
adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.
Page top
Scan Tab
704 ‫ از‬555 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scan
Tab
S810
Scan Tab
On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings.
Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images.
Close ScanGear automatically
Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.
Do not close ScanGear automatically
Select this to return to the ScanGear screen for another scan when scanning is completed.
Display the dialog to select next action
Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed.
Note
Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set,
some applications may not support it.
Page top
Color Settings Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color
Settings Tab
S811
Color Settings Tab
On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
Color Adjustment
Select either of the following.
You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale.
Recommended
Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you
normally select this setting.
Color Matching
Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor and color printer colors, thus reducing
time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors.
Color Adjustment Buttons will be disabled.
This function is available when Color Mode is Color.
- Source(Scanner): Select scanner profile.
- Target: Select target profile.
- Monitor: Select this to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor.
- Defaults: Returns to the default Color Matching settings.
None
Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver).
Note
Color Matching is available when ScanGear, monitor, color management-compliant application
(such as Adobe Photoshop) and printer are set up correctly.
Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer and application settings.
Monitor Gamma
By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness
704 ‫ از‬556 ‫صفحه‬
Color Settings Tab
704 ‫ از‬557 ‫صفحه‬
characteristics of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the
default value set in ScanGear, and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the
monitor.
Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20).
Note
Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual,
contact the manufacturer.
Page top
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
704 ‫ از‬558 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
S012
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Adjusting the cropping frame (scan area)
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Selecting the best resolution
Resolution
Learning about file formats
File Formats
Learning about Color Matching
Color Matching
Matching the colors between the document and monitor
See Monitor Gamma in the following section.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Adjusting Cropping Frames
S802
Adjusting Cropping Frames
You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area
of the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. When you click Scan, only the portion within the cropping frame
will be scanned and passed to the application.
Cropping Frame Types
(1) Active Cropping Frame (rotating thick broken lines)
The settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will be applied.
(2) Selected Cropping Frame (stationary thick broken lines)
The settings will be applied to the Active Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames
simultaneously. You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
(3) Unselected Cropping Frame (stationary thin broken lines)
The settings will not be applied.
Note
Active Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are displayed in whole image view.
Initial Cropping Frame
In thumbnail view
Cropping frame is not displayed initially. Drag the mouse over a frame to create a cropping frame.
In whole image view
A cropping frame (Active Cropping Frame) is displayed automatically around the preview image
according to the document size. You can also create a cropping frame by dragging the mouse in the
Preview area.
Note
Cropping frames are set according to the document size (Auto Crop) by default. For details, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).
Adjusting a Cropping Frame
(Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you
The cursor will change into
click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract
accordingly.
704 ‫ از‬559 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Cropping Frames
(Crosshair arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click
The cursor will change into
and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.
Note
In Advanced Mode tab, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into
(Width) and
(Height) in Input Settings.
Input Settings
(Switch Aspect Ratio). However,
You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking
(Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.
Creating Multiple Cropping Frames
In thumbnail view
You can only create one cropping frame per image.
In whole image view
Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame
in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the Active Cropping Frame, and the old cropping
frame will be the Unselected Cropping Frame.
704 ‫ از‬560 ‫صفحه‬
Adjusting Cropping Frames
704 ‫ از‬561 ‫صفحه‬
You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame.
You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear, the
settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.
When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.
Note
Create up to 12 cropping frames.
Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected.
Deleting Cropping Frames
In thumbnail view
To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image.
In whole image view
To delete a cropping frame, select it and click
Alternatively, press the Delete key.
(Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar.
When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (Active Cropping Frame and
Selected Cropping Frames) are deleted simultaneously.
Page top
Resolution
704 ‫ از‬562 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Resolution
S309
Resolution
What is Resolution?
The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and
color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail
your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per inch (2.54
cm).
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less
detail.
Setting the Resolution in MP Navigator EX
In MP Navigator EX, you can specify the resolution with Scanning Resolution in the Scan Settings dialog
box.
Images for Display on a Monitor
Paper/photographs to be viewed on a display should be scanned at 150 dpi, which is close to ordinary
monitor resolution.
Images for Printing
Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution that corresponds to the resolution of the printer.
For example, if you want to print using a 600 dpi black and white printer, you should set the resolution to
600 dpi.
With a color printer, specifying the resolution at half the resolution of the printer should be fine. For
example, if you want to print scanned paper/photos using a 600 dpi color printer, you should set the
resolution to 300 dpi. However, with a high-resolution printer, printing takes longer than usual if you set
the resolution to half the resolution of the printer.
Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale
If you print a document at twice the size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of the document will
be reduced by half. If the resolution of the original document is 300 dpi, the resolution of the enlarged
document will be 150 dpi. If you print the document with a 600 dpi color printer, the lack of detail in the
image may be obvious. In that case, if you scan at the Scanning Resolution of 600 dpi, the resolution will
be 300 dpi even if you double the size of document and you can print the document with sufficient quality.
Conversely, if you print a document at half scale, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution.
When Printing Color Photos at Twice the Size
Document resolution: 300
dpi
Scanning resolution: 600
Print at twice the size
Scanning resolution/actual scanning
resolution: 600 dpi
Printing resolution: 300
dpi
Resolution
704 ‫ از‬563 ‫صفحه‬
dpi
Scale: 200%
Setting the Resolution in ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
In ScanGear, you can specify the resolution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on the Advanced
Mode tab.
Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale
The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the
resolution of the scanned image. If you set Output Resolution to 300 dpi and scan at twice the size, the
document will be automatically scanned at 600 dpi, and the resolution of the scanned image will be 300
dpi. You can print the document with sufficient quality using a 600 dpi color printer.
When Printing L Size (3.5 inches x 5 inches) (89 mm x 127 mm) Photos at Twice the Size
Document resolution: 300
dpi
Output resolution: 300 dpi
Scale: 200%
Scan at twice the size
Actual scanning resolution: 600
Image resolution/printing resolution:
300 dpi
dpi
Appropriate Resolution Settings
Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image.
Note
Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear, it is recommended that you scan at the
default value.
For displaying on a monitor: 150 dpi
For printing: 300 dpi
When Output Size is set to Flexible in ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab (Select Source is Platen and the
scale is 100%)
Document
Color Mode
Use
Output
Resolution
Copying
(Printing)
Color
300 dpi
Creating a postcard
Color
300 dpi
Saving to a computer
Color
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Using on a website or attaching
to e-mail
Color
75 dpi - 150 dpi
Black and white
photo
Saving to a computer
Grayscale
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Using on a website or attaching
to e-mail
Grayscale
75 dpi - 150 dpi
Text document
Copying
Color, Grayscale or Black
and White
300 dpi
Attaching to e-mail
Color, Grayscale or Black
and White
150 dpi
Scanning text using OCR
Color or Grayscale
300 dpi - 400
Color photo
Resolution
704 ‫ از‬564 ‫صفحه‬
dpi
Important
If you double the resolution, the file size quadruples. If the file is too large, the processing speed will
slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the
minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.
Page top
File Formats
704 ‫ از‬565 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
File Formats
S310
File Formats
You can select a file format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable format
according to how you want to use the image on which application.
Available file formats vary by application and computer (Windows or Macintosh).
See below for the characteristics of each image file format.
BMP (Standard File Extension: .bmp)
A standard file format for Windows.
BMP is often selected for images that are used only on Windows.
JPEG (Standard File Extension: .jpg)
A file format often used on websites and for digital camera images.
JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and
cannot be returned to their original state.
JPEG is not available for black and white images.
Exif (Standard File Extension: .jpg)
A file format supported by many digital cameras.
It adds information such as the date of image capture, camera model, shutter speed, shooting mode
and comments to JPEG files.
The file format version must be Exif 2.2 or later in order to print on a Direct Print compatible printer.
TIFF (Standard File Extension: .tif)
A file format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications. (Some
TIFF files are incompatible.) TIFF is suitable for editing saved images.
Note
MP Navigator EX supports the following TIFF file formats.
- Uncompressed, black and white binary
- Uncompressed, RGB (8 bits per channel)
- Uncompressed, YCC (8 bits per component)
- Uncompressed, RGB (16 bits per channel)
- Uncompressed, YCC (16 bits per component)
- Uncompressed, Grayscale
PDF (Standard File Extension: .pdf)
A file format developed by Adobe Systems. It can be used on various computers and operating systems.
Therefore, PDF files can be exchanged between people who use different operating systems, fonts, etc.
regardless of the differences.
Important
Only PDF files created with MP Navigator EX are supported. PDF files created or edited in other
applications are not supported.
Page top
Color Matching
704 ‫ از‬566 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Color Matching
S815
Color Matching
Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor
or a printed image with the colors of the original document.
Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target)
Input Profile (Source)
Scanner
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Output Profile (Target)
sRGB
OS
Application
Application
Printer Driver
Monitor
Printer
ScanGear converts the image's color space from the scanner's color space to sRGB.
When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color
space based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings.
When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the
application's print settings and the printer driver's settings.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 567‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ساﯾر روش ھای اسکن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < اسکن کردن < ساير روش ھای اسکن‬
‫ساير روش ھای اسکن‬
‫اسكن با درايور ‪WIA‬‬
‫اسکن کردن با استفاده از پانل کنترل )فقط ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Scanning with WIA Driver
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning with WIA Driver
S604
Scanning with WIA Driver
You can scan an image from a WIA-compliant application and use the image in that application.
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to
scan documents without using an application. Scan documents from a TWAIN-compliant application to
specify advanced settings for scanning.
The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only.
For details, refer to the application's manual.
Scanning with WIA Driver 2.0
The following is an example of scanning using "Windows Fax and Scan."
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Click Scan... from New on the File menu.
The scan setting screen appears.
3. Specify the settings.
Scanner
The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select
the product you want to use.
Profile
Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the document to be scanned. To save a new
Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box.
Source
Select a scanner type.
Paper size
This setting is not available for this machine.
Color format
Select how to scan the document.
704 ‫ از‬568 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning with WIA Driver
704 ‫ از‬569 ‫صفحه‬
File type
Select a file format from JPEG, BMP, PNG and TIFF.
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. 300 dpi is set by default.
Resolution
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Preview or scan images as separate files
Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files.
4. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right.
5. Click Scan.
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0
The following is an example of scanning using "Paint."
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Click From scanner or camera from
. (Select the command to scan a
document in the application.)
3. Select an image type according to the document to be scanned.
Note
To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select
Custom Settings.
4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required.
Scanning with WIA Driver
704 ‫ از‬570 ‫صفحه‬
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your document.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
5. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right. Drag
to specify the scan area.
6. Click Scan.
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Page top
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
S605
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click WIA
Canon (model name).
The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box opens.
3. Click Next.
4. Select Picture type according to the document to be scanned.
Note
To scan with the values previously set in Custom settings, select Custom.
5. Click Custom settings to set the preferences as required.
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
704 ‫ از‬571 ‫صفحه‬
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
704 ‫ از‬572 ‫صفحه‬
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your document.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
6. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right. Drag
to specify the scan area.
7. Click Next and follow the instructions.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 573‬از ‪704‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری از طريق رايانه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 574‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫تميز کردن دستگاه‬
‫تميز کردن‬
‫تميز کردن سطح خارجی دستگاه‬
‫تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 575‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < تميز کردن دستگاه < تميز کردن‬
‫‪U059‬‬
‫تميز کردن‬
‫اين بخش مراحل تميز کردن را که برای مراقبت و نگھداری دستگاه خود به آن نياز داريد توضيح می دھد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫برای تميز کردن سطح حارجی دستگاه جھت جلوگيری از خراشيدگی سطح آن‪ ،‬از دستمال کاغذی‪ ،‬حوله ھای کاغذی‪ ،‬پارچه زبر‪ ،‬يا موارد‬
‫مشابه استفاده نکنيد‪ .‬حتما ً از پارچه لطيف و نرم استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھرگز از مايعات فرار از قبيل تينر‪ ،‬بنزين‪ ،‬استون يا ساير پاک کننده ھای شيميايی برای تميز کردن دستگاه استفاده نکنيد چون باعث نقص در‬
‫عملکرد چاپگر و آسيب ديدگی سطح آن می شود‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن سطح خارجی دستگاه‬
‫تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 576‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن سطح خارجی دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < تميز کردن دستگاه < تميز کردن سطح خارجی دستگاه‬
‫‪U060‬‬
‫تميز کردن سطح خارجی دستگاه‬
‫حتما ً از پارچه ای نرم ھمچون دستمال تميز کننده عينک استفاده کنيد و گرد و خاک را به آرامی از سطح دستگاه تميز کنيد‪ .‬در صورت لزوم‪ ،‬چين و‬
‫چروک پارچه را قبل از تميز کردن صاف کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از تميز کردن دستگاه دقت کنيد که دستگاه خاموش باشد و از پريز کشيده شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫از دستمال کاغذی‪ ،‬حوله ھای کاغذی‪ ،‬پارچه زبر‪ ،‬يا موارد مشابه استفاده نکنيد چون ممکن است باعث خراشيدگی سطح دستگاه شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 577‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < تميز کردن دستگاه < تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫‪U061‬‬
‫تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫مھم‬
‫قبل از تميز کردن دستگاه دقت کنيد که دستگاه خاموش باشد و از پريز کشيده شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫با يک پارچه تميز‪ ،‬نرم و بدون پرز‪ ،‬صفحه شيشه ای )‪ (A‬و سطح داخلی درپوش سند )صفحه سفيد( )‪ (B‬را به آرامی پاک کنيد‪ .‬مراقب باشيد که‬
‫ھيچگونه پس مانده ای بخصوص روی صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ باقی نمانده باشد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫قسمت داخلی درپوش سند )صفحه سفيد( )ب( به آسانی آسيب می بيند بنابراين به آرامی آن را پاک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 578‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < تراز کردن ھد چاپ < تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫‪U096‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫اگر چاپ خطھای کشيده شده تراز نيست يا نتيجه چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‪ ،‬موقعيت ھد چاپ را تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر سطح جوھر باقيمانده کم است‪ ،‬صفحه ترازبندی ھد چاپ به درستی چاپ نمی شود‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬که سطح جوھر آن کم است‪ ،‬را عوض‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫‪ .1‬مطمئن شويد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬يک برگ کاغذ ساده اندازه ‪ A4‬يا اندازه ‪ Letter‬را در سينی عقب قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬به آرامی سينی خروجی کاغذ را باز کنيد و اھرم سينی خروجی را نيز باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫دکمه ‪ Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نشان داده شود‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ‪ ،‬چاپ می شود‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫ھيچ يک از قسمت ھای چاپ شده در صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را لمس نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫دقت کنيد که صفحه تراز ھد چاپ کثيف نشود‪ .‬در صورت لکه شدن يا چروکيده شدن اين صفحه‪ ،‬ممکن است صفحه بدرستی اسکن‬
‫نشود‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 579‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 580‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫‪ .5‬برای تنظيم موقعيت ھد چاپ‪ ،‬صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را اسکن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ را طوری قرار دھيد که طرف چاپ شده به سمت پايين باشد‪ ،‬و عالمت‬
‫عالمت تراز )‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫در گوشه بااليی سمت چپ صفحه را با‬
‫( تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درپوش سند را به آرامی ببنديد‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که ‪ LED‬شکل زير را نشان می دھد‪ ،‬و سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را‬
‫فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه شروع به اسکن کردن صفحه تراز ھد چاپ می کند و موقعيت ھد چاپ بطور خودکار تراز می شود‪.‬‬
‫وقتی تنظيمات موقعيت ھد چاپ تمام شد‪ LED ،‬به حالت آماده بکار کپی بازمی گردد‪ .‬کاغذ را از روی صفحه شيشه ای برداريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫درپوش سند را باز نکنيد يا صفحه تراز ھد چاپ قرارداده شده را تکان ندھيد تا اسکن تمام شود‪.‬‬
‫اگر تنظيم خودکار موقعيت ھد چاپ انجام نشد‪ ،‬کد خطا روی صفحه ‪ LED‬ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر پس از تنظيم موقعيت ھد چاپ ھمانگونه که در قسمت باال توضيح داده شد‪ ،‬نتيجه چاپ ھنوز رضايت بخش نيست موقعيت ھد‬
‫چاپ را به صورت دستی از رايانه تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ترازبندی موقعيت ھد چاپ‬
‫برای چاپ مقادير کنونی تنظيم موقعيت ھد‪ ،‬شکل زير را روی ‪ LED‬نمايش دھيد‪ ،‬سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪(Color‬‬
‫را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 581‬از ‪704‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری از طرﯾق راﯾانه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < مراقبت و نگھداری < مراقبت و نگھداری از طريق رايانه‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری از طريق رايانه‬
‫تميز کردن ھدھای چاپ‬
‫تميز کردن غلتک ھای تغذيه کننده کاغذ‬
‫ترازبندی موقعيت ھد چاپ‬
‫بررسی افشانک ھای ھد چاپ‬
‫تميز کردن داخل دستگاه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Cleaning the Print Heads
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Print Heads
P026
Cleaning the Print Heads
The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head. Perform print
head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink.
The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows:
Cleaning
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning.
3. Execute cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute.
Print head cleaning starts.
4. Complete cleaning
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
5. Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check
process, click Cancel.
If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more.
Deep Cleaning
Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do
not resolve the print head problem.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning.
3. Execute deep cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Print head deep cleaning starts.
4. Complete deep cleaning
704 ‫ از‬582 ‫صفحه‬
Cleaning the Print Heads
704 ‫ از‬583 ‫صفحه‬
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
5. Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check
process, click Cancel.
Important
Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink. Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than
Cleaning.
Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently,
perform cleaning only when necessary.
Note
If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning, switch off the machine, wait 24 hours, and
then perform Deep Cleaning again. If there is still no sign of improvement, see " Machine Moves But
Ink Is Not Ejected ."
Related Topic
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Page top
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
704 ‫ از‬584 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
P027
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Cleans the paper feed roller. Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the
paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly.
The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows:
Roller Cleaning
1. Prepare the machine
Remove all sheets of paper from the rear tray.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The confirmation message appears.
4. Execute paper feed roller cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and click OK.
Paper feed roller cleaning starts.
5. Complete paper feed roller cleaning
After the rollers have stopped, follow the instruction in the message, load three sheets of plain
paper into the rear tray, and click OK.
Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed.
Page top
Aligning the Print Head Position
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Aligning the Print Head Position
P028
Aligning the Print Head Position
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors
and lines.
This machine supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head
alignment.
To perform automatic head alignment, refer to "Aligning the Print Head" in the manual: Basic Guide and
then execute the function from the operation panel of the machine.
The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows:
Print Head Alignment
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
3. Switch head alignment to manual
Check the Align heads manually check box.
4. Transmit the settings
Click Send and when the confirmation message appears, click OK.
5. Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab
The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens.
6. Load paper in the machine
Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray.
7. Execute head alignment
Make sure that the machine is on and click Align Print Head.
Follow the instruction in the message.
8. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set
their numbers in the associated boxes.
704 ‫ از‬585 ‫صفحه‬
Aligning the Print Head Position
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks
(B) More noticeable vertical white streaks
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable horizontal white streaks
(B) More noticeable horizontal white streaks
9. Confirm the displayed message and click OK
The second pattern is printed.
Important
Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress.
10. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set
their numbers in the associated boxes.
704 ‫ از‬586 ‫صفحه‬
Aligning the Print Head Position
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks
(B) More noticeable vertical white streaks
11. Confirm the displayed message and click OK
The third pattern is printed.
Important
Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress.
12. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the associated
boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the preview window, will
automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes.
704 ‫ از‬587 ‫صفحه‬
Aligning the Print Head Position
704 ‫ از‬588 ‫صفحه‬
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal white stripes.
(A) Less noticeable horizontal white stripes
(B) More noticeable horizontal white stripes
Note
To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click
Print Alignment Value.
Page top
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
704 ‫ از‬589 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Checking the Print Head Nozzles
P029
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a
nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print.
The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows:
Nozzle Check
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before printing the nozzle check
pattern.
3. Load paper in the machine
Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the rear tray.
4. Print a nozzle check pattern
Make sure that the machine is on and click Print Check Pattern.
Printing of the nozzle check pattern begins.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The Pattern Check dialog box opens.
5. Check the print result
Check the print result. When the print result is normal, click Exit.
If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print
head.
Related Topic
Cleaning the Print Heads
Page top
Cleaning Inside the Machine
704 ‫ از‬590 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning Inside the Machine
P030
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side
of the paper.
Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on
the printed page.
The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows:
Bottom Plate Cleaning
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens.
3. Load paper in the machine
As instructed in the dialog box, fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally, and then
unfold the sheet.
Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down.
4. Perform the bottom plate cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and click Execute.
Bottom plate cleaning starts.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 591‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه‬
‫تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه‬
‫تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه از رايانه شخصی شما‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 592‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه از راﯾانه شخصی شما‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه < تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه از رايانه شخصی شما‬
‫تغيير تنظيمات دستگاه از رايانه شخصی شما‬
‫تغيير گزينه ھای چاپ‬
‫ثبت نمايه چاپی که اغلب از آن استفاده می شود‬
‫‪) Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used‬تنظيم کارتريج جوھر مورد استفاده(‬
‫کنترل نيروی برق دستگاه‬
‫کاھش صدای دستگاه‬
‫تغيير حالت عملکرد دستگاه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Changing the Print Options
704 ‫ از‬593 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the
Print Options
P413
Changing the Print Options
You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.
Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off.
The procedure for changing the print options is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab
The Print Options dialog box opens.
Note
When the XPS printer driver is used, certain functions are not available.
3. Change the individual settings
If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK.
The Page Setup tab is displayed again.
Page top
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Registering a
Frequently Used Printing Profile
P417
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows:
Registering a Printing Profile
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the necessary items
From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select the printing profile to be used and if
necessary, change the settings after Additional Features.
You can also register necessary items on the Main, Page Setup, and Effects tabs.
Note
Effects tab cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used.
3. Click Save...
The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens.
704 ‫ از‬594 ‫صفحه‬
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
704 ‫ از‬595 ‫صفحه‬
4. Save the settings
Enter a name in the Name field, and if necessary, set the items in Options.... Then click OK.
The printing profile is saved, and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again.
The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list.
Important
To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click
Options..., and check each item.
Note
When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver, the print settings
you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings.
Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print
settings again.
Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile
1. Select the printing profile to be deleted
Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
2. Delete the printing profile
Click Delete. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list.
Note
Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
Page top
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
704 ‫ از‬596 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Setting the Ink
Cartridge to be Used
P033
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate ink cartridge among installed cartridges
according to an intended use.
When one of the ink cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one, you
can specify the other ink cartridge that still has ink and continue printing.
The procedure for specifying the ink cartridge is as follows:
Ink Cartridge Settings
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Ink Cartridge Settings on the Maintenance tab
The Ink Cartridge Settings dialog box appears.
3. Select the ink cartridge to be used
Select the ink cartridge to be used for printing and click OK.
The specified ink cartridge will be used from the next printing.
Important
When the following settings are specified, Black Only does not function because the machine uses
the color ink cartridge to print documents.
Other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A, Hagaki, or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab
Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab
Do not detach an ink cartridge that is not in use. Printing cannot be performed while either ink
cartridge is detached.
Page top
Managing the Machine Power
704 ‫ از‬597 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Managing the
Machine Power
P414
Managing the Machine Power
This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver.
The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows:
Power Off
The Power Off function turns off the machine. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the
machine on from the printer driver.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Execute power off
Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The machine power switches off, and the Maintenance tab is displayed again.
Page top
Reducing the Machine Noise
704 ‫ از‬598 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Reducing the
Machine Noise
P034
Reducing the Machine Noise
This function allows you to reduce the operating noise. Select when you wish to reduce the operating
noise of the printer at night, etc.
Using this function may lower the print speed.
The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows:
Quiet Mode
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab
The Quiet Mode dialog box opens.
3. Set the quiet mode
If necessary, specify one of the following items:
Do not use quiet mode
The operating noise is at normal volume.
Always use quiet mode
Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise.
Use quiet mode within specified time
The operating noise can be reduced during a specified period of time.
Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated.
Important
The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different.
4. Transmit the settings
Make sure that the machine is on and click Send.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The settings are enabled hereafter.
Note
Depending on print quality settings, effects of the quiet mode may be less.
Page top
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
704 ‫ از‬599 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the
Machine Operation Mode
P035
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of machine operation.
The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows:
Custom Settings
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Make sure that the machine is on, and then click Custom Settings on the
Maintenance tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear
because the computer cannot collect the machine status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3. If necessary, complete the following settings:
Prevent paper abrasion
The machine can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density
printing to prevent paper abrasion.
Check this check box to use this function.
Align heads manually
Usually, the Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head
alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment.
If the printing results are unsatisfactory even after you execute automatic head alignment, see "
Aligning the Print Head Position ," and execute manual head alignment.
Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment. Uncheck this check box to perform the
automatic head alignment.
Ink Drying Wait Time
You can set the length of the machine rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the
slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries,
increase the ink drying wait time.
Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.
4. Transmit the settings
Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The machine operates with the modified settings hereafter.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 600‬از ‪704‬‬
‫عيب ﯾابی‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی‬
‫عيب يابی‬
‫درصورت بروز خطا‬
‫دستگاه روشن نمی شود‬
‫کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫‪ LED‬را اصالً نمی توان ديد‬
‫نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫برنامه کاربردی را نمی توان نصب کرد‬
‫نمی توان به درستی با يک کابل ‪ USB‬به رايانه متصل شد‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫کپی‪/‬چاپ قبل از اتمام کار متوقف می شود‬
‫دستگاه حرکت می کند ولی جوھر خارج نمی شود‬
‫سرعت چاپ در حد انتظار نيست‬
‫نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به موقعيت مناسب جھت تعويض منتقل نمی شود‬
‫کاغذ بدرستی تغذيه نمی شود‬
‫کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫پيام روی صفحه رايانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫برای کاربران ‪Windows‬‬
‫مشکالت اسکن کردن‬
‫مشکالت نرم افزار‬
‫مشکالت ‪MP Navigator EX‬‬
‫درصورتيکه نمی توانيد مشکل را حل کنيد‬
‫سؤاالت متداول‬
‫دستورالعمل ھای نحوه استفاده )درايور چاپگر(‬
‫نکات کلی )درايور اسکنر(‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 601‬از ‪704‬‬
‫درصورت بروز خطا‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < درصورت بروز خطا‬
‫‪U302‬‬
‫درصورت بروز خطا‬
‫در حين چاپ در صورت بروز خطاھايی از قبيل کاغذ در دستگاه موجود نيست يا کاغذ گير کرده است‪ ،‬پيام عيب يابی بطور خودکار نمايش داده می‬
‫شود‪ .‬اقدام مناسب توضيح داده شده در پيام را انجام دھيد‪ .‬اين پيام ممکن است بسته به نسخه سيستم عامل شما متفاوت باشد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 602‬از ‪704‬‬
‫دستگاه روشن نمی شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < دستگاه روشن نمی شود‬
‫‪U303‬‬
‫دستگاه روشن نمی شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬دکمه ‪) ON‬روشن( را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬اطمينان يابيد که دوشاخه کامالً در اتصال دھنده سيم برق دستگاه زده شده است و بعد از آن‬
‫دستگاه را دوباره روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬دوشاخه دستگاه را از برق بکشيد‪ ،‬و دوباره آن را به پريز بزنيد و پس از حداقل ‪ 2‬دقيقه‬
‫دستگاه را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 603‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کد خطاﯾی روی ‪ LED‬نماﯾش داده می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫‪U305‬‬
‫کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫چراغ ھشدار به رنگ نارنجی روشن می شود‬
‫در صورت بروز خطايی در دستگاه‪ ،‬چراغ ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬به رنگ نارنجی روشن می شود‪ ،‬و شماره خطا به شکل زير روی ‪LED‬‬
‫نمايش داده می شود‪ .‬کد خطای نمايش داده شده در ‪ LED‬را بررسی کنيد و جھت تصحيح نمودن خطا اقدام الزم را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫* بسته به خطاى رخ داده‪ ،‬چراغ ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬روشن نمى شود‪.‬‬
‫کد خطا‬
‫‪E، 0، 2‬‬
‫دليل‬
‫کاغذ دستگاه تمام شده است‪/.‬کاغذ تغذيه‬
‫نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫اقدام‬
‫کاغذ را به طور صحيح در سينی عقب قرار دھيد و‬
‫دکمهسياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 0، 3‬‬
‫سينی خروجی کاغذ بسته است‪/.‬کاغذ‬
‫گير می کند‪.‬‬
‫اگر سينی خروجی کاغذ بسته است‪ ،‬آن را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه چاپ را از سر می گيرد‪.‬‬
‫اگر باز کردن سينی خروجی کاغذ مشکل را حل‬
‫نکرد‪ ،‬يا اگر برای شروع سينی باز بوده است‪ ،‬ممکن‬
‫است گاغذ گير کرده باشد‪ .‬کاغذ گير کرده را بيرون‬
‫آوريد و کاغذ را به طور صحيح در چاپگر قرار دھيد‪،‬‬
‫سپس دکمهسياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‪ (Color‬را‬
‫فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 0، 4‬‬
‫‪E، 0، 5‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را نمی توان شناسايی‬
‫نمود‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬ممکن است بدرستی نصب نشده باشد‬
‫يا ممکن است با اين دستگاه سازگار نباشد‪.‬‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را باز کنيد و کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫مناسب را نصب کنيد‪ .‬پس از آن‪ ،‬درپوش قفل‬
‫كارتريج جوھر را فشار دھيد تا با صدای تق در جای‬
‫خود قرار بگيرد‪ ،‬سپس واحد اسکن )درپوش( را‬
‫ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که خطا برطرف نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات‬
‫تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 0، 7‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬در موقعيت صحيح‬
‫خود نصب نشده است‪.‬‬
‫اطمينان حاصل کنيد که ھر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬در‬
‫موقعيت صحيح خود نصب شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 604‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کد خطاﯾی روی ‪ LED‬نماﯾش داده می شود‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 0، 8‬‬
‫جذب کننده جوھر تقريبا ً پر است‪.‬‬
‫برای ادامه چاپ‪ ،‬دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬يا رنگ )‬
‫‪ (Color‬دستگاه را فشار دھيد‪ .‬با مرکز خدمات تماس‬
‫بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 1، 3‬‬
‫سطح جوھر باقی مانده را نمی توان‬
‫تشخيص داد‪.‬‬
‫ممکن است جوھر تمام شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫عملکرد تشخيص سطح جوھر باقی مانده غير فعال می‬
‫شود‪ ،‬بنابراين سطح جوھر را نمی توان بدرستی‬
‫تشخيص داد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه بخواھيد بدون اين عملکرد به چاپ ادامه‬
‫دھيد‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬بازنشانی )‪ (Stop/Reset‬چاپگر‬
‫را حداقل ‪ 5‬ثانيه فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon‬توصيه می کند که از کارتريج ھای اصلی و‬
‫جديد ‪ Canon‬استفاده کنيد تا به کيفيت بھينه دست‬
‫يابيد‪.‬‬
‫لطفا ً در نظر داشته باشيد که ‪ Canon‬در قبال ھر‬
‫گونه نقص در کارکرد يا مشکالت ناشی از ادامه‬
‫چاپ در شرايطی که جوھر تمام شده است را به عھده‬
‫نمی گيرد‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را نمی توان شناسايی‬
‫نمود‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬ممکن است با اين چاپگر سازگار‬
‫نباشد‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مناسب را نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 1، 4‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 1، 5‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را نمی توان شناسايی‬
‫نمود‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬ممکن است به درستی نصب نشده‬
‫باشد‪.‬‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را باز کنيد و کارتريج ‪FINE‬‬
‫را به طور صحيح نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 1، 6‬‬
‫جوھر تمام شده است‪.‬‬
‫جوھر تمام شده است‪.‬‬
‫کارتريج جوھر را تعويض کنيد و واحد اسکن(‬
‫درپوش( را ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫کد خطاﯾی روی ‪ LED‬نماﯾش داده می شود‬
‫درصورتيکه چاپ در حال انجام است و شما می‬
‫خواھيد ادامه دھيد‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬بازنشانی )‪/Stop‬‬
‫‪ (Reset‬چاپگر را در حاليکه کارتريج جوھر نصب‬
‫است حداقل ‪ 5‬ثانيه فشار دھيد‪ .‬بنابراين چاپ در‬
‫شرايطی که جوھر تمام شده است ادامه ميابد‪.‬‬
‫عمليات تشخيص سطح جوھر باقی مانده غير فعال‬
‫خواھد شد‪.‬‬
‫بالفاصله بعد از اتمام چاپ‪ ،‬کارتريج خالی جوھر را‬
‫تعويض کنيد‪ .‬درصورتيکه چاپ در شرايطی که‬
‫جوھر تمام شده است ادامه يابد‪ ،‬کيفيت چاپ رضايت‬
‫بخش نيست‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 3، 0‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 605‬از ‪704‬‬
‫در صورت انتخاب کپی متناسب با‬
‫صفحه‪ ،‬اگر سند خيلی کوچک باشد‪،‬‬
‫اندازه سند به صورت صحيح شناسايی‬
‫نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که سند دارای خصوصيات الزم‬
‫باشد و به صورت صحيح روی صفحه شيشه ای‬
‫نگھدارنده کاغذ قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫موقعيت و جھت سند قرار داده شده روی صفحه‬
‫شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 3، 1‬‬
‫دستگاه به رايانه متصل نيست‪.‬‬
‫با يک کابل ‪ ،USB‬دستگاه را به رايانه متصل کنيد‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪E، 5، 0‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫صفحه تراز ھد چاپ اسکن نشد‪.‬‬
‫برای رفع خطا‪ ،‬دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪/Stop‬‬
‫‪ (Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪ ،‬سپس اقدامی را که در زير‬
‫توضيح داده شده انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که صفحه تراز ھد چاپ در موقعيت‬
‫و جھت صحيح روی صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده‬
‫کاغذ قرار داشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که صفحه شيشه ای نگھدارنده کاغذ‬
‫و صفحه تراز ھد چاپ کثيف نباشند‪.‬‬
‫دقت کنيد که نوع و اندازه کاغذ قرار داده شده در‬
‫دستگاه برای ترازبندی خودکار ھد چاپ مناسب‬
‫باشد‪.‬‬
‫برای ترازبندی خودکار ھد چاپ‪ ،‬ھميشه يک‬
‫برگ ‪ A4‬يا کاغذ ساده اندازه نامه را در دستگاه‬
‫قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫دقت کنيد که آيا افشانک ھای ھد چاپ مسدود شده‬
‫اند‪.‬‬
‫برای بررسی وضعيت ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی‬
‫افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫اگر خطا رفع نشد‪ ،‬چاپگر را به يک رايانه متصل‬
‫کرده و ھد چاپ را در درايور چاپگر تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ترازبندی موقعيت ھد چاپ‬
‫چراغ برق به رنگ سبز و چراغ ھشدار به رنگ نارنجی متناوبا ً چشمک می زنند‬
‫در صورتی که چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬و ھشدار )‪ (Alarm‬متناوبا ً به شکلی که در زير نشان داده شده است چشمک بزنند و شماره خطا به‬
‫شکل زير متناوبا ً روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده شود‪ ،‬ممکن است خطايی رخ داده باشد که نياز به سرويس دستگاه داشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 606‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کد خطاﯾی روی ‪ LED‬نماﯾش داده می شود‬
‫کد خطا‬
‫‪P, 0, 2‬‬
‫اقدام‬
‫چاپ را لغو و دستگاه را خاموش کنيد‪ .‬سپس کاغذ گير کرده يا مواد‬
‫نگھدارنده را که مانع از حرکت نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬می‬
‫شوند بيرون آوريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫‪P, 1, 0‬‬
‫مراقب باشيد که دستتان با قطعات داخلی چاپگر تماس نداشته‬
‫باشد‪ .‬در صورت دست زدن به آن‪ ،‬چاپگر ممکن است‬
‫بدرستی کار نکند‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس‬
‫بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه را خاموش کنيد و سيم برق دستگاه را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫)نمايشگر ‪(LED‬‬
‫ساير موارد به جز موارد باال‪:‬‬
‫دستگاه را خاموش کنيد و سيم برق دستگاه را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دوشاخه دستگاه را به برق بزنيد و دوباره آن را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫‪ LED‬را اصال ً نمی توان دﯾد‬
‫صفحه ‪ 607‬از ‪704‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < ‪ LED‬را اصالً نمی توان ديد‬
‫‪U343‬‬
‫‪ LED‬را اصالً نمی توان ديد‬
‫اگر چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬خاموش است‪:‬‬
‫دستگاه روشن نشده است‪ .‬سيم برق را به پريز زده و دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬روشن است‪:‬‬
‫ممکن است ‪ LED‬در حالت محافظ صفحه باشد‪ .‬در صفحه عمليات‪ ،‬دکمه ای به غير از دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫‪U308‬‬
‫نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫درصورتيکه نصب حتی بعد از گذاشتن ﺳﯽ دی راه اﻧداز )‪ (Setup CD-ROM‬دردرايو ديسک رايانه‬
‫شروع نشد‪:‬‬
‫نصب را با دنبال نمودن مراحل زير شروع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬روی ‪ Start‬و سپس ‪ Computer‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows XP‬روی ‪ Start‬و سپس ‪ My Computer‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬روی نماد‬
‫سی دی موجود در پنجره نمايش داده شده دوبار کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورت نمايش محتويات ‪ CD-ROM‬روی ‪ MSETUP4.EXE‬دوبار کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورتيکه نماد ‪ CD-ROM‬نمايش داده نمی شود‪ ،‬مراحل زير را امتحان کنيد‪:‬‬
‫‪ CD-ROM‬را از رايانه خارج نموده و دوباره بگذاريد‪.‬‬
‫رايانه خود را مجدداً راه اندازی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه نماد ھنوز نمايش داده نمی شود‪ ،‬از ديسک ھای ديگری استفاده کنيد و ببينيد که آنھا نمايش داده می شوند‪ .‬اگر ديسک ھای‬
‫ديگر نمايش داده می شوند‪ ،‬مشکل از‪ )Setup CD-ROM‬ﺳﯽ دی راه اﻧداز( است‪ .‬در اين صورت‪ ،‬با نماينده خدمات مرکز تماس‬
‫بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫اگر نمی توانيد بعد از صفحه ‪ Printer Connection‬ادامه دھيد‪:‬‬
‫اگر نمی توانيد بيشتر از صفحه ‪ Printer Connection‬ادامه دھيد‪ ،‬دقت کنيد که کابل ‪ USB‬محکم به درگاه ‪ USB‬دستگاه و رايانه وصل‬
‫شده باشد‪ ،‬سپس روش زير را برای نصب مجدد درايورھای ‪ MP‬دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫صفحه ‪ 608‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 609‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫)چاپگر شناسايی نمی شود‪ .‬اتصال را بررسی کنيد( ‪ The printer is not detected. Check the connection.‬ممکن است‬
‫بسته به رايانه مورد استفاده نمايش داده نشود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪ ،‬مراحل زير را برای نصب مجدد ‪ MP Drivers‬دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬روی ‪ Cancel‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬روی ‪ Start Over‬در صفحه ‪ Installation Failure‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬در صفحه ای که بعد از آن ظاھر می شود‪ ،‬روی ‪ Back‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬روی ‪ Exit‬در صفحه ‪) PIXMA XXX‬که ‪ XXX‬نام چاپگر شماست( کليک کنيد و ‪ CD-ROM‬را خارج‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬رايانه را مجدداً راه اندازی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬اطمينان يابيد که ھيچ نرم افزار کاربردی در حال اجرا نيست‪.‬‬
‫‪ CD-ROM .8‬را دوباره در دستگاه بگذاريد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ Easy Install‬برای نصب ‪ MP Drivers‬اجرا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ساير حالتھا‪:‬‬
‫مراحل شرح داده شده در راھنمای راه اندازی را برای نصب مجدد درايورھای ‪ MP‬دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر درايورھای ‪ MP‬درست نصب نشده باشد‪ ،‬درايورھای ‪ MP‬را حذف کنيد‪ ،‬رايانه را مجدداً راه اندازی نماييد و سپس درايورھای ‪ MP‬را‬
‫دوباره نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫حذف ‪ MP Drivers‬غيرضروری‬
‫در صورت نصب مجدد درايورھای ‪ MP، Custom Install‬را در ﺳﯽ دی راه اﻧداز )‪ (Setup CD-ROM‬اجرا کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪MP‬‬
‫‪ Drivers‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر نصب کننده به دليل بروز خطا در ‪ ،Windows‬به اجبار قطع شده است‪ ،‬ممکن است سيستم در وضعيت ناپايداری باشد و نتوانيد‬
‫درايورھا را نصب کنيد‪ .‬پيش از نصب مجدد‪ ،‬رايانه را مجدداً راه اندازی نماييد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 610‬از ‪704‬‬
‫برنامه کاربردی را نمی توان نصب کرد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < برنامه کاربردی را نمی توان نصب کرد‬
‫‪U347‬‬
‫برنامه کاربردی را نمی توان نصب کرد‬
‫‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬شروع نمی شود يا منوی ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬ظاھر نمی شود‬
‫اگر ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬شروع نشود يا منوی آن در ‪ Internet Explorer‬ظاھر نشود‪ ،‬مورد زير را تأييد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫می توانيد از ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬با ‪ Internet Explorer 7‬يا جديدتر استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا ‪ Canon Easy-WebPrint EX‬روی منوی ‪ Toolbars‬در منوی ‪View Internet‬‬
‫‪ Explorer‬نشان داده می شود؟‬
‫اگر ‪ Canon Easy-WebPrint EX‬نشان داده نشود‪ Easy-WebPrint EX ،‬روی رايانه شما نصب نيست‪Custom .‬‬
‫‪ Install‬را درﺳﯽ دی راه اﻧداز )‪ (Setup CD-ROM‬اجرا کنيد‪ ،‬سپس برای نصب ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬آن روی رايانه خود‬
‫را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر ‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬روی رايانه شما نصب نباشد‪ ،‬ممکن است پيامی مبنی بر درخواست نصب آن در قسمت اطالع‬
‫رسانی روی نوار ابزار نشان داده شود‪ .‬روی پيام کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس از دستورات روی صفحه رايانه برای نصب ‪-Easy‬‬
‫‪ WebPrint EX‬پيروی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در حين نصب يا دانلود ‪ ،Easy-WebPrint EX‬الزم است به اينترنت وصل باشيد‪ .‬ھزينه اتصال به عھده شماست‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا ‪ Canon Easy-WebPrint EX‬در منوی ‪ Toolbars‬در منوی ‪View Internet Explorer‬‬
‫انتخاب شده است؟‬
‫اگر‪ Canon Easy-WebPrint EX‬انتخاب نشده باشد‪ Easy-WebPrint ،‬غيرفعال شده است‪ .‬برای فعال کردن ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ Easy-WebPrint EX‬آن را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 611‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نمی توان به درستی با ﯾک کابل ‪ USB‬به راﯾانه متصل شد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نمی توان به درستی با يک کابل ‪ USB‬به رايانه متصل شد‬
‫‪U309‬‬
‫نمی توان به درستی با يک کابل ‪ USB‬به رايانه متصل شد‬
‫سرعت چاپ يا اسکن پايين است‪/‬اتصال ‪ USB‬پر سرعت کار نمی کند‪/‬پيام "اين دستگاه می تواند سريعتر کار کند" نمايش داده می‬
‫شود‬
‫اگر محيط سيستم شما کامالً با ‪ USB‬پر سرعت سازگار نباشد‪ ،‬دستگاه با سرعت پايين تر ‪ USB 1.1‬کار می کند‪ .‬در اين صورت‪ ،‬دستگاه‬
‫به درستی کار می کند اما ممکن است به دليل سرعت ارتباط‪ ،‬سرعت چاپ يا اسکن کاھش پيدا کند‪.‬‬
‫بررسی‪ :‬جھت اطمينان از اينکه محيط دستگاه شما از اتصال ‪ USB‬پر سرعت پشتيبانی می کند‪ ،‬موارد زير را بررسی‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا درگاه ‪ USB‬موجود در رايانه شما از اتصال ‪ USB‬پر سرعت پشتيبانی می کند؟‬
‫آيا کابل ‪ USB‬يا ھاب ‪ USB‬از اتصال ‪ USB‬پرسرعت پشتيبانی می کند؟‬
‫حتما ً از يک کابل ‪ USB‬پر سرعت تأييد شده استفاده کنيد‪ .‬توصيه می کنيم کابل بلندتر از ‪ 3‬متر ‪ 10 /‬فوت نباشد‪.‬‬
‫آيا سيستم عامل رايانه شما از اتصال ‪ USB‬پر سرعت پشتيبانی می کند؟‬
‫جديدترين نسخه به روزآوری را برای رايانه خود دريافت و نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫آيا درايور ‪ USB‬پر سرعت به درستی کار می کند؟‬
‫جديدترين نسخه به روزآوری درايور ‪ USB‬پر سرعت سازگار با سخت افزار خود را دريافت کرده و آن را مجدداً در رايانه‬
‫خود نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫جھت کسب اطالعات بيشتر درباره ‪ USB‬پر سرعت محيط سيستم خود‪ ،‬با سازنده رايانه‪ ،‬کابل ‪ USB‬يا ھاب ‪ USB‬خود تماس‬
‫بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 612‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نتاﯾج چاپ رضاﯾت بخش نيست‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫‪U310‬‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫درصورتيکه نتيجه چاپ به خاطر وجود خطوط سفيد رنگ؛ خطوط ناميزان يا رنگ ھای ناھموار رضايت بخش نباشد‪ ،‬ابتدا کاغذ و تنظيمات کيفيت‬
‫چاپ را تأييد نماييد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و نوع رسانه با اندازه و نوع کاغذ گذاشته شده مطابقت دارد؟‬
‫زمانيکه اين تنظيمات صحيح نباشند‪ ،‬نتيجه مناسبی کسب نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫درصورت چاپ يک عکس يا تصوير‪ ،‬تنظيمات نادرست نوع کاغذ از کيفيت رنگ چاپ می کاھد‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين‪ ،‬در صورت چاپ با تنظيمات نادرست نوع کاغذ‪ ،‬سطح چاپ شده ممکن است خراشيده شود‪.‬‬
‫چاپ بدون حاشيه و رنگ ناھموار ممکن است بسته به تنظيمات نوع کاغذ و کاغذ بارگذاری شده رخ دھد‪:‬‬
‫جھت کپی کردن با استفاده از عملکرد دستگاه‬
‫با استفاده از صفحه عملکرد دستگاه تأييد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫کپی کردن‬
‫جھت چاپ از يک رايانه‬
‫با استفاده از درايور چاپگر‪ ،‬تأييد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ با نصب و راه اندازی آسان‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬مطمئن شويد که کيفيت چاپ مناسب با استفاده از درايور چاپگر انتخاب شده است‪.‬‬
‫گزينه کيفيت چاپ مناسبی برای چاپ کاغذ و تصوير انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬در صورتيکه متوجه لکه و رنگ ھای ناھموار در چاپ شديد‪ ،‬تنظيمات‬
‫کيفيت چاپ را افزايش دھيد و دوباره چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد با استفاده از درايور چاپگر‪ ،‬تنظيمات کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تغيير کيفيت چاپ و تصحيح داده ھای تصوير‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬ممکن است داليل ديگری سبب بروز مشکل شده باشند‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين به بخش ھای زير مراجعه کنيد‪:‬‬
‫تا پايان کار نمی توان چاپ نمود‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫رنگ ھا واضح نيستند‬
‫خطوط تراز نيستند‬
‫کاغذ چاپ شده پيچ می خورد يا لکه می شود‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫پشت کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫خطوط عمودی در کناره ھای نسخه ھای چاپی چاپ می شود‬
‫رنگ ھا ناھموار يا خط خطی است‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 613‬از ‪704‬‬
‫تا پاﯾان کار نمی توان چاپ نمود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < تا پايان کار نمی توان چاپ نمود‬
‫‪U311‬‬
‫تا پايان کار نمی توان چاپ نمود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا اندازه داده ھای چاپ خيلی بزرگ است؟‬
‫بر روی ‪ Print Options‬در صفحه ‪ Page Setup‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬سپس‪ ،‬کادر انتخاب ‪ Prevent loss of print data‬را در کادر نمايش‬
‫داده شده انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا فضای ديسک سخت رايانه شما کافی است؟‬
‫فايل غير ضروری را حذف کنيد تا فضای ديسک آزاد شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫‪U313‬‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‬
‫چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‬
‫رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‬
‫خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫صفحه ‪ 614‬از ‪704‬‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کرديد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا کارتريج ‪ FINE‬بدرستی نصب شده است؟‬
‫اگر درپوش قفل كارتريج محكم بسته نشود‪ ،‬ممكن است جوھر به درستی خارج نشود‪.‬‬
‫واحد اسكن )درپوش( را باز كنيد‪ ،‬درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را باز كنيد سپس درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام بستن درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر‪ ،‬درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را فشار دھيد تا با صدای كليك در جای خود قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد و ھرگونه اقدام الزم را جھت مراقبت و نگھداری بکار‬
‫گيريد مثالً تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪.‬‬
‫جھت تعيين اينکه جوھر از افشانک ھای ھد چاپ بدرستی خارج می شود يا خير‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ بررسی الگوی افشانک‪ ،‬تميز کردن ھد چاپ و تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬به مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتيکه الگوی بررسی افشانک بدرستی چاپ نشود‪:‬‬
‫بعد از تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد و آن را بررسی نمائيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫ھد چاپ را بصورت عمقی تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه بعد از تميز کردن دقيق ھد چاپ مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد و بعد از ‪ 24‬ساعت دوباره عمليات تميز کردن دقيق‬
‫ھد چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫جوھر ممکن است تمام شده باشد‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬زمانيکه جوھر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬تمام شود‪ ،‬آن را با کارتريج جديدی تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :5‬زمانيکه از کاغذی که يک طرف آن قابل چاپ است استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬دقت کنيد که سطح قابل‬
‫چاپ کاغذ رو به باال در دستگاه قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ روی سطح ديگر کاغذ موجب می شود که چاپ واضح نباشد و کيفيت پايينی داشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫برای کسب اطالعات بيشتر درباره سمت قابل چاپ‪ ،‬به دفترچه راھنما ارائه شده به ھمراه کاغذ رجوع کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :6‬آيا صفحه شيشه ای کثيف است؟‬
‫صفحه شيشه ای را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 615‬از ‪704‬‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫ھنگام کپی‪ ،‬ھمچنين به بخش ھای زير مراجعه کنيد‪:‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :7‬مطمئن شويد که سند اصلی به درستی روی صفحه شيشه ای قرار داده شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫بررسی ‪ :8‬آيا سند اصلی طوری در دستگاه قرار داده شده است که طرف مورد نظر جھت کپی به صورت‬
‫وارونه روی صفحه شيشه ای باشد؟‬
‫بررسی ‪ : 9‬آيا نسخه چاپی چاپ شده با اين دستگاه را کپی می کنيد؟‬
‫از يک رايانه دوباره چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر نسخه چاپی که با اين دستگاه چاپ شده است را کپی می کنيد‪ ،‬ممکن است کيفيت چاپ پايين بيابيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 616‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 617‬از ‪704‬‬
‫رنگ ھا واضح نيستند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < رنگ ھا واضح نيستند‬
‫‪U314‬‬
‫رنگ ھا واضح نيستند‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬تصحيح رنگ را فعال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام چاپ عکس ھا و ساير گرافيک ھا‪ ،‬فعالسازی تصحيح رنگ در درايور چاپگر موجب بھبود رنگ می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ Vivid Photo‬را در صفحه ‪ Effects‬در پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا کارتريج ‪ FINE‬بدرستی نصب شده است؟‬
‫اگر درپوش قفل كارتريج محكم بسته نشود‪ ،‬ممكن است جوھر به درستی خارج نشود‪.‬‬
‫واحد اسكن )درپوش( را باز كنيد‪ ،‬درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را باز كنيد سپس درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام بستن درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر‪ ،‬درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را فشار دھيد تا با صدای كليك در جای خود قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬زمانيکه جوھر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬تمام شود‪ ،‬آن را با کارتريج جديدی تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬آيا الگوی بررسی افشانک بدرستی چاپ شده است؟‬
‫جھت تعيين اينکه جوھر از افشانک ھای ھد چاپ بدرستی خارج می شود يا خير‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ بررسی الگوی افشانک‪ ،‬تميز کردن ھد چاپ و تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬به مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتيکه الگوی بررسی افشانک بدرستی چاپ نشود‪:‬‬
‫بعد از تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد و آن را بررسی نمائيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫ھد چاپ را بصورت عمقی تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه بعد از تميز کردن دقيق ھد چاپ مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد و بعد از ‪ 24‬ساعت دوباره عمليات تميز کردن دقيق‬
‫ھد چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫جوھر ممکن است تمام شده باشد‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫بدليل تفاوتھای اوليه در روشھای مورد استفاده توليد رنگ‪ ،‬رنگھای چاپ شده ممکن است با رنگ صفحه منطبق نباشند‪ .‬تنظيمات کنترل رنگ و‬
‫تفاوتھای محيطی نيز می توانند بر چگونگی ظاھر شدن آن روی صفحه تأثير بگذارند‪ .‬بنابراين‪ ،‬رنگھای نتايج چاپی ممکن است با رنگھای‬
‫روی صفحه متفاوت باشد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 618‬از ‪704‬‬
‫خطوط تراز نيستند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < خطوط تراز نيستند‬
‫‪U315‬‬
‫خطوط تراز نيستند‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کرديد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬ھد چاپ را تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر خطوط چاپ شده تراز نيستند يا نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نمی باشند‪ ،‬موقعيت ھد چاپ را تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر بعد از انجام تراز ھد چاپ‪ ،‬مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مراجعه به ترازبندی موقعيت ھد چاپ ‪ ،‬تراز ھد چاپ را به صورت دستی انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬آيا اندازه داده ھای چاپ خيلی بزرگ است؟‬
‫بر روی ‪ Print Options‬در صفحه ‪ Page Setup‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬سپس‪ ،‬کادر انتخاب ‪ Prevent loss of print data‬را در کادر نمايش‬
‫داده شده انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬آيا از عملکرد صفحه چيدمان خاص يا حاشيه اجباری استفاده نموده ايد؟‬
‫زمانيکه از عملکرد چاپ با چيدمان خاص يا حاشيه اجباری استفاده می شود‪ ،‬خطوط نازک ممکن است چاپ نشوند‪ .‬سعی کنيد خطوط را در سند‬
‫ضخيم تر کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 619‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کاغذ چاپ شده پيچ می خورد ﯾا لکه می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < کاغذ چاپ شده پيچ می خورد يا لکه می شود‬
‫‪U316‬‬
‫کاغذ چاپ شده پيچ می خورد يا لکه می شود‬
‫کاغذ چاپ شده لکه جوھر دارد‬
‫کاغذ چاپ شده پيچ می خورد‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کرديد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬زمانيکه تراکم روی باال تنظيم شده است‪ ،‬تنظيمات ‪ Intensity‬را در درايور چاپگر کاھش دھيد‬
‫و مجدداً عمليات چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه برای چاپ تصاوير با تراکم باال از کاغذ ساده استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬کاغذ ممکن است جوھر زيادی جذب کند و موج دار شود و موجب‬
‫سايش کاغذ شود‪.‬‬
‫می توانيد با استفاده از درايور چاپگر‪ ،‬تراکم را تأييد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تنظيم تراکم‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬آيا از کاغذ مخصوص عکس برای چاپ عکس می توان استفاده شده است؟‬
‫زمانيکه داده ھای چاپی دارای اشباع رنگ باال باشند مثالً عکس ھا و تصاوير پر رنگ‪ ،‬پيشنھاد شده است که از کاغذھای ‪Photo Paper‬‬
‫‪ Plus Glossy II‬يا ساير کاغذھای مخصوص ‪ Canon‬استفاده شود‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫‪U317‬‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫لبه ھای کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫سطح چاپ شده لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کرديد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا از نوع مناسب کاغذ استفاده نموده ايد؟موارد زير را بررسی کنيد‪:‬‬
‫بررسی کنيد آيا کاغذی که شما از آن برای چاپ استفاده می کنيد برای ھدف چاپی شما مناسب است يا خير‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫درصورت انجام چاپ بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬دقت کنيد که کاغذی که از آن استفاده می کنيد برای چاپ بدون حاشيه مناسب باشد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه کاغذ شما برای چاپ بدون حاشيه مناسب نباشد‪ ،‬کيفيت چاپ ممکن است در لبه ھای بااليی و پايينی کاغذ کاھش يابد‪.‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬بعد از رفع پيچ خوردگی کاغذ‪ ،‬آن را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای کاغذ ساده‬
‫کاغذ را زير و رو کنيد و دوباره آن را برای چاپ روی طرف ديگر‪ ،‬در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫گذاشتن کاغذ در سينی عقب برای مدت طوالنی ممکن است باعث پيچ خوردگی کاغذ شود‪ .‬در صورتی که اين اتفاق رخ دھد‪ ،‬سمت ديگر‬
‫کاغذ را رو به باال در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪ .‬ممکن است مشکل بر طرف شود‪.‬‬
‫توصيه می کنيم کاغذھای مصرف نشده را به داخل بسته برگردانده و آنرا در مکانی مسطح نگھداری کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای کاغذھای ديگر‬
‫اگر پيچ خوردگی در چھار گوشه کاغذ بيش از ‪ 3‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.1 /‬اينچ )‪ (A‬ارتفاع باشد‪ ،‬کاغذ ممکن است لکه دار شود يا ممکن است‬
‫بدرستی تغذيه نشود‪ .‬در چنين حالتھايی‪ ،‬مراحل توضيح داده شده در فوق را جھت رفع پيچ خوردگی کاغذ دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫کاغذ را در جھت خالف پيچش کاغذ ھمانطور که در شکل می بيند لوله کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 620‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫بررسی کنيد که کاغذ صاف باشد‪.‬‬
‫ما توصيه می کنيم ھر بار فقط يک صفحه کاغذ صاف شده را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫بسته به نوع رسانه‪ ،‬کاغذ ممکن است لکه دار و سياه شود يا ممکن است بدرستی تغذيه نشود حتی اگر کاغذ پيچ نخورد‪ .‬در چنين حالتھايی‪،‬‬
‫مراحل توضيح داده شده در زير را جھت پيچيدن کاغذ در ارتفاع ‪ 3‬ميلی متر ‪ 0.1 /‬اينچ )‪ (B‬قبل از چاپ دنبال کنيد‪ .‬اين امر نتيجه چاپ‬
‫را بھبود می بخشد‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (C‬سمت قابل چاپ‬
‫ما توصيه می کنيم ھر بار فقط يک صفحه کاغذ صاف شده را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬در صورت چاپ روی کاغذ ضخيم‪ ،‬تنظيم ‪.Prevent paper abrasion‬‬
‫با انتخاب تنظيم ‪ ،Prevent paper abrasion‬فاصله بين ھد چاپ و کاغذ قرار گرفته در کاغذ بيشتر می شود‪ .‬اگر با وجوديکه نوع رسانه‬
‫مطابق با کاغذ قرار داده شده در دستگاه تنظيم شده است‪ ،‬سايش مشاھده شد‪ ،‬دستگاه را با استفاده از صفحه عمليات يا رايانه روی جلوگيری از‬
‫سايش کاغذ تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورت انتخاب تنظيم ‪ ،Prevent paper abrasion‬ممکن است سرعت چاپ کاھش يابد‪.‬‬
‫* بعد از پايان چاپ‪ ،‬تنظيم ‪ Prevent paper abrasion‬را غير فعال کنيد‪ .‬در غير اين صورت‪ ،‬اين تنظيم برای کليه کارھای چاپی ديگر‬
‫نيز فعال باقی می ماند‪.‬‬
‫برای تنظيم با استفاده از صفحه عمليات‬
‫دکمه نگھداری )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ LED‬به شکل زير نشان داده شود‪ ،‬سپس دکمه سياه )‪ (Black‬را فشار‬
‫دھيد تا حالت جلوگيری از سايش کاغذ فعال شود‪.‬‬
‫برای غيرفعال کردن عملکرد جلوگيری از سايش کاغذ‪ ،‬دکمه نگھداری )‪ (Maintenance‬را مکرراً فشار دھيد تا ‪ LED‬باال ظاھر‬
‫شود‪ ،‬سپس دکمه رنگ )‪ (Color‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫برای تنظيم با استفاده از رايانه خود‬
‫پنجره تنظيم درايور چاپگر را باز كنيد و در ‪ Custom Settings‬در صفحه ‪ ،Maintenance‬كادر ‪Prevent paper‬‬
‫‪ abrasion‬را انتخاب كرده و سپس ‪ Send‬را كليک كنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای باز کردن ‪ ،Printer Driver Setup Window‬به باز کردن ‪ Printer Driver Setup Window‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :5‬زمانيکه تراکم روی باال تنظيم شده است‪ ،‬تنظيمات ‪ Intensity‬را در درايور چاپگر کاھش دھيد‬
‫و مجدداً عمليات چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه برای چاپ تصاوير با تراکم باال از کاغذ ساده استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬کاغذ ممکن است جوھر زيادی جذب کند و موج دار شود و موجب‬
‫سايش کاغذ شود‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام چاپ از رايانه‬
‫تنظيمات ‪ Intensity‬در درايور چاپگر کاھش دھيد و مجدداً عمليات چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫اينجا را کليک کنيد‪ :‬درايور چاپگر‬
‫صفحه ‪ 621‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 622‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‪/‬سطح چاپ شده خراشيده می شود‬
‫* قبل از کليک کردن اين قسمت برای باز کردن پنجره نصب درايور‪ ،‬از نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی در حال اجرا خارج شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬در صفحه ‪ Main، Manual‬را برای ‪ Color/Intensity‬انتخاب کرده و ‪ Set‬را کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬برای تنظيم تراکم‪ ،‬نوار کشويی ‪ Intensity‬را در صفحه ‪ Color Adjustment‬تنظيم رنگ بکشيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :6‬آيا چاپ در خارج از محيط چاپ پيشنھادی انجام می شود؟‬
‫درصورتيکه چاپ در خارج از محيط چاپ پيشنھادی انجام شود‪ ،‬لبه پايينی کاغذ توسط جوھر لکه می شود‪.‬‬
‫اندازه سند اصلی را در نرم افزار کاربردی تغيير دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ‬
‫بررسی ‪ :7‬آيا صفحه شيشه ای کثيف است؟‬
‫صفحه شيشه ای را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تميز کردن صفحه شيشه ای و درپوش سند‬
‫بررسی ‪ :8‬آيا غلطک تغذيه کننده کاغذ کثيف است؟‬
‫غلتک تغذيه کننده کاغذ را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫نکته‬
‫تميز کردن غلطک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‪ ،‬موجب ساييدگی غلطک خواھد شد‪ ،‬بنابراين اين مراحل را تنھا در صورت ضرورت انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :9‬آيا داخل چاپگر کثيف است؟‬
‫زمانيکه چاپ دو طرفه انجام می دھيد‪ ،‬داخل چاپگر ممکن است جوھری شود‪ ،‬و نسخه چاپی لکه می شود‪.‬‬
‫برای تميز نمودن داخل چاپگر‪ ،‬از عملکرد تميز کردن صفحه زيرين استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای جلوگيری از لکه شدن داخل چاپگر‪ ،‬اندازه کاغذ را بدرستی تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ Ink Drying Wait Time :10‬را طوالنی تر کنيد‪.‬‬
‫انجام چنين کاری به سطح چاپ شده فرصت می دھد تا خشک شود بنابراين از لکه‪ ،‬سياه و خط خطی شدن کاغذ جلوگيری می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که دستگاه روشن است‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی زبانه ‪ Maintenance‬و سپس ‪ Custom Settings‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬نوار کشويی ‪ Ink Drying Wait Time‬را برای تنظيم زمان انتظار بکشيد‪ ،‬و سپس بر روی ‪ Send‬کليک‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬پيام را تأييد کنيد و ‪ OK‬را کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :11‬آيا کاغذ توسط کاغذ ديگری که قرار داده شده خط خطی و خراشيده شده است؟‬
‫بسته به نوع رسانه‪ ،‬کاغذ ممکن است ھنگام تغذيه از سينی عقب توسط ساير کاغذھای قرار داده شده خط خطی و خراشيده شود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪ ،‬در‬
‫ھر زمان فقط يک صفحه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 623‬از ‪704‬‬
‫پشت کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < پشت کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫‪U318‬‬
‫پشت کاغذ لکه دار و سياه می شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کرديد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬برای تميز نمودن داخل چاپگر‪ ،‬از عملکرد تميز کردن صفحه زيرين استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام چاپ بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬چاپ دو طرفه يا چاپ با تعداد زياد‪ ،‬ممکن است داخل دستگاه به جوھر آغشته شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 624‬از ‪704‬‬
‫خطوط عمودی در کناره ھای نسخه ھای چاپی چاپ می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < خطوط عمودی در کناره ھای نسخه ھای چاپی چاپ می شود‬
‫‪U319‬‬
‫خطوط عمودی در کناره ھای نسخه ھای چاپی چاپ می شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات نوع کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد می کنيد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا اندازه کاغذی که در دستگاه قرار داده شده است مناسب است؟‬
‫اگر اندازه کاغذ وارد شده در دستگاه بزرگتر از اندازه کاغذ تعيين شده توسط شما باشد ممکن است خطوط عمودی در حاشيه چاپ شود‪.‬‬
‫اندازه کاغذ را مطابق با کاغذای که در دستگاه قرار داده ايد‪ ،‬به درستی تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫نکته‬
‫شما می توانيد با استفاده از دکمه عددی‪ ،‬شماره رونوشت ھا را مشخص سازيد‪.‬‬
‫اين دستگاه به منظور تميز نگه داشتن نسخه ھای چاپی‪ ،‬به صورت خودکار عملکرد تميز کردن را انجام می دھد‪ .‬مقدار کمی از جوھر‬
‫برای تميز کردن خارج می شود‪.‬‬
‫اگرچه جوھر معموالً روی جذب کننده جوھر ريخته می شود‪ ،‬در صورتی که کاغذی بزرگتر از ميزان مشخص شده توسط شما در‬
‫دستگاه قرار دھيد ممکن است جوھر بر روی آن پاشيده شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫رنگ ھا ناھموار ﯾا خط خطی است‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست < رنگ ھا ناھموار يا خط خطی است‬
‫‪U320‬‬
‫رنگ ھا ناھموار يا خط خطی است‬
‫رنگ ھا يکدست نيستند‬
‫رنگ ھا راه راه ھستند‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا تنظيمات کاغذ و کيفيت چاپ را تأييد کرديد؟‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد و ھرگونه اقدام الزم را جھت مراقبت و نگھداری بکار‬
‫گيريد مثالً تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪.‬‬
‫جھت تعيين اينکه جوھر از افشانک ھای ھد چاپ بدرستی خارج می شود يا خير‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ بررسی الگوی افشانک‪ ،‬تميز کردن ھد چاپ و تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬به مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتيکه الگوی بررسی افشانک بدرستی چاپ نشود‪:‬‬
‫بعد از تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد و آن را بررسی نمائيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫ھد چاپ را بصورت عمقی تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه بعد از تميز کردن دقيق ھد چاپ مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد و بعد از ‪ 24‬ساعت دوباره عمليات تميز کردن دقيق‬
‫ھد چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫جوھر ممکن است تمام شده باشد‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬ھد چاپ را تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 625‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 626‬از ‪704‬‬
‫رنگ ھا ناھموار ﯾا خط خطی است‬
‫تراز کردن ھد چاپ‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر بعد از انجام تراز ھد چاپ‪ ،‬مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مراجعه به ترازبندی موقعيت ھد چاپ ‪ ،‬تراز ھد چاپ را به صورت دستی انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫‪U321‬‬
‫چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬مطمئن شويد که دوشاخه به پريز زده شده است و سپس چاپگر را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه چراغ )برق( ‪ POWER‬به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند چاپگر راه اندازی می شود‪ .‬منتظر بمانيد تا چراغ ‪) POWER‬برق( چشمک‬
‫نزند و به رنگ سبز روشن بماند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگام چاپ داده ھای بزرگ از قبيل يک عکس يا گرافيک ھا‪ ،‬شروع شدن عمليات چاپ طول می کشد‪ .‬زمانيکه چراغ ‪) POWER‬برق(‬
‫به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند‪ ،‬رايانه داده ھا را پردازش می کند و آن را به چاپگر ارسال می کند‪ .‬تا شروع شدن چاپ منتظر بمانيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬دقت کنيد که کابل ‪ USB‬محکم به درگاه ‪ USB‬دستگاه و به رايانه وصل شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی دستگاه با استفاده ازکابل ‪ USB‬به رايانه شما وصل شده است‪ ،‬موارد زير را بررسی کنيد‪:‬‬
‫درصورتيکه از دستگاه تقويت مثالً ھاب ‪ USB‬استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬آن را قطع کنيد‪ ،‬چاپگر را مستقيما ً به رايانه وصل کنيد و دوباره عمليات‬
‫چاپ را انجام دھيد‪ .‬درصورتيکه چاپ بطور عادی شروع شود‪ ،‬دستگاه تقويت دچار مشکل شده است‪ .‬برای کسب اطالعات بيشتر با‬
‫فروشنده دستگاه تقويت مشورت کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين ممکن است مشکل از کابل ‪ USB‬باشد‪ .‬کابل ‪ USB‬را تعويض کنيد و عمليات چاپ را دوباره انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬در صورت چاپ از يك رايانه‪ ،‬رايانه خود را راه اندازی مجدد كنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه کار چاپی غير ضروری وجود دارد آنھا را حذف کنيد‪.‬‬
‫حذف کارھای چاپی ناخواسته‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که نام چاپگر شما در کادر گفتگوی چاپ انتخاب می شود‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه از يک درايور چاپگر برای چاپگر ديگری استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬چاپگر بدرستی کار نمی کند‪.‬‬
‫اطمينان حاصل کنيد که نام چاپگر شما در کادر گفتگوی چاپ انتخاب می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫برای انتخاب چاپگر پيش فرض ‪ Set as Default Printer‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :5‬درگاه چاپگر را بطور مناسب تنظيم کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که درگاه چاپگر بدرستی تنظيم می شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬با ويژگی خاص ارائه دھنده به صورت اشتراک کاربری وارد سيستم شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Devices and Printers .2‬را از منوی ‪ Start‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows Vista‬منوی ‪ Printers < Hardware and Sound < Control Panel < Start‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows XP‬منوی ‪Printers and Faxes < Printers and Other Hardware < Control Panel < Start‬‬
‫را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬روی نماد ‪ XXX) Canon XXX Printer‬نام دستگاه شماست( راست کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪Printer‬‬
‫‪ properties‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ Windows Vista‬يا ‪ Windows XP‬روی نماد ‪ XXX) Canon XXX Printer‬نام دستگاه شماست( راست کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس‬
‫‪ Properties‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬جھت تأييد تنظيمات درگاه‪ ،‬روی زبانه ‪ Ports‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دقت کنيد که درگاھی به نام‪) USBnnn‬در اينجا "‪ "n‬يک شماره است( که ‪ Canon XXX Printer‬در ستون ‪ Printer‬ظاھر شده‬
‫است برای )‪ Print to the following port(s‬انتخاب شود‪.‬‬
‫اگر تنظيمات نادرست باشد‪:‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 627‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 628‬از ‪704‬‬
‫چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫‪ MP Drivers‬را دوباره نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫حتی اگر درگاه موسوم به ‪ USBnnn‬ھم انتخاب شده باشد چاپ شروع نمی شود‪:‬‬
‫‪ Canon My Printer‬را از سينی کار راه اندازی کنيد‪ Diagnose and Repair Printer ،‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬دستورالعمل‬
‫ھای روی صفحه را برای تنظيم درگاه درست چاپگر دنبال کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ Canon XXX Printer‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ MP Drivers ،‬را دوباره نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :6‬آيا اندازه داده ھای چاپ خيلی بزرگ است؟‬
‫بر روی ‪ Print Options‬در صفحه ‪ Page Setup‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬سپس‪ ،‬کادر انتخاب ‪ Prevent loss of print data‬را در کادر نمايش‬
‫داده شده انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 629‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کپی‪/‬چاپ قبل از اتمام کار متوقف می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < کپی‪/‬چاپ قبل از اتمام کار متوقف می شود‬
‫‪U322‬‬
‫کپی‪/‬چاپ قبل از اتمام کار متوقف می شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا دستگاه برای مدت زيادی بطور مداوم چاپ می کند؟‬
‫درصورتيکه چاپگر برای مدت زيادی بطور مداوم کار کند‪ ،‬ممکن است ھد چاپ بيش از حد گرم شود‪ .‬برای محافظت از ھد چاپ‪ ،‬چاپگر‬
‫عمليات چاپ را در يک شکست خط برای يک دوره زمانی متوقف می کند و سپس چاپ را از سر می گيرد‪.‬‬
‫در اين حالت‪ ،‬جلسه چاپ را در يک زمان مناسب قطع و چاپگر را حداقل ‪ 15‬دقيقه خاموش کنيد‪.‬‬
‫عالوه بر اين‪ ،‬درصورتيکه چاپگر تصاوير يا گرافيک ھا را با رنگھای متراکم بطور مداوم در يک دوره زمانی چاپ کند‪ ،‬اين دستگاه ممکن‬
‫است جھت محافظت از ھد چاپ عمليات چاپ را متوقف نمايد‪ .‬در اين حالت‪ ،‬عمليات چاپ بطور خودکار شروع نمی شود‪ .‬حداقل ‪ 15‬دقيقه‬
‫چاپگر را خاموش کنيد‪.‬‬
‫احتياط‬
‫ھد چاپ و محيط اطراف آن در داخل چاپگر ممکن است کامالً داغ شوند‪ .‬ھرگز به ھد چاپ و قطعات نزديک به آن دست نزنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا کاغذ در چاپگر قرار دارد؟‬
‫مطمئن شويد که کاغذ در سينی عقب گذاشته شده است‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه کاغذ چاپگر تمام شده است‪ ،‬کاغذ در آن بگذاريد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬آيا اسناد چاپی دارای تعداد زيادی عکس و تصوير ھستند؟‬
‫از آنجا که چاپ داده ھای بزرگ از قبيل عکس ھا يا تصاوير برای دستگاه و رايانه وقت گير است‪ ،‬ممکن است به نظر برسد در طول کار‬
‫دستگاه از کار ايستاده است‪.‬‬
‫عالوه بر اين‪ ،‬ھنگام چاپ داده ھايی که بطور مداوم از مقدار زيادی جوھر روی کاغذ ساده استفاده می کنند‪ ،‬چاپگر ممکن است بطور موقت‬
‫متوقف شود‪ .‬در غير اينصورت‪ ،‬صبر کنيد تا روند کار تمام شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورتيکه سند بزرگی را چاپ می کنيد يا چندين کپی از يک سند را چاپ می کنيد‪ ،‬عمليات چاپ ممکن است متوقف گردد تا جوھر‬
‫خشک شود‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬اگر کپی قبل از اتمام متوقف شود‪ ،‬دوباره کپی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫پس از مدت زمان مشخصی بعد از بروز برخی از خطاھا در طول کپی‪ ،‬دستگاه عمليات را قطع می کند‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 630‬از ‪704‬‬
‫دستگاه حرکت می کند ولی جوھر خارج نمی شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < دستگاه حرکت می کند ولی جوھر خارج نمی شود‬
‫‪U323‬‬
‫دستگاه حرکت می کند ولی جوھر خارج نمی شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا افشانک ھای ھد چاپ مسدود شده اند؟‬
‫جھت تعيين اينکه جوھر از افشانک ھای ھد چاپ بدرستی خارج می شود يا خير‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ بررسی الگوی افشانک‪ ،‬تميز کردن ھد چاپ و تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬به مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتيکه الگوی بررسی افشانک بدرستی چاپ نشود‪:‬‬
‫بعد از تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬الگوی بررسی افشانک را چاپ کنيد و آن را بررسی نمائيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫ھد چاپ را بصورت عمقی تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه بعد از تميز کردن دقيق ھد چاپ مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد و بعد از ‪ 24‬ساعت دوباره عمليات تميز کردن دقيق‬
‫ھد چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از دوبار تميز کردن عمقی ھد چاپ‪ ،‬درصورتيکه مشکل حل نشد‪:‬‬
‫جوھر ممکن است تمام شده باشد‪ .‬کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا کارتريج ‪ FINE‬بدرستی نصب شده است؟‬
‫اگر درپوش قفل كارتريج محكم بسته نشود‪ ،‬ممكن است جوھر به درستی خارج نشود‪.‬‬
‫واحد اسكن )درپوش( را باز كنيد‪ ،‬درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را باز كنيد سپس درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام بستن درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر‪ ،‬درپوش قفل كارتريج جوھر را فشار دھيد تا با صدای كليك در جای خود قرار بگيرد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬زمانيکه جوھر کارتريج ‪ FINE‬تمام شود‪ ،‬آن را با کارتريج جديدی تعويض کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 631‬از ‪704‬‬
‫سرعت چاپ در حد انتظار نيست‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < سرعت چاپ در حد انتظار نيست‬
‫‪U324‬‬
‫سرعت چاپ در حد انتظار نيست‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا چاپ در ‪ Quiet Mode‬انجام می شود؟‬
‫درصورتيکه بخواھيد در رايانه از ‪ Quiet Mode‬جھت چاپ استفاده کنيد‪ ،‬سرعت چاپ کاھش می يابد‪ .‬برای چاپ سريعتر از ‪Quiet‬‬
‫‪ Mode‬استفاده نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫کاھش صدای دستگاه‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا کيفيت چاپ روی باال تنظيم شده است؟‬
‫تنظيمات سرعت چاپ را در درايور چاپگر افزايش دھيد‪ .‬تنظيم اولويت بندی سرعت‪ ،‬عمليات چاپ را سريعتر می کند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫اينجا را کليک کنيد‪ :‬درايور چاپگر‬
‫* قبل از کليک کردن اين قسمت برای باز کردن پنجره نصب درايور‪ ،‬از نرم افزار برنامه کاربردی در حال اجرا خارج شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬در صفحه ‪ Main، Fast‬را برای تنظيم ‪ Print Quality‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بسته به نوع رسانه‪ ،‬گزينه ‪ Fast‬ممکن است در دسترس نباشد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫تنظيم برای اولويت دادن به سرعت ممکن است کيفيت چاپ را کاھش دھد‪.‬‬
‫بسته به محيط سيستم شما‪ ،‬سرعت چاپ با دنبال کردن دستورالعمل ھای فوق بطور قابل توجھی زياد نمی شود‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 632‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نگھدارنده کارترﯾج ‪ FINE‬به موقعيت مناسب جھت تعوﯾض منتقل نمی شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به موقعيت مناسب جھت تعويض منتقل نمی شود‬
‫‪U325‬‬
‫نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به موقعيت مناسب جھت تعويض منتقل نمی شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬خاموش است؟‬
‫بررسی کنيد که چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬به رنگ سبز روشن باشد‪.‬‬
‫نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬حرکت نمی کند مگر اينکه دستگاه روشن باشد‪ .‬در صورتيکه چراغ برق )‪ (POWER‬خاموش باشد‪ ،‬واحد اسكن )‬
‫درپوش( را ببنديد و دستگاه را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه چراغ )برق( ‪ POWER‬به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند چاپگر راه اندازی می شود‪ .‬منتظر بمانيد تا چشمک زدن چراغ برق )‬
‫‪ (POWER‬متوقف شود و به رنگ سبز روشن بماند‪ ،‬سپس مجدداً واحد اسکن )درپوش( را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬آيا کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود؟‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را ببنديد‪ ،‬کد خطای نمايش داده شده را تأييد کنيد‪ ،‬اقدام مناسبی برای حل مشکل انجام دھيد و سپس آن را مجدداً باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای اطالع دقيق درباره برطرف کردن خطا‪ ،‬به کد خطايی روی ‪ LED‬نمايش داده می شود مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬آيا واحد اسکن )درپوش( به مدت ‪ 10‬دقيقه يا بيشتر باز مانده است؟‬
‫اگر واحد اسكن )درپوش( بيش از ‪ 10‬دقيقه باز گذاشته شود‪ ،‬نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به سمت راست حرکت می کند تا از خشک شدن ھد‬
‫چاپ جلوگيری نمايد‪ .‬برای برگرداندن نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به يک سمت برای تعويض‪ ،‬واحد اسكن )درپوش( را ببنديد و دوباره باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬آيا دستگاه برای مدت زيادی بطور مداوم چاپ می کند؟‬
‫واحد اسکن )درپوش( را ببنديد‪ ،‬لحظه ای صبر کنيد و سپس آن را مجدداً باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه چاپگر برای مدت زيادی بطور مداوم کار کند‪ ،‬ممکن است به دليل گرم شدن بيش از حد ھد چاپ‪ ،‬نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬به‬
‫محل تعويض حرکت نکند‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫باز کردن واحد اسكن )درپوش( ھنگام چاپ‪ ،‬نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬را به راست منتقل می کند‪ .‬واحد اسكن )درپوش( را ببنديد‪ ،‬بعد از پايان‬
‫يافتن چاپ‪ ،‬آن را مجدداً باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫کاغذ بدرستی تغذﯾه نمی شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < کاغذ بدرستی تغذيه نمی شود‬
‫‪U326‬‬
‫کاغذ بدرستی تغذيه نمی شود‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬زمانيکه کاغذ را در چاپگر گذاشته ايد موارد زير را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام قرار دادن دو يا تعداد بيشتری کاغذ در دستگاه‪ ،‬قبل از جاگذاری‪ ،‬آنھا را ورق بزنيد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه دو يا چند صفحه کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار می دھيد‪ ،‬لبه ھای صفحات را قبل از گذاشتن در دستگاه ھم تراز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگاميکه دو يا چند کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار می دھيد‪ ،‬دقت کنيد که دسته کاغذ از حد مجاز بيشتر نشود‪.‬‬
‫با اين حال‪ ،‬تغذيه صحيح کاغذ در شرايطی که ظرفيت به حداکثر رسيده است‪ ،‬بسته به نوع کاغذ يا شرايط محيطی )دما و رطوبت باال يا‬
‫پايين( امکان پذير نيست‪ .‬در چنين شرايطی‪ ،‬تعداد ورقه ھای کاغذ که ھر بار در دستگاه قرار می دھيد را به نصف مقدار مجاز کاھش‬
‫دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ھميشه کاغذ را بدون در نظر گرفتن جھت چاپ‪ ،‬در جھت عمودی قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگامی که کاغذ را در سينی عقب قرار می دھيد‪ ،‬سمت قابل چاپ آن را به سمت باال قرار داده و راھنماھای کاغذ را برای تراز کردن با‬
‫دو طرف کاغذ بکشيد‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬بررسی کنيد کاغذی که برای چاپ استفاده می کنيد بسيار ضخيم يا پيچ خورده نباشد‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬زمانيکه کاغذ پاکت نامه )‪ (envelopes‬را در دستگاه قرار می دھيد موارد زير را بررسی‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه روی کاغذ پاکت نامه )‪ (envelopes‬چاپ می کنيد‪ ،‬به قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی مراجعه کنيد و قبل از چاپ پاکت نامه ھا را‬
‫آماده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه پاکت نامه ھا )‪ (envelopes‬را آماده نموديد‪ ،‬آنھا را در جھت عمودی در دستگاه قرار داريد‪ .‬درصورتيکه پاکت نامه ھا )‬
‫‪ (envelopes‬را در جھت افقی قرار دھيد‪ ،‬آنھا بدرستی تغذيه نمی شوند‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬مطمئن شويد ھيچ مواد خارجی در سينی عقب وجود نداشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫اگر کاغذ در سينی عقب پاره شود‪ ،‬برای بيرون آوردن آن به کاغذ گير می کند مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر ھرگونه مواد خارجی در سينی عقب وجود دارد‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که دستگاه را خاموش کرده و دوشاخه آن را از پريز برق بيرون آورده ايد‪،‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 633‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 634‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کاغذ بدرستی تغذﯾه نمی شود‬
‫سپس ماده خارجی را خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :5‬غلطک تغذيه کاغذ را تميز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقبت و نگھداری روزانه‬
‫نکته‬
‫تميز کردن غلطک تغذيه کننده کاغذ‪ ،‬موجب ساييدگی غلطک خواھد شد‪ ،‬بنابراين اين مراحل را تنھا در صورت ضرورت انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 635‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫‪U328‬‬
‫کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫نکته‬
‫در صورتيکه در طول چاپ الزم باشد دستگاه را خاموش کنيد تا کاغذ گير کرده را خارج سازيد‪ ،‬جھت لغو چاپ قبل از خاموش کردن دستگاه‪،‬‬
‫کليدتوقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫کاغذ در شيار خروجی کاغذ يا سينی عقب گير کرده است‬
‫در ساير موارد‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 636‬از ‪704‬‬
‫کاغذ در شيار خروجی کاغذ ﯾا سينی عقب گير کرده است‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < کاغذ گير می کند < کاغذ در شيار خروجی کاغذ يا سينی عقب گير کرده است‬
‫‪U349‬‬
‫کاغذ در شيار خروجی کاغذ يا سينی عقب گير کرده است‬
‫کاغذ را با توجه به مراحل زير بيرون بياوريد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬به آرامی کاغذ را از ھر قسمت که راحت تر است‪ ،‬يعنی سينی عقب يا شيار خروجی کاغذ‪ ،‬بيرون بکشيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر کاغذ پاره شد و تکه ای از آن در چاپگر باقی ماند‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش‪ ،‬واحد اسکن )درپوش( را باز و کاغذ را خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراقب باشيد که دستتان با قطعات داخلی چاپگر تماس نداشته باشد‪.‬‬
‫بعد از خارج کردن کاغذ‪ ،‬واحد اسکن )درپوش جلو( را ببنديد و چاپگر را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر نمی توانيد کاغذ را بيرون بکشيد‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش و دوباره آن را روشن کنيد‪ .‬کاغذ ممکن است بطور خودکار بيرون بيايد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬مجدداً کاغذ را در دستگاه قرار دھيد و دکمه توقف‪/‬تنظيم مجدد )‪ (Stop/Reset‬را روی چاپگر فشار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر در مرحله ‪ 1‬دستگاه را خاموش کنيد‪ ،‬ھمه کارھای منتظر برای چاپ لغو می شود‪ .‬در صورت ضرورت مجدداً چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫زمانيکه کاغذ را مجدداً در دستگاه قرار می دھيد‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که از کاغذ مناسب برای چاپ استفاده می کنيد و آن را بدرستی در دستگاه‬
‫قرار می دھيد‪.‬‬
‫قرار دادن کاغذ ‪ /‬اسناد اصلی‬
‫توصيه می کنيم از کاغذی به جز اندازه ‪ A5‬برای چاپ اسناد دارای عکس يا گرافيک استفاده کنيد‪ ،‬در غيراينصورت موجب پيچخوردگی‬
‫کاغذ می شود و در نتيجه کاغذ خروجی گير می کند‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه نمی توانيد کاغذ يا خرده ھای باقی مانده آن را از دستگاه خارج کنيد‪ ،‬يا اگر بعد از خارج نمودن کاغذ خطای گير کردن کاغذ وجود دارد‪،‬‬
‫با نماينده خدمات مرکز تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 637‬از ‪704‬‬
‫در ساﯾر موارد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < کاغذ گير می کند < در ساير موارد‬
‫‪U353‬‬
‫در ساير موارد‬
‫از موارد زير اطمينان حاصل کنيد‪:‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬آيا مواد خارجی در سينی عقب يا اطراف شيار خروجی کاغذ وجود دارد؟‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬ھرگونه مواد خارجی را از سينی عقب پاک کنيد؟‬
‫اگر ھرگونه مواد خارجی در سينی عقب وجود دارد‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که دستگاه را خاموش کرده و دوشاخه آن را از پريز برق بيرون آورده ايد‪،‬‬
‫سپس ماده خارجی را خارج کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬آيا کاغذ پيچ خورده است؟‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬بعد از رفع پيچ خوردگی کاغذ‪ ،‬آن را در دستگاه قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫پيام روی صفحه راﯾانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < پيام روی صفحه رايانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫‪U331‬‬
‫پيام روی صفحه رايانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫شماره خطا‪ B200 :‬خطای چاپگررخ داده است‪ .‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد و سيم برق چاپگر را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪ .‬سپس با مرکز خدمات تماس‬
‫بگيريد‪Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of) .‬‬
‫‪ (the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center.‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫شماره خطا‪ ****:‬خطای چاپگر رخ داده است‪ .‬دستگاه را خاموش و سپس دوباره روشن کنيد‪ .‬اگر مشکل رفع نشد‪ ،‬برای جزئيات بيشتر به دفترچه‬
‫راھنما مراجعه کنيد‪Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If) .‬‬
‫‪ (this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail.‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫خطای مربوط به جدا شدن سيم برق نشان داده می شود‬
‫خطای نوشتن‪/‬خطای خروجی‪/‬خطای ارتباط‬
‫ساير پيام ھای خطا‬
‫صفحه ‪ Extended Survey Program‬چاپگر جوھرافشان‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس )‪Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey‬‬
‫‪ (Program‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫شماره خطا‪ B200 :‬خطای چاپگررخ داده است‪ .‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد و سيم برق چاپگر را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪ .‬سپس با‬
‫مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off) .‬‬
‫‪and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service‬‬
‫‪ (center.‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه را خاموش کنيد و سيم برق دستگاه را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫شماره خطا‪ ****:‬خطای چاپگر رخ داده است‪ .‬دستگاه را خاموش و سپس دوباره روشن کنيد‪ .‬اگر مشکل رفع نشد‪ ،‬برای جزئيات‬
‫بيشتر به دفترچه راھنما مراجعه کنيد‪Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the) .‬‬
‫‪printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more‬‬
‫‪ (detail.‬نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫"****" به صورت نويسه عددی‪-‬حرفی نشان داده می شود و به خطای روی داده بستگی دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5100‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫آيا حرکت نگھدارنده کارتريج ‪ FINE‬مسدود شده است‪.‬‬
‫چاپ را از رايانه خود لغو کنيد‪ ،‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد‪ .‬سپس کاغذ گير کرده يا مواد نگھدارنده را که مانع از حرکت نگھدارنده‬
‫کارتريج ‪ FINE‬می شوند بيرون آوريد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫مراقب باشيد که دستتان با قطعات داخلی چاپگر تماس نداشته باشد‪ .‬در صورت دست زدن به آن‪ ،‬چاپگر ممکن است بدرستی کار‬
‫نکند‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫به صورت نويسه عددی حرفی نشان داده می شود و " خطای چاپگر اتفاق افتاده است " نمايش داده می شود‬
‫دستگاه را خاموش کنيد و سيم برق دستگاه را از پريز برق جدا کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دوشاخه دستگاه را به برق بزنيد و دوباره آن را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ ،‬با مرکز خدمات تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫خطای مربوط به جدا شدن سيم برق نشان داده می شود‬
‫ممکن است وقتی دستگاه ھنوز روشن بوده سيم برق جدا شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫پيام خطای نمايش داده شده در رايانه را بررسی کنيد و روی ‪ OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دستگاه شروع به چاپ می کند‪.‬‬
‫برای جدا کردن سيم برق به اخطار در مورد کشيدن سيم برق مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 638‬از ‪704‬‬
‫پيام روی صفحه راﯾانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫خطای نوشتن‪/‬خطای خروجی‪/‬خطای ارتباط‬
‫بررسی ‪ :1‬درصورتيکه چراغ ‪) POWER‬برق( خاموش است‪ ،‬مطمئن شويد که دوشاخه به پريز زده شده است و‬
‫سپس چاپگر را روشن کنيد‪.‬‬
‫زمانيکه چراغ )برق( ‪ POWER‬به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند چاپگر راه اندازی می شود‪ .‬منتظر بمانيد تا چراغ ‪) POWER‬برق(‬
‫چشمک نزند و به رنگ سبز روشن بماند‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :2‬مطمئن شويد که درگاه چاپگر بدرستی در درايور چاپگر تنظيم می شود‪.‬‬
‫* در دستورالعملھای زير‪ "XXX" ،‬نشان دھنده نام چاپگر شماست‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫با ويژگی خاص ارائه دھنده به صورت اشتراک کاربری وارد سيستم شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪ Devices and Printers‬را از منوی ‪ Start‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows Vista‬منوی ‪ Printers < Hardware and Sound < Control Panel < Start‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows XP‬منوی ‪Printers and < Printers and Other Hardware < Control Panel < Start‬‬
‫‪ Faxes‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫روی نماد ‪ Canon XXX Printer‬راست کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ Printer properties‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ Windows Vista‬يا ‪ Windows XP‬روی نماد ‪ XXX) Canon XXX Printer‬نام دستگاه شماست( راست کليک‬
‫کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ Properties‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫جھت تأييد تنظيمات درگاه‪ ،‬روی زبانه ‪ Ports‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دقت کنيد که درگاھی به نام‪) USBnnn‬در اينجا "‪ "n‬يک شماره است( که ‪ Canon XXX Printer‬در ستون ‪Printer‬‬
‫ظاھر شده است برای )‪ Print to the following port(s‬انتخاب شود‪.‬‬
‫اگر تنظيمات نادرست باشد‪:‬‬
‫‪ MP Drivers‬را دوباره نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫حتی اگر درگاه موسوم به ‪ USBnnn‬ھم انتخاب شده باشد چاپ شروع نمی شود‪:‬‬
‫‪ Canon My Printer‬را از سينی کار راه اندازی کنيد‪ Diagnose and Repair Printer ،‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه را برای تنظيم درگاه درست چاپگر دنبال کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ Canon XXX Printer‬را‬
‫انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورتی که مشکل حل نشد‪ MP Drivers ،‬را دوباره نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬دقت کنيد که کابل ‪ USB‬محکم به درگاه ‪ USB‬دستگاه و به رايانه وصل شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫وقتی دستگاه با استفاده ازکابل ‪ USB‬به رايانه شما وصل شده است‪ ،‬موارد زير را بررسی کنيد‪:‬‬
‫درصورتيکه از دستگاه تقويت مثالً ھاب ‪ USB‬استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬آن را قطع کنيد‪ ،‬چاپگر را مستقيما ً به رايانه وصل کنيد و‬
‫دوباره عمليات چاپ را انجام دھيد‪ .‬درصورتيکه چاپ بطور عادی شروع شود‪ ،‬دستگاه تقويت دچار مشکل شده است‪ .‬برای‬
‫کسب اطالعات بيشتر با فروشنده دستگاه تقويت مشورت کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ھمچنين ممکن است مشکل از کابل ‪ USB‬باشد‪ .‬کابل ‪ USB‬را تعويض کنيد و عمليات چاپ را دوباره انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :4‬اطمينان حاصل کنيد که درايورھای ‪ MP‬بدرستی نصب شده است‪.‬‬
‫‪ MP Drivers‬را طبق مراحل شرح داده شده در حذف ‪ MP Drivers‬غير ضروری لغو نصب کنيد‪ ،‬ﺳﯽ دی راه اﻧداز )‪Setup‬‬
‫‪ (CD-ROM‬را در درايو ديسک رايانه بگذاريد و سپس ‪ Custom Install‬را انجام دھيد و ‪ MP Drivers‬را برای نصب مجدد‬
‫انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :5‬وضعيت دستگاه را روی رايانه خود بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مراحل زير را جھت بررسی وضعيت دستگاه دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫روی ‪ Control Panel، Hardware and Sound‬و سپس ‪ Device Manager‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه صفحه ‪ User Account Control‬نمايش داده شود‪ ،‬دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows XP‬روی ‪ ،Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, System‬کليک کنيد و سپس‬
‫روی ‪ Device Manager‬در صفحه ‪ Hardware‬کليک نماييد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫روی ‪ Universal Serial Bus controllers‬و سپس ‪ USB Printing Support‬دوبار کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه ‪ USB Printing Support‬نمايش داده نمی شود‪ ،‬دقت کنيد دستگاه به درستی به رايانه وصل شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫بررسی ‪ :3‬دقت کنيد که کابل ‪ USB‬محکم به درگاه ‪ USB‬دستگاه و به رايانه وصل شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫روی زبانه ‪ General‬کليک کنيد و مطمئن شويد که دستگاه ھيچ مشکلی ندارد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 639‬از ‪704‬‬
‫پيام روی صفحه راﯾانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫در صورتيکه خطای دستگاه نمايش داده شود‪،‬برای حل مشکل به راھنمای ‪ Windows‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ساير پيام ھای خطا‬
‫بررسی‪ :‬درصورتيکه پيام خطا در خارج از صفحه نمايش وضعيت چاپگر نمايش داده شود‪ ،‬موارد زير را بررسی کنيد‪:‬‬
‫"به دليل کافی نبودن فضا‪ ،‬از چاپ در نوبت نمی توان بطور موفقيت آميزی استفاده نمود" )‪"Could not spool‬‬
‫"‪(successfully due to insufficient disk space‬‬
‫ھر گونه پرونده غير ضروری را حذف کنيد تا فضای آزاد روی ديسک افزايش يابد‪.‬‬
‫"به دليل کافی نبودن فضا‪ ،‬از چاپ در نوبت نمی توان بطور موفقيت آميزی استفاده نمود" )‪"Could not spool‬‬
‫"‪(successfully due to insufficient memory‬‬
‫برنامه ھای کاربردی در حال اجرای ديگر را ببنديد تا حافظه موجود افزايش يابد‪.‬‬
‫اگر ھنوز قادر به چاپ نيستيد‪ ،‬رايانه خود را راه اندازی مجدد کنيد و دوباره عمليات چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫"درايور چاپگر يافت نمی شود" )"‪("Printer driver could not be found‬‬
‫درايور چاپگر را طبق مراحل شرح داده شده در حذف ‪ MP Drivers‬غير ضروری حذف کنيد و آن را مجدداً نصب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نام برنامه – نام فايل قابل چاپ نيست )"‪("Could not print Application name - File name‬‬
‫زمانيکه کار فعلی تمام شد‪ ،‬مجدداً عمليات چاپ را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ Extended Survey Program‬چاپگر جوھرافشان‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس )‪Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax‬‬
‫‪ (Extended Survey Program‬نمايش داده می شود‬
‫درصورتيکه ‪ Extended Survey Program‬چاپگر جوھرافشان‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس )‪Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended‬‬
‫‪ (Survey Program‬نصب شده باشد‪ ،‬صفحه تأييد از شما ارسال اطالعات استفاده از چاپگر و برنامه کاربردی‪ ،‬که يک ‪،‬سه و سپس شش‬
‫ماه بعد از نصب نمايش داده می شود‪ ،‬را درخواست می نمايد‪ .‬بعد از آن‪ ،‬به مدت چھار سال‪ ،‬ھر شش ماه يکبار نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫دستورالعملھای روی صفحه را مطالعه کنيد و مراحل زير را دنبال نماييد‪.‬‬
‫درصورت توافق در شرکت در برنامه بررسی و تحقيق‪:‬‬
‫روی ‪ Agree‬کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس از دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه پيروی کنيد‪ .‬اطالعات استفاده از چاپگر از طريق اينترنت ارسال می‬
‫شود‪ .‬اگر دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه را دنبال کنيد‪ ،‬از دفعه بعد اطالعات بطور خوددکار ارسال خواھند شد و صفحه تأييد مجدداً‬
‫نمايش داده نخواھد شد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫ھنگاميکه اطالعات ارسال می شود‪ ،‬صفحه احتياط از جمله صفحه امنيت اينترنت ممکن است نمايش داده شود‪ .‬در اين حالت‪،‬‬
‫مطمئن شويد که نام برنامه "‪ "IJPLMUI.exe‬باشد و سپس به آن اجازه دھيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر کادر انتخاب ‪ Send automatically from the next time‬را انتخاب نکرده باشيد‪ ،‬از بار دوم به بعد‪ ،‬اطالعات به‬
‫طور خودکار ارسال نمی شود و يک صفحه تاييد در ھنگام بررسی بعدی نشان داده می شود‪ .‬برای ارسال خودکار اطالعات‪ ،‬به‬
‫صفحه تأييد تنظيمات چاپ‪ :‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورت عدم توافق در شرکت در برنامه بررسی و تحقيق‪:‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 640‬از ‪704‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 641‬از ‪704‬‬
‫پيام روی صفحه راﯾانه ظاھر می شود‬
‫روی ‪ Do not agree‬کليک کنيد‪ .‬صفحه تأييد بسته می شود و از بررسی و تحقيق در اين لحظه صرفنظر می شود‪ .‬صفحه تأييد‬
‫مجدداً دو ماه بعد نمايش داده می شود‪.‬‬
‫برای حذف ‪ Extended Survey Program‬چاپگر جوھر افشان‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس‪:‬‬
‫برای حذف ‪ Extended Survey Program‬چاپگر جوھرافشان‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس‪ ،‬روی ‪ Uninstall‬کليک کنيد‪ ،‬و سپس‬
‫دستورالعملھای روی صفحه را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه تأييد تنظيمات چاپ‪:‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ھمانطور که در زير نشان داده شده از منوی ‪ Start‬موارد را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ Windows 7‬يا ‪ ،Windows Vista‬منوی ‪ Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program‬را‬
‫انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows XP‬منوی ‪ Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫در ‪ Windows 7‬يا ‪ ،Windows Vista‬ممکن است ھنگام نصب‪ ،‬حذف يا راه اندازی نرم افزار کادر‬
‫گفتگوی تأييد‪/‬ھشدار نمايش داده شود‪.‬‬
‫ھنگاميکه حقوق مدير سيستم برای انجام اين کار الزم است‪ ،‬اين کادر گفتگو ظاھر می شود‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه با اشتراک مدير سيستم وارد شده ايد‪ ،‬دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪ Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪ Change‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر پس از پيروی از دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه ‪ Yes‬را انتخاب کرده باشيد‪ ،‬صفحه تاييد ھنگام بررسی بعدی نشان داده می‬
‫شود‪.‬‬
‫اگر ‪ No‬را انتخاب کرده باشيد‪ ،‬اطالعات به طور خودکار ارسال می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫اگر ‪) Uninstall‬يا ‪ (Remove‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ Extended Survey Program،‬چاپگر جوھرافشان‪/‬اسکنر‪/‬فکس‬
‫حذف میشود‪ .‬از دستورالعمل ھای روی صفحه پيروی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫برای کاربران ‪Windows‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < برای کاربران ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪U333‬‬
‫برای کاربران ‪Windows‬‬
‫نمايشگر وضعيت چاپگر نمايش داده نمی شود‬
‫بررسی‪ :‬آيا نمايشگر وضعيت چاپگر فعال است؟‬
‫دقت کنيد که ‪ Enable Status Monitor‬در منوی ‪ Option‬نمايشگر وضعيت چاپگر انتخاب شود‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر را باز کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫در صفحه ‪ ،Maintenance‬روی ‪ View Printer Status‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫فعالسازی نمايشگر وضعيت ‪ Enable Status Monitor‬در ‪ Option‬را در صورتی که انتخاب نشده است در منوی‪.‬‬
‫در صورت استفاده از ‪ Windows 7‬يا ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫با ھر بار فشار دادن دکمه اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬روی دستگاه‪ MP Navigator EX ،‬راه اندازی می شود‬
‫تعيين پاسخ با استفاده از فشار دادن دکمه اسکن )‪ (SCAN‬روی دستگاه را بررسی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫برای مشخص کردن عکس العمل رايانه خود‪ ،‬مراحل زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورت استفاده از ‪:Windows 7‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫با ويژگی خاص ارائه دھنده به صورت اشتراک کاربری وارد سيستم شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪ Devices and Printers‬را از منوی ‪ Start‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫روی نماد ‪ XXX) Canon XXX Printer‬نام دستگاه شماست( راست کليک کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ Scan properties‬را‬
‫انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر صفحه ‪ User Account Control‬ظاھر شد‪ ،‬روی ‪ Yes‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫روی زبانه ‪ Events‬در صفحه ‪ XXX) WIA Canon XXX ser Properties‬نام دستگاه شماست( کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪ Start this program‬را برای ‪ Actions‬انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ MP Navigator EX Ver4.0‬را از منوی‬
‫گشودنی انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫يک رويداد را از منوی گشودنی ‪ Select an event‬انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬سپس برای راه اندازی ھر رويداد‪MP ،‬‬
‫‪ Navigator EX Ver4.0‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬اگر ‪ MP Navigator EX Ver4.0‬از قبل برای ھر رويداد انتخاب شده‬
‫است‪ ،‬روی ‪ Cancel‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫روی تأييد )‪ (OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در صورت استفاده از ‪:Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫با ويژگی خاص ارائه دھنده به صورت اشتراک کاربری وارد سيستم شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫منوی ‪ Scanners and Cameras < Hardware and Sound < Control Panel < Start‬را انتخاب‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 642‬از ‪704‬‬
‫برای کاربران ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫صفحه ‪ 643‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪) WIA Canon XXX ser‬که "‪ "XXX‬نام دستگاه شماست( را انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬سپس روی دکمه ‪ Properties‬کليک‬
‫کنيد‪.‬‬
‫اگر صفحه ‪ User Account Control‬ظاھر شد‪ ،‬روی ‪ Continue‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫روی زبانه ‪ Events‬در صفحه ‪ XXX) WIA Canon XXX ser Properties‬نام دستگاه شماست( کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪ Start this program‬را برای ‪ Actions‬انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬سپس ‪ MP Navigator EX Ver4.0‬را از منوی‬
‫گشودنی انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫يک رويداد را از منوی گشودنی ‪ Select an event‬انتخاب کنيد‪ ،‬سپس برای راه اندازی ھر رويداد‪MP ،‬‬
‫‪ Navigator EX Ver4.0‬را انتخاب کنيد‪ .‬اگر ‪ MP Navigator EX Ver4.0‬از قبل برای ھر رويداد انتخاب شده‬
‫است‪ ،‬روی ‪ Cancel‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫روی تأييد )‪ (OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Problems with Scanning
704 ‫ از‬644 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning
S901
Problems with Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Slow Scanning Speed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Page top
Scanner Does Not Work
704 ‫ از‬645 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work
S902
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the
USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 4: Restart the computer.
Page top
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
704 ‫ از‬646 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
S903
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Check 1: Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed.
If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install
and install MP Drivers.
Check 2: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and
select the machine.
Important
Do not select the model name that includes WIA in it.
Note
The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 3: Start from a TWAIN-compliant application.
Page top
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner
Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
S904
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Screen Does Not Appear
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Turn off the machine, then reconnect the USB cable and replug
the power cord.
Check 3: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 4: If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the
USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 5: Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed.
If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install
and install MP Drivers.
Check 6: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and
select the machine.
Note
The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 7: Make sure that the application is TWAIN-compliant.
You cannot open ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.
Check 8: Exit ScanGear if it is running on another application.
Page top
704 ‫ از‬647 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
S905
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Check 1: Increase the scanning resolution.
Resolution
Check 2: Set the scale to 100%.
Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small.
Check 3: If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and
scan again.
On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine(Color) in Select Source.
Basic Mode Tab
On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Descreen in Image Settings to ON.
Image Settings
Note
If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again.
If you use MP Navigator EX, set Document Type to Magazine(Color) or enable Descreen in the Scan
Settings dialog box and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Check 4: Check the monitor's color depth.
Windows 7:
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen
resolution > Advanced settings.
On the Monitor tab of the displayed dialog box, set Colors to High Color (16 bit) or True Color (32 bit).
Windows Vista:
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen
resolution to open the Display Settings dialog box. Set the color depth to Medium (16 bit) or Highest
(32 bit).
Windows XP:
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog box. On
the Settings tab, set Color quality to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit).
Check 5: Clean the Platen and Document Cover.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Check 6: If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), use
Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in
Image Settings on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear.
Image Settings
Check 7: If the color tone of images is different from the original document,
take the following measures and scan again.
On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None.
Image Settings
On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear, set Color Matching.
704 ‫ از‬648 ‫صفحه‬
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
704 ‫ از‬649 ‫صفحه‬
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
704 ‫ از‬650 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
S906
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Check: Specify the scan area.
Click
(Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the
cropping frame (scan area) according to the document size.
You can also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along
the document (for example, in photos), or when you want to create custom cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page top
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
704 ‫ از‬651 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
S907
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Scan each item individually.
Some applications do not support multiple image scanning.
Page top
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
704 ‫ از‬652 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
S916
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Multiple image scanning may not be supported.
Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.
Page top
Slow Scanning Speed
704 ‫ از‬653 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Slow Scanning Speed
S908
Slow Scanning Speed
Check 1: To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to
around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi.
Resolution
Check 2: Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None.
Image Settings
Check 3: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document /
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and
scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Page top
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
704 ‫ از‬654 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
S909
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Check 1: Exit other applications and try again.
Check 2: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Resolution
Page top
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
704 ‫ از‬655 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
S910
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Check 1: Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear
(scanner driver) and scan again.
Check 2: Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space,
then scan again.
Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image
size is too large (such as when scanning a large document at high resolution.)
Check 3: For Location of Temporary Files in MP Navigator EX, specify a
folder on a drive with sufficient free space.
General Tab
Check 4: Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports.
Disconnect other devices.
Page top
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
704 ‫ از‬656 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
S911
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Check: Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall and reinstall the MP
Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Step 1: Uninstall the MP Drivers.
See "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers " for details.
Step 2: Uninstall MP Navigator EX.
1.
From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 4.0 > MP
Navigator EX Uninstall.
Note
In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when
installing, uninstalling or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.
2.
When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
3.
When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
MP Navigator EX is uninstalled.
Step 3: Reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and reinstall the
MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Software Problems
704 ‫ از‬657 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems
S930
Software Problems
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail
Software Program
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Page top
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Select... 704 ‫ از‬658 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear
in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program
S931
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in
the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program
Check 1: MP Navigator EX may not support the e-mail software program.
The following e-mail software programs are supported. (Images are attached to the mail message
automatically.)
- Microsoft Outlook
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP)
Check 2: If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check
that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Check 3: If using an e-mail software program other than the ones listed
above, select None (Attach Manually) when prompted to select a program
and attach the scanned image manually.
Page top
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
704 ‫ از‬659 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
S932
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Check: Set the printing size in the application.
Page top
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
704 ‫ از‬660 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
S933
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
Check 1: Change the display setting in the application.
For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
Note
You cannot reduce the image size in Paint. To reduce the display size, open the images in an
application.
Check 2: Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and
scan again.
The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.
Resolution
Page top
Scanned Image Does Not Open
704 ‫ از‬661 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Does Not Open
S934
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Check: If the file format is not supported by the application, scan the image
again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG.
For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
Page top
MP Navigator EX Problems
704 ‫ از‬662 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems
S940
MP Navigator EX Problems
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image
Page top
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
704 ‫ از‬663 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
S941
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again.
If the matching size is not found, scan at a larger size and trim the image.
See the Toolbar (
(Trimming)) in " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details.
Page top
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using th... 704 ‫ از‬664 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected
Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
S942
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly
When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Check that the settings are correctly set according to the
document.
If you cannot scan properly with Auto Scan, specify the document type and size.
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page top
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
704 ‫ از‬665 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image
Is Slanted
S943
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is
Slanted
Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document
checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Page top
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation
Changes in the Scanned Image
S944
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in
the Scanned Image
Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text
documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Page top
704 ‫ از‬666 ‫صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 667‬از ‪704‬‬
‫درصورتيکه نمی توانيد مشکل را حل کنيد‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < درصورتيکه نمی توانيد مشکل را حل کنيد‬
‫‪U151‬‬
‫درصورتيکه نمی توانيد مشکل را حل کنيد‬
‫درصورتيکه نمی توانيد مشکل را با راه حل ھای ارائه شده در اين فصل حل کنيد‪ ،‬لطفا ً با فروشنده چاپگر يا نماينده خدمات مرکز تماس بگيريد‪.‬‬
‫کارمندان حمايت کننده ‪ Canon‬جھت جلب رضايت مشتريان و به منظور ارائه پشتيبانی فنی‪ ،‬آموزش ديده اند‪.‬‬
‫احتياط‬
‫درصورت شنيده شدن ھرگونه صداھای غير عادی‪ ،‬دود‪ ،‬يا بو از چاپگر‪ ،‬آن را سريعا ً خاموش کنيد‪ .‬سيم برق را از پريز بکشيد و با فروشنده يا‬
‫نماينده خدمات مرکز تماس بگيريد‪ .‬ھرگز شخصا ً اقدام به تعمير يا باز کردن دستگاه چاپگر خود نکنيد‪.‬‬
‫اقدام به تعمير و پياده سازی دستگاه توسط مشتری‪ ،‬ھرگونه ضمانت نامه را صرفنظر از زمان انقضاء آن نامعتبر خواھد کرد‪.‬‬
‫قبل از تماس با نماينده خدمات مرکز‪ ،‬موارد زير را تأييد کنيد‪:‬‬
‫نام محصول‪:‬‬
‫* نام چاپگر شما روی درپوش جلوی راھنمای راه اندازی نوشته شده است‪.‬‬
‫شماره س‪ :p‬لطفا ً به دفترچه راھنمای راه اندازی دستگاه رجوع کنيد‬
‫جزئيات مشکل‬
‫چطور اقدام به رفع مشکل خود نموده ايد و نتيجه آن چه بوده است‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 668‬از ‪704‬‬
‫سؤاالت متداول‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < عيب يابی < سؤاالت متداول‬
‫‪U340‬‬
‫سؤاالت متداول‬
‫بدون نتيجه چاپ‪/‬چاپ تيره و لکه دار است‪/‬رنگ ھا اشتباه ھستند‪/‬خطوط سفيد رنگ‬
‫دستگاه حرکت می کند ولی جوھر خارج نمی شود‬
‫نمی توان ‪ MP Drivers‬را نصب کرد‬
‫چاپ شروع نمی شود‬
‫کپی‪/‬چاپ قبل از اتمام کار متوقف می شود‬
‫خطای نوشتن‪/‬خطای خروجی‪/‬خطای ارتباط‬
‫نتايج چاپ رضايت بخش نيست‬
‫کاغذ گير می کند‬
‫کاغذ بدرستی تغذيه نمی شود‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
P036
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using
the printer driver.
Restrictions on the Printer Driver
With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be
enabled.
In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software.
If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface
language, the driver screen may not be displayed properly.
Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you
will not be able to use the following functions correctly.
Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications
that prohibit EMF spooling, such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor, the following
functions will not operate.
Preview before printing on the Main tab
Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box
Page Layout, Poster, Booklet, Duplex Printing, Specify Margin..., Print from Last Page, Collate, and
Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab
Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the
preview display may appear different from the actual print result.
With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.
To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.
If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab
and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the
problem.
Note
Disable ICM required from the application software cannot be used when the XPS printer driver
is used.
Points to Note with Applications
There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation).
When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify
them.
When selecting Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup
tab, the selected printing function may not be effective, depending on the version of Word.
If this happens, follow the procedure below.
1. Open Word's Print dialog box.
2. Open the printer driver setup window, specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab, and click
OK.
3. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.
704 ‫ از‬669 ‫صفحه‬
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
704 ‫ از‬670 ‫صفحه‬
4. Open Word's Print dialog box again.
5. Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK.
6. Start printing.
If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator (Adobe Systems Inc), printing may take time or
some data may not be printed, printing may take time or some data may not be printed. Print after
unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box.
Page top
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Scanner Driver)
S004
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using
it.
Scanner Driver Restrictions
When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the
TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's
administrator for help.
Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from
standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.
Do not connect two or more machines or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same
computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the
Operation Panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.
Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly.
Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow
these steps and scan again.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Exit ScanGear, then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it.
3. Turn on the machine.
ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application,
ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open.
Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application.
Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high
resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600
dpi in full-color.
ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.
Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1.1.
Applications with Restrictions on Use
If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005, you may not be able to
scan using the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer.
You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows
XP Media Center Edition 2005. Scan with other applications such as MP Navigator EX.
In some applications, if you select the View scanned images checkbox on the Auto Scan Mode tab of
ScanGear, the window displaying the thumbnails of the scanned images may close automatically.
Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's
manual and change the settings accordingly.
Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only
the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image.
To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000, first save them using MP Navigator EX, then
import the saved files from the Insert menu.
When scanning platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), click
704 ‫ از‬671 ‫صفحه‬
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
704 ‫ از‬672 ‫صفحه‬
Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not be
scanned correctly.
When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), use Microsoft Clip
Organizer.
Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating
system's virtual memory and retry.
When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your
computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0% depending on the application. In
that case, cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the
operating system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan
the image via MP Navigator EX first, then save and import it into the application.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 673‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ضميمه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه‬
‫ضميمه‬
‫ناحيه چاپ‬
‫نحوه جدا کردن‪/‬وصل کردن درپوش سند‬
‫‪) Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History‬ويرايش سند چاپ يا چاپ مجدد از سابقه چاپ(‬
‫حذف کارھای چاپی ناخواسته‬
‫به روزآوری درايورھای ‪MP‬‬
‫لغو نصب ‪ On-Screen Manual‬ھا‬
‫حمل دستگاه‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫اخطار در مورد کشيدن سيم برق‬
‫اشتراک گذاری چاپگر از طريق شبکه‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 674‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < ناحيه چاپ‬
‫‪U504‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ‬
‫برای اطمينان از بھترين کيفيت چاپ‪ ،‬دستگاه امکان حاشيه گذاری در امتداد ھر لبه رسانه را فراھم می کند‪ .‬ناحيه واقعی قابل چاپ ناحيه درون اين‬
‫حاشيه ھاست‪.‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ پيشنھادی‬
‫ناحيه قابل چاپ‬
‫‪ Canon :‬توصيه می کند که در اين محدوده چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬محدوده ای که می توانيد در آن چاپ کنيد‪.‬‬
‫با اين حال‪ ،‬چاپ در اين ناحيه بر کيفيت چاپ يا دقت تغذيه کننده کاغذ تأثير می گذارد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫چاپ بدون حاشيه‬
‫با انتخاب گزينه چاپ بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬می توانيد چاپ را بدون حاشيه انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫ھنگام انجام چاپ بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬ممکن است قسمتی از لبه ھا حذف شوند زيرا اندازه تصوير چاپ شده برای قرار گرفتن در تمام صفحه‬
‫بزرگ شده است‪.‬‬
‫چاپ دوطرفه ھنگام انجام چاپ بدون حاشيه موجود نيست‪.‬‬
‫برای چاپ بدون حاشيه‪ ،‬از کاغذ زير استفاده کنيد‪:‬‬
‫‪" Glossy Photo Paper‬استفاده روزانه" ‪*GP-501‬‬
‫‪Photo Paper Glossy GP-502‬‬
‫‪*Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201‬‬
‫‪*Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT-101‬‬
‫‪Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201‬‬
‫‪*Matte Photo Paper MP-101‬‬
‫* از اين کاغذ فقط در صورت چاپ از رايانه خود می توانيد استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫انجام چاپ بدون حاشيه روی ساير کاغذھا‪ ،‬اساسا ً ممکن است کيفيت چاپ را پايين آورد و يا در نسخه ھای چاپی با تغيير فام رنگ تاثير‬
‫می گذارد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ بدون حاشيه روی کاغذ ساده ممکن است موجب کاھش کيفيت نسخه چاپی شود‪ .‬از اين کاغذھا تنھا به عنوان تست چاپ استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫تنھا زمانيکه از رايانه چاپ می کنيد می توانيد چاپ بدون حاشيه روی کاغذ ساده انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫چاپ بدون حاشيه برای کاغذھايی با اندازه ‪ ،legal، A5‬يا ‪ ،B5‬يا پاکت نامه ھا موجود نيست‪.‬‬
‫بسته به نوع کاغذ‪ ،‬چاپ بدون حاشيه ممکن است کيفيت چاپ را در لبه ھای بااليی و پايينی کاغذ کاھش دھد يا اين قسمتھا را لکه دار‬
‫نمايد‪.‬‬
‫‪Letter، Legal‬‬
‫پاکت نامه‬
‫ساير اندازه ھا به جز ‪Letter، Legal، Envelopes‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 675‬از ‪704‬‬
‫ساﯾر اندازه ھا به جز ‪Letter، Legal، Envelopes‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < ناحيه چاپ < ساير اندازه ھا به جز ‪Letter، Legal، Envelopes‬‬
‫‪U502‬‬
‫ساير اندازه ھا به جز ‪Letter، Legal، Envelopes‬‬
‫ناحيه قابل چاپ )عرض × طول(‬
‫اندازه‬
‫‪*A5‬‬
‫‪ 202.0 × 141.2‬ميلی متر ‪ 7.95 × 5.56 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪A4‬‬
‫‪ 289.0 × 203.2‬ميلی متر ‪ 11.38 × 8.00 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪*B5‬‬
‫‪ 249.0 × 175.2‬ميلی متر ‪ 9.80 × 6.90 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 15 × 10‬سانتی متر ‪ 6 × 4 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 144.4 × 94.8‬ميلی متر ‪ 5.69 × 3.73 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 10 × 20‬سانتی متر* ‪ 4 × 8 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 195.2 × 94.8‬ميلی متر ‪ 7.69 × 3.73 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 13 × 18‬سانتی متر*‪ 5 × 7/‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 169.8 × 120.2‬ميلی متر ‪ 6.69 × 4.73 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 20 × 25‬سانتی متر*‪ 8 × 10/‬اينچ‬
‫‪ 246.0 × 196.4‬ميلی متر ‪ 9.69 × 7.73 /‬اينچ‬
‫عرض *‬
‫‪ 172.6 × 94.8‬ميلی متر ‪ 6.80 × 3.73 /‬اينچ‬
‫* از اين اندازه کاغذ فقط در صورت چاپ از رايانه خود می توانيد استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ پيشنھادی‬
‫ناحيه قابل چاپ‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 676‬از ‪704‬‬
‫‪Letter، Legal‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < ناحيه چاپ < ‪Letter، Legal‬‬
‫‪U503‬‬
‫‪Letter، Legal‬‬
‫ناحيه قابل چاپ )عرض × طول(‬
‫اندازه‬
‫‪Letter‬‬
‫‪ 271.4 × 203.2‬ميلی متر ‪ 10.69 × 8.00 /‬اينچ‬
‫‪*Legal‬‬
‫‪ 347.6 × 203.2‬ميلی متر ‪ 13.69 × 8.00 /‬اينچ‬
‫* از اين اندازه کاغذ فقط در صورت چاپ از رايانه خود می توانيد استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ پيشنھادی‬
‫ناحيه قابل چاپ‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 677‬از ‪704‬‬
‫پاکت نامه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < ناحيه چاپ < پاکت نامه‬
‫‪U505‬‬
‫پاکت نامه‬
‫ناحيه چاپ پيشنھادی )طول × عرض(‬
‫اندازه‬
‫‪*European DL‬‬
‫‪ 103.2 × 179.5‬ميلی متر‪ 4.06 × 7.07/‬اينچ‬
‫‪*US Comm. Env. #10‬‬
‫‪ 98.0 × 200.8‬ميلی متر‪ 3.86 × 7.91/‬اينچ‬
‫* از اين اندازه کاغذ فقط در صورت چاپ از رايانه خود می توانيد استفاده کنيد‪.‬‬
‫ناحيه چاپ پيشنھادی‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 678‬از ‪704‬‬
‫نحوه جدا کردن‪/‬وصل کردن درپوش سند‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < نحوه جدا کردن‪/‬وصل کردن درپوش سند‬
‫‪U514‬‬
‫نحوه جدا کردن‪/‬وصل کردن درپوش سند‬
‫جدا کردن درپوش سند‪:‬‬
‫درپوش سند را عمودی به سمت باال نگھداريد‪.‬‬
‫وصل کردن درپوش سند‪:‬‬
‫مطابق شکل زير‪ ،‬جھت نصب درپوش سند‪ ،‬ھر دو لوالی )‪ (A‬را بطور عمودی در نگھدارنده )‪ (B‬وارد کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
P048
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used.
In the Canon IJ XPS preview window, you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print
history to print the document.
The procedure for using the Canon IJ XPS Preview is as follows:
Print
Combine Documents
Delete Document
Reset Documents
View Thumbnails
Move Document
Move Page
Delete Page
Note
Click
View Thumbnails to view all print pages of the print document selected from the
Document Name list.
To hide the print pages, click
View Thumbnails again.
Editing and Printing a Print Job
When printing multiple documents or pages, you can combine documents, change the print sequence of
the documents or pages, or delete documents or pages.
704 ‫ از‬679 ‫صفحه‬
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the preview
Check the Preview before printing check box on the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The Canon IJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing.
4. Editing print documents and print pages
Combining print documents
You can combine multiple print documents to form a single document.
To select multiple print documents, hold down the Ctrl key and click the documents to be
merged, or hold down the Shift key and press the upper arrow or lower arrow key.
By combining print documents, you can prevent blank pages from being inserted when you
execute duplex printing or page layout printing.
From the Document Name list, select the documents to be combined. On the Edit menu, select
Combine Documents from Documents to combine the documents in the listed sequence. When
you combine documents, the documents selected before the combining are deleted from the list
and the combined document is added to the list.
Changing the sequence of print documents or print pages
To change the sequence of the print documents, go to the Document Name list, and select
the print document to be moved. Next, on the Edit menu, select Move Document from
Documents, and select the appropriate item.
To change the sequence of the print pages, click View Thumbnails from the Option menu,
and select the print page to be moved. Next, on the Edit menu, select Move Page from Pages,
and select the appropriate item.
Deleting print documents and print pages
To delete a print document, select the target document from the Document Name list, and on
the Edit menu, choose Document and then Delete Document.
To delete a print page, click View Thumbnails from the Option menu, and select the print page
to be deleted. Next, on the Edit menu, select Delete Page from Pages.
After editing the print documents or print pages, you can change the print settings on the Page
Information, Layout and Manual Color Adjustment tabs as necessary.
Important
To display the multiple documents in the list, open the preview and execute print again.
To return the print documents to their original condition before they were edited in the preview,
on the Edit menu, select Reset Documents from Documents.
If the documents to be combined have different print settings, a message may be displayed.
Check the contents of the displayed message before combining the documents.
If the documents to be combined have different output paper sizes and duplex printing or page
layout printing is to be performed, the printer may not produce the expected print results for
certain print pages.
Check the preview before printing.
Depending on the print settings of the print document, some functions may not be available in
the Canon IJ XPS preview.
Note
You can rename Document Name to any name.
5. Executing print
Click Print.
When you execute print, the printer uses the specified settings to print the data.
704 ‫ از‬680 ‫صفحه‬
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
704 ‫ از‬681 ‫صفحه‬
Reprinting from the Print History
When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting, the document printed from the
preview is saved, and you can reprint the document with the same settings.
1. Displaying the print history
Select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> View Print History XPS.
The saved print document is displayed in the preview.
Important
To limit the number of print history registrations, click History Entry Limit on the File menu.
If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded, the print history registrations are deleted
starting from the oldest one.
2. Selecting a print document
From the Document Name list, select the document to be printed.
3. Executing print
Click Print.
Related Topic
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Page top
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
704 ‫ از‬682 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Deleting the Undesired Print Job
P037
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status
Monitor" when reading this information.
If the printer does not start printing, cancelled or failed print job data may be remaining.
Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
1. Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor
Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar.
The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
2. Display the print jobs
Click Display Print Queue....
The print queue window opens.
3. Delete the print jobs
Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu.
When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
The deletion of the print job is complete.
Important
Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the
print job of another user.
Note
When you perform this operation, all print jobs are deleted. If the print queue list contained a
necessary print job, start the printing process over from the beginning.
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 683‬از ‪704‬‬
‫به روزآوری دراﯾورھای ‪MP‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < به روزآوری درايورھای ‪MP‬‬
‫به روزآوری درايورھای ‪MP‬‬
‫دستيابی به جديدترين درايورھای‪MP‬‬
‫‪) Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers‬حذف درايورھای ‪ MP‬غيرضروری(‬
‫قبل از نصب درايورھای‪MP‬‬
‫نصب درايورھای‪MP‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
704 ‫ از‬684 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
P038
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear).
By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved.
Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
Important
You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
responsibility.
Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
For information on how to delete the MP Drivers, see " Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers ."
Related Topics
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
P039
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
The MP Drivers which you no longer use can be deleted.
When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running.
The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows:
When There is an Uninstaller
1. Start the uninstaller
If you are using Windows 7, Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model
name" -> MP Drivers Uninstaller.
If you are using Windows XP, select the start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP
Drivers Uninstaller.
The MP Drivers Uninstaller dialog box is displayed.
Important
In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting,
installing or uninstalling software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
2. Execute the uninstaller
Click Execute. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
When all the files have been deleted, click Complete.
The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete.
Important
Printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear) will be deleted when you uninstall the MP Drivers.
When There is No Uninstaller
When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows 7 or Windows Vista, follow these steps:
1. Select the printer to be deleted
If you are using Windows 7, select the Start menu -> Devices and Printers.
Click the model to delete, then press the Alt key on your keyboard. On the File menu, click
Remove device.
If you are using Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound > Printers.
Click the model to delete, then press the Alt key on your keyboard. On the File menu, click Delete.
2. Delete the printer
If you are using Windows 7, when the confirmation message appears, click Yes. Then when the
User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
The icon is deleted.
704 ‫ از‬685 ‫صفحه‬
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
704 ‫ از‬686 ‫صفحه‬
If you are using Windows Vista, when the User Account Control dialog box appears, click
Continue. Then when the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
The icon is deleted.
3. Select the printer driver to be deleted
If you are using Windows 7, click any icon in Printers and Faxes.
On the commandbar, click Print server properties, and then click the Drivers tab. If the Change
Driver Settings button is displayed, click that button.
When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
In the Installed printer drivers list, click the printer to delete.
If you are using Windows Vista, press the Alt key. On the File menu, select Run as administrator,
and then click Server Properties....
When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
Click the Drivers tab. In the Installed printer drivers list, click the printer to delete.
4. Delete the printer driver
When you click Remove..., Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed.
Select Remove driver and driver package., and then click OK.
In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box, click Delete.
5. Click OK
The deletion of the printer driver is complete.
Important
You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list.
If this happens, restart your computer, and then try again.
Page top
Before Installing the MP Drivers
704 ‫ از‬687 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Before Installing the MP Drivers
P040
Before Installing the MP Drivers
This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also
refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed.
Checking the Machine Status
Properly connect the personal computer and the machine. For details on connection instructions,
refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting Started.
Turn off the machine.
Checking the Personal Computer Settings
Terminate all running applications.
In Windows 7, Windows Vista, log on as a user who has the administrator account.
In Windows XP, log on as the computer administrator.
Important
Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version. For instructions on
deleting the MP Drivers, see "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers ."
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Installing the MP Drivers
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Installing the MP Drivers
P041
Installing the MP Drivers
You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows:
1. Turn off the machine
2. Start the installer
Double-click the icon of the downloaded file.
The installation program starts.
Important
In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting,
installing or uninstalling software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
3. Install the MP Drivers
At the Welcome window, click Next.
When the License Agreement window is displayed, check the contents, and click Yes. If you do not
agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement, you cannot install this software.
Installation of the MP Drivers begins.
After the Installation Complete window is displayed, check that the machine and the computer are
connected through a cable.
To select the connection port for your machine manually, check the Select printer port check box, and
click Manual Selection. At the Select Port window, select the connection destination, and then click
OK.
4. Complete the installation
Click Complete.
Turn on the machine, and wait awhile until the connection is recognized.
The procedure for installing the MP Drivers is complete.
Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be
displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.
Important
You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
responsibility.
Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version. For instructions on
deleting the MP Drivers, see "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers ."
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
704 ‫ از‬688 ‫صفحه‬
Installing the MP Drivers
704 ‫ از‬689 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
‫صفحه ‪ 690‬از ‪704‬‬
‫لغو نصب ‪ On-Screen Manual‬ھا‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < لغو نصب ‪ On-Screen Manual‬ھا‬
‫‪U509‬‬
‫لغو نصب ‪ On-Screen Manual‬ھا‬
‫برای لغو نصب ھمه ‪ on-screen manuals‬از رايانه خود‪ ،‬مراحل زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫قبل از لغو نصب ‪ ،on-screen manuals‬از ھمه ‪ on-screen manuals‬که در حالت بازشدن ھستند خارج شويد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬روی ‪) Canon XXX Manual < All Programs < Start‬در اينجا "‪ "XXX‬نام دستگاه شماست( <‬
‫‪ Uninstall‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬زمانيکه پيام تأييد ظاھر می شود بر روی تأييد )‪ (OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫زمانيکه پيام فرمان به راه اندازی مجدد رايانه نمايش داده می شود‪ ،‬برای راه اندازی مجدد رايانه خود بر روی ‪ OK‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 691‬از ‪704‬‬
‫حمل دستگاه‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < حمل دستگاه‬
‫‪U510‬‬
‫حمل دستگاه‬
‫ھنگام جابجايی دستگاه‪ ،‬آنرا در بسته بندی اوليه خود قرار داده و حمل کنيد‪.‬‬
‫درصورتيکه مواد اصلی بسته بندی را نداريد‪ ،‬با استفاده از مواد محافظ دستگاه را با دقت بسته بندی کنيد و آن را در جعبه محکمی قرار دھيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫دستگاه را بصورت کج‪ ،‬افقی‪ ،‬يا وارونه حمل و نقل يا نگھداری نکنيد چون ممکن است جوھر آن نشت کند و به دستگاه آسيب برساند‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬چاپگر را خاموش کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬مطمئن شويد که المپ برق )‪ (POWER‬خاموش و دستگاه از پريز کشيده شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫دستگاه را زمانيکه المپ برق )‪ (POWER‬دستگاه روشن است يا به رنگ سبز چشمک می زند از پريز نکشيد چون ممکن است باعث‬
‫آسيب ديدگی يا عملکرد نادرست دستگاه شود و دستگاه قادر به چاپ نباشد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬قسمت الحاقی پشتيبان کاغذ و پشتيبان سينی خروجی را جمع کنيد و سپس سينی خروجی کاغذ را ببنديد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬سيم چاپگر را از رايانه و دستگاه قطع کنيد‪ ،‬سپس دوشاخه را از پريز برق بکشيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬از نوار چسب برای محکم نمودن ھمه درپوشھای دستگاه استفاده کنيد تا از باز شدن آن در حين حمل و نقل‬
‫جلوگيری نمايد‪ .‬سپس دستگاه را در کيسه پالستيکی بسته بندی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ھنگام بسته بندی چاپگر در جعبه‪ ،‬مواد محافظ را به آن وصل کنيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫دستگاه را در حاليکه کارتريج ھای ‪ FINE‬در چاپگر نصب ھستند‪ ،‬بسته بندی کنيد‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫وقتی از يک شرکت حمل درخواست حمل و نقل دستگاه را می کنيد‪ ،‬به طوری که مشخص باشد روی دستگاه برچسب "شکستنی" يا "با‬
‫احتياط حمل شود" بزنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 692‬از ‪704‬‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫‪U511‬‬
‫باز کردن ‪Printer Driver Setup Window‬‬
‫می توان از طريق نرم افزار کاربردی مورد استفاده يا منوی شروع ‪ Windows‬به پنجره تنظيم درايور چاپگر دست يافت‪.‬‬
‫‪ Printer Driver Setup Window‬را از طريق نرم افزار کاربردی باز کنيد‬
‫برای انجام تنظيمات چاپ ھنگام چاپ کردن روش زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫انتخاب فرمانی که از طريق آن عمليات چاپ در نرم افزار کاربردی در حال استفاده انجام می شود‪.‬‬
‫به طور کلی‪ ،‬چاپ )‪ (Print‬در منوی فايل )‪ (File‬را برای باز کردن کادر گفتگوی چاپ )‪ (Print‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫نام مدل را انتخاب کرده و بر روی ‪) Preferences‬يا ‪ (Properties‬کليک کنيد‪.‬‬
‫پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر باز می شود‪.‬‬
‫نکته‬
‫بسته به نرم افزار کاربردی که استفاده می کنيد‪ ،‬ممکن است نام ھای فرمان يا نام ھای منو متفاوت باشد و مراحل بيشتری وجود‬
‫داشته باشد‪ .‬برای اطالع دقيق به راھنمای کاربر نرم افزار کاربردی مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪ Printer Driver Setup Window‬را از طريق منوی ‪ Start‬باز کنيد‬
‫برای انجام عمليات نگھداری مانند تميز کردن ھد چاپ يا برای انجام تنظيمات چاپ که در مورد تمام نرم افزارھای کاربردی مشترک می‬
‫باشد روش زير را دنبال کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ھمانطور که در زير نشان داده شده از منوی ‪ Start‬موارد را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ Windows 7، Devices and Printers‬را از منوی ‪ Start‬انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows Vista‬منوی ‪ Printers < Hardware and Sound < Control Panel < Start‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫در ‪ ،Windows XP‬منوی ‪Printers and Faxes < Printers and Other Hardware < Control Panel < Start‬‬
‫را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫بر روی نماد نام مدل کليک راست کرده و سپس از منوی نشان داده شده ‪ Printing Preferences‬را انتخاب کنيد‪.‬‬
‫پنجره راه اندازی درايور چاپگر باز می شود‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫باز کردن پنجره تنظيم درايور از طريق ‪(Windows 7) Printer properties‬يا ‪ Windows Vista) Properties‬يا‬
‫‪ (Windows XP‬زبانه ھای ديگری را با توجه به عملکردھای ‪ Windows‬مانند زبانه ‪) Ports‬يا پيشرفته )‬
‫‪ ((Advanced‬نشان می دھد‪ .‬اين زبانه ھا ھنگامی که درايور را از طريقچاپ موارد برگزيده )‪(Printing Preferences‬‬
‫يا نرم افزار کاربردی باز می کنيد ظاھر نمی شوند‪ .‬در مورد اين زبانه ھا که با توجه به عملکرد ‪ Windows‬ظاھر می‬
‫شوند به راھنمای کاربر ‪ Windows‬مراجعه کنيد‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
‫صفحه ‪ 693‬از ‪704‬‬
‫اخطار در مورد کشيدن سيم برق‬
‫راھنمای پيشرفته < ضميمه < اخطار در مورد کشيدن سيم برق‬
‫‪U516‬‬
‫اخطار در مورد کشيدن سيم برق‬
‫برای جدا کردن دوشاخه از پريز برق‪ ،‬مراحل زير را انجام دھيد‪.‬‬
‫مھم‬
‫وقتی سيم برق را بيرون می کشيد‪ ،‬دکمه روشن)‪ (ON‬را فشار دھيد‪ ،‬سپس مطمئن شويد که چراغ برق)‪(POWER‬خاموش است‪ .‬بيرون کشيدن‬
‫سيم برق ھنگامی که دستگاه ھنوز روشن است ممکن است باعث خشک شدن يا گرفتن ھد چاپ شود و کيفيت چاپ کاھش يابد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬دکمه روشن )‪ (ON‬روی دستگاه را فشار دھيد تا دستگاه خاموش شود‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬مطمئن شويد که المپ برق )‪ (POWER‬دستگاه خاموش و چاپگر از پريز کشيده شده باشد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬سيم برق را بيرون بکشيد‪.‬‬
‫مشخصات سيم برق بسته به کشور و منطقه استفاده متفاوت است‪.‬‬
‫باالی صفحه‬
Sharing the Printer on a Network
704 ‫ از‬694 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network
P042
Sharing the Printer on a Network
When multiple computers are being used in the network environment, you can share the printer
connected to one computer with the other computers.
The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the
same.
Settings on Print Server
The procedure for setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as
follows:
Settings on Client PC
The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as
follows:
When you execute print, the data is sent to the printer through the print server system.
Important
In case an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer, the
error message of Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print
server system. For regular printing, Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client
system.
Note
Install the printer driver from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine on the print server
system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system.
Related Topic
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
Page top
Settings on Print Server
704 ‫ از‬695 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Settings on Print Server
P043
Settings on Print Server
When you use the printer on a network, set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system.
The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows:
1. Install the printer driver on the print server system
For details on installation instructions, refer to the "Install the Software" in the manual: Getting
Started.
2. Select items from the Start menu as shown below:
If you are using Windows 7, select the Start menu -> Devices and Printers.
If you are using Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound > Printers.
If you are using Windows XP, select the start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other
Hardware -> Printers and Faxes.
The Devices and Printers window (Windows 7) or Printers window (Windows Vista) or Printers and
Faxes window (Windows XP) is displayed.
3. Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared
If you are using Windows 7, press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Printer properties
-> Sharing tab from the displayed File menu.
If you are using Windows Vista, press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as
administrator -> Sharing... from the displayed File menu.
If you are using Windows XP, select Sharing... from the File menu.
Important
In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting,
installing or uninstalling software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
Note
Windows XP may display a message recommending the user to use the Network Setup
Wizard to set up sharing.
When this message appears, choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing.
4. Set sharing
Select Share this printer on the Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary, and click OK.
The setup on the print server system is complete. Next, set up the client systems.
Page top
Settings on Client PC
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Settings on Client PC
P044
Settings on Client PC
After setting up the print server system, set up the client system.
The procedure for setting up the client systems is as follows:
If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista
1. Install the printer driver on the client systems
For installation instructions, see " Installing the MP Drivers ."
Note
During the installation, a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears. Click Manual
Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation.
2. Start the wizard
If you are using Windows 7, select the Start menu -> Devices and Printers -> Add a printer.
If you are using Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Network -> Add Printer.
The Add Printer window appears.
3. Add a printer
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and click the icon for the printer that you have
configured on the print server system to be shared, and then click Next.
Note
If the icon for the printer is not displayed, check that the printer is actually connected to the print
server.
It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear.
4. Complete the setup
Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish.
If you are using Windows 7, the icon for the shared printer will be created in the Devices and
Printers window.
If you are using Windows Vista, the icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers
window.
The setup on the client systems is complete. You can now share the printer in the network.
If you are using Windows XP
1. Install the printer driver on the client systems
For installation instructions, see " Installing the MP Drivers ."
Note
During the installation, a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears. Click Manual
Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation.
704 ‫ از‬696 ‫صفحه‬
Settings on Client PC
704 ‫ از‬697 ‫صفحه‬
2. Start the wizard
Select the start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware -> Printers and Faxes -> Add
a printer.
When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears, click Next.
3. Add a printer
Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, then click Next.
On the Specify a Printer window, click Next and then search for the print server system.
Click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared, and
then click Next.
Note
If the icon for the printer is not displayed, check that the printer is actually connected to the print
server.
4. Complete the setup
Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish.
The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window.
The setup on the client systems is complete. You can now share the printer in the network.
Page top
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Sharing the Printer on a Network > Restrictions on Printer Sharing
P415
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status
Monitor" when reading this information.
These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment. Check the
restrictions for the environment you are using.
When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network
A print completion message may be displayed. To disable the message to display, follow the
procedure below.
If you are using Windows 7:
In the Devices and Printers window of the client, select the printer from Printers and Faxes, and
open the displayed Print server properties.
Uncheck Show information notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab, and then restart
the computer.
If you are using Windows Vista:
Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system. Open Run as administrator ->
Server Properties... from the displayed File menu.
Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab, and then
restart the computer.
If you are using Windows XP:
Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window on the print server
system.
Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab, and then restart the
computer.
The bi-directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be
recognized.
If a client user opens the printer driver properties (to display the properties when using Windows 7,
press the Alt key, and select Printer properties from the displayed File menu) and then clicks OK with
the Enable bidirectional support check box cleared on the Ports tab, the bidirectional communication
function of the printer server may also be disabled.
In this case, check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the
client system.
When you print from a client system, you cannot use Canon IJ Preview.
When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system, they may be
grayed out. In this case, change the settings from the print server.
When you change the settings of the print server, you should delete the icon of the shared printer
from the client system, and then specify the shared settings again in the client system.
When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client
System as the Local Printer
The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system.
704 ‫ از‬698 ‫صفحه‬
Restrictions on Printer Sharing
704 ‫ از‬699 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬700 ‫صفحه‬
Advanced Guide > Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
A001
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
--- Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art --Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with
digital cameras.
You can also print borderless photos easily.
Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Note
See the section below for details on how to use Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
Create a Personalized Photo Album
Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy-PhotoPrint EX!
All you need to do is select which photos to use, select a layout, then load paper into your printer and
print. After you bind the printed sheets, you'll have the one and only album of your memories!
You can change the layout and background, and attach
comments to photos.
You can also select the size and orientation.
You can arrange a photo across the left and right
pages.
CHECK!
Select a theme (background design) to create a single-themed album.
Decorate Items with Text and Frames
You can add text and frames to photos. Attach a description of the photo in an album, and add a frame to
enhance the photo's atmosphere.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬701 ‫صفحه‬
CHECK!
Select Album to add text and frames. You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print.
Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos
Create calendars easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Create your own calendar using your favorite photos!
It'll be exciting to turn the calendar pages.
You can use all kinds of photos.
You can also create 2-month, 6-month and 12-month
calendars.
Create Stickers
Create stickers easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX!
Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends!
CHECK!
You can add text to photos.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
704 ‫ از‬702 ‫صفحه‬
Page top
Using MP Navigator EX
Advanced Guide > Using MP Navigator EX
S001
Using MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable
even for beginners.
Start MP Navigator EX
Click Here: MP Navigator EX
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX.
Scan Photos and Documents
You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens. You can also save/print scanned
images using MP Navigator EX.
Scan Small Documents at One Time
You can scan multiple small documents (photos, cards, etc.) at one time. It is useful as you do not need
to scan multiple times.
Scan Large Documents
You can easily scan documents that are larger than the Platen using MP Navigator EX. It allows you to
scan the left and right halves of a document separately and combine them back into one image.
704 ‫ از‬703 ‫صفحه‬
Using MP Navigator EX
704 ‫ از‬704 ‫صفحه‬
Scan with One-click
In One-click Mode, MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving, with a click of an icon. One-click
Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e-mail automatically.
Scan and Correct/Enhance Photos
You can easily correct/enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX. You do not need to use other
applications.
For details on how to use MP Navigator EX, refer to " Scanning with the Bundled Application Software ."
Page top
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement